The Book of Extended Abstracts - University of …...تلايصحت ىای جش اد یللولاييب م یز پوس ييه س زاقفق ۀیداحتا ضع یا اگش اد یليوکت

داشجیاى تحصيالت الوللی بييسهيي سوپزیم

قفقاز ۀای عض اتحادیتکويلی داشگا

یدانشگاه محقق اردبیل

خردادماه 71-71

The 3rd International CUA Graduate

Students Symposium

University of Mohaghegh Ardabili

June 5-6, 2016

1

The Book of Extended Abstracts

The Youth View

The 3rd International Caucasus Universities Association

Graduate Students Symposium

05-06 June 2016, Ardabil, Iran

Organized by:


The Caucasus Universities Association

Sponsored by:

Ardabil University of Medical Sciences

Islamic Azad University, Ardabil Branch

University of Applied Science and Technology

https://www.ardahan.edu.tr/erdebil2016/upload/erdebil2016_eng.pdf#page=1













دماهخردا 71-71


Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

2






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

3

The Youth View

The 3rd International Caucasus Universities Association

Graduate Students Symposium

Caucasus and Beyond, with Its Language, Literature, Arts, Economy,

Sociology, Science, History and Culture

The symposium aims to increase the cultural interaction between postgraduate

students in CUA member universities, exchange ideas related to literature in the

region, and promote students for future planning together. It is held in Ardabil in

remembrance of Shah Ismail Khataei by the University of Mohaghegh Ardabil and

Caucasus University Association with the contribution of Abroad Turkish Citizens

and Relative Communities, Ardabil University of Medical Sciences, Islamic Azad

University, Ardabil Branch, and the Ardabil University of Applied Sciences and

Technology.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

4

Organizing Committee: Assoc. Prof. Dr. Goudarz Sadeghi Hashjin (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Ahmad Yousefian Darani (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Reza Abdi (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)

Prof. Dr. Ghadir Golkarian (Near East University)

Prof. Dr. Gürkan DOĞAN (Ardahan University)

Prof. Dr. Orhan SÖYLEMEZ (Ardahan University)

Prof. Dr. Roin KAVRELİŞVİLİ (Ardahan University)

Scientific Committee: Prof. Dr. Yousef Abbaspour (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)

Prof. Dr. Erdoğan ALTINKAYNAK (Ardahan University)

Prof. Dr. Ercan ALKAYA (Fırat University)

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Ahmet ALİ ASLAN (Ardahan University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Mustafa ASLAN (Yıldırım Beyazıt University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Erdal AYDOĞMUŞ (Ardahan University)

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Tamilla ALİYEVA (Ardahan University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Vedi AŞKAROĞLU (Ardahan University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Samet AZAP (Ardahan University)

Prof. Dr. Ayabek BAYNİYAZOV (Ardahan University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Âdem BALKAYA (Kafkas University)

Prof. Dr. Hakkı BÜYÜKBAŞ (Ardahan University)

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Nergis BİRAY (Pamukkale University)

Prof. Dr. Alpaslan CEYLAN (Ardahan University)

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Talip DOĞAN (Yıldırım Beyazıt University)

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Mitat DURMUŞ (Kars Kafkas University)

Prof. Dr. Gürkan DOĞAN (Ardahan University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Şakir EŞİTTİ (Ardahan University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Ufuk ERDEM (Ardahan University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Fatih EGE (Ardahan University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Nasrin EGHBALİ (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Abdullah ELCAN (Ardahan University)

Prof. Dr. Ülkü ELİUZ (Karadeniz Technical University)

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Mehmet EROL (Kilis 7 Aralık University)

Prof. Dr. Ahmet Evren ERGİNAL (Ardahan University)

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Abdullah Eren (Ordu University)

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Ranetta GAFFAROVA (Ardahan University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Hanzade GÜZELOVA (Ardahan University)

Prof. Dr. Ghadir GOLKARIAN (Near East University)






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

5

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Türkan GÖZÜTOK (Karabük University)

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Ahmet İÇLİ (Ardahan University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Meheddin İSPİR (Kafkas University)

Prof. Dr. Ahmet KARTAL (Eskişehir Osmangazi University)

Prof. Dr. Roin KAVRELİŞVİLİ (Ardahan University)

Prof. Dr. Alaaddin KARACA (Muğla Sıtkı Koçman University)

Prof. Dr. Ceval KAYA (Ardahan University)

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Ferhat KARABULUT (Celal Bayar University)

Prof. Dr. Zekeriya KARADAVUT (Akdeniz University)

Prof. Dr. Emel KEFELİ (İstanbul 29 Mayıs University)

Prof. Dr. Filiz KILIÇ (Nevşehir Hacı Bektaş Veli University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Mehmet KILDIROĞLU (Ardahan University)

Prof. Dr. Ramazan KORKMAZ (Ardahan University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Levent KÜÇÜK (Ardahan University)

Prof. Dr. Muhsin MACİT (Anadolu University)

Dr. Seiffollah MODABBER (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Nurgül MOLDALIEVA (Ardahan University)

Dr. Faroug NASİRİ (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)

Prof. Dr. Mohammad NARİMANİ (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Mayrambek OROZOBAYEV (Ardahan University)

Prof. Dr. M. Hanefi PALABIYIK (Atatürk University)

Prof. Dr. Hossein SHAYEGİ (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)

Prof. Dr. Ma’refat SİYAHKOUHİAN (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Makbule SARIKAYA (Ardahan University)

Prof. Dr. Orhan SÖYLEMEZ (Ardahan University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Chinara SASYKULOVA (Ardahan University)

Prof. Dr. İbrahim ŞAHİN (Eskişehir Osmangazi University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Fatih ŞAYHAN (Ardahan University)

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Bahattin ŞİMŞEK (Ardahan University)

Assist. Prof. Dr. Oğuz ŞİMŞEK (Ardahan University)

Assoc. Prof. Dr. Muammer Mete TAŞLIOVA (Yıldırım Beyazıt University

Assist. Prof. Dr. Mehmet TERZİ (Artvin Çoruh University)

Prof. Dr. Vahit TÜRK (İstanbul Kültür University)

Prof. Dr. Enver TÖRE (Artvin Çoruh University)






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

6

Secretariat: Assoc. Prof. Dr. Reza Abdı (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)

Fatma AKTEMUR (Ardahan University)

Roya Rassizadeh (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)

Amin Anvarzadeh (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)

Ali Afzal Ghaffarı (University of Mohaghegh Ardabili)

Gülşah BEYOĞLU (Ardahan University)

Academic Candan TÜMER (Ardahan University)

Ress. Asst. Emine GÜVEN (Ardahan University)

Ress. Asst. Fatih KURTULMUŞ (Ardahan University)

Academic Eser KARADENİZ (Ardahan University)

Hilal KILIÇLIOĞLU (Ardahan University)

Ress. Asst. Ferhat UZUNKAYA (Ardahan University)

Sponsors: Ardabil University of Medical Sciences

Islamic Azad University, Ardabil Branch

University of Applied Sciences and Technology

Presidency for Turks Abroad and relative Communities






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

7

Invited Speakers:

Dr. Hasan Ameli, Department of Theology, Islamic Azad University; The Leadership

Delegate in the Province; and Friday Prayer Leader of Ardabil

Dr. Majid Khodabakhsh, Ardabil Provincial Governer

Prof. Dr. Ramazan Korkmaz, Head of Caucasus Univerisities Association; Rector of

Ardahan University

Associate Prof. Dr. Goudarz Sadeghi Hashjin, Chansellor of University of Mohaghegh

Ardabili

Mustafa Isen, Member of Turkish Parliment

Prof. Dr. Yurdal Jihangir, Girne University

Assistant Prof. Dr. Sajjad Hosseini, Mohaghegh Ardabili University






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

8

Message of the Chancellor of the University of Mohaghegh Ardabili

As academicians, we are already blessed with the creative and transcending views

of the youth in the universities and this event provides a yet more pluralistic view of

the youth in that it is attended by several young researchers form a variety of

contexts. In the meantime, the focus, on Caucasus and its history, is a regional one

which interests and affects all of us. Being charming from a dual and even multiple

perspectives, we value the event as an exceptional opportunity to listen, discuss,

share and interact.

On behalf of our academic community, I welcome all our revered visitors from

different parts of the Caucasus region and respect the concern the CUA initial

leaders had felt to establish the association and the mission they are following to

promote regional solutions to the regional challenges with the help of

predominantly young views.

Our history, culture and the young’s examination of them, paves the way for a better

understanding of the current confusing situation in the world and the region and is

hoped to promote still more convergence among the apparently different nations.

I wish all the participants a sweet stay in Ardabil and I hope all papers presented

add to the overall theme of the symposium. I do appreciate all those who helped

make this event a possibility.

Goudarz Sadeghi Hashjin






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

9

Message of the Head of Caucasus Universities Association

Kırgızistan’ın başkenti Bişkek’te 20 Mayıs 2016’da yapılan VI. Olağan Kongresi’nde katılım protokülü imzalayan üniversiteler ile birlikte üye sayısı 13 ülkeden 120’e ulaşan Kafkasya Üniversiteler Birliği (KÜNİB) yeni bir bilimsel toplantıyı tertiplemenin mutluluğunu yaşamakta. İlkini Nahçıvan’da, ikincisini Tebriz’de gerçekleştirdiğimiz “Kafkasya’ya Genç Bakışlar” başlıklı sempozyumumuz bu sene tarihî bir karakter olan Şah İsmail Safavî adına, 5-6 Haziran 2016’da onun doğum yeri olan Erdebil’de gerçekleşecek.

Tam ismi ile Ebu’l-Muzaffer bin Haydar bin Cüneyd es-Safevi olan ve Hatayi mahlasıyla şiirler yazan Şah İsmail, günümüz İran İslam Cumhuriyeti’nin önemli kültür merkezlerinden olan Erdebil’de doğdu. (17 Temmuz 1487) Safevî tarikatının şeyh ailesinin çocuğu olan İsmail, Safevî Hükümdarı olduktan sonra Kafkasya, İran ve Anadolu’nun içlerine kadar geniş bir coğrafyada etkili bir siyaset ve kültür adamı olarak tanındı.

Otuz yedi (37) yıllık kısa ömründe önemli siyasî başarılar elde etti. Hatayi mahlası ile aruz ve hece ile şiirler yazdı. Çocukluğunda ve gençliğinde yaşamış olduğu zorluklar şiirine de aksetti. Azerbaycan edebiyatının tanınmış şairlerinden Nesimi’den Fuzuli’ye kadar olan dönemde şiirleri önemli kitleler tarafından takip edilir oldu. Özelikle hece ölçüsü ile yazdığı şiirler Anadolu’da gelişen halk ve tekke edebiyatını etkiledi.

Şah Hatayi'm eydür Bağdad'dır vatan İkilikten geçip birliğe yeten Erenler yanında kıyl ü kal tutan Yolu dikenlidir hardan sayılır

dizelerinin sahibi Şah İsmail’in aziz hatırasına tertip edilen “Uluslararası Kafkasya’ya Genç Bakışlar III” başlıklı sempozyumda İran, Türkiye, Gürcistan, Azerbaycan, Ukrayna, Moldova (Gagauzeli), Beyaz Rusya, Kazakistan ve Kırgızistan’dan ellinin üzerinde bildiri sunulacaktır. Bu bildiriler, Kafkasya coğrafyasını tarihî, kültürel, dinî, ekonomik, sosyolojik, arkeolojik gibi pek çok bilim dalında inceleyen araştırma sonuçlarıdır. Genç bir sanatkâr ve devlet adamının adına yapılan bu toplantıda, onun yaşadığı ve hayatını vakfettiği coğrafyaya “genç bakışların” çok daha anlam yükleyeceğine inancım sonsuzdur. Sunulacak olan bu bildiriler en kısa zamanda kitap halinde basılacaktır.

Bütün katılımcılara, ev sahipliğini yapan Erdebil Üniversitesi yönetimine, emeği geçenlere ve elbette faaliyeti maddî olarak destekleyen T.C. Başbakanlık Yurtdışı Türkler ve Akraba Topluluklar Başkanlığı’na şahsım ve Başkanlığını yürüttüğüm Kafkasya Üniversiteler Birliği adına şükranlarımı sunuyorum.

Saygılarımla, Prof. Dr. Ramazan Korkmaz

KÜNİB Başkanı ve Ardahan Üniversitesi Kurucu Rektörü






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

11

Table of Contents

Title Page

Symposium Scehdule 15

Oral and Poster Presentations Extended Abstracts

Acute Effect of Glutamine Supplementation on Serum Levels of LDH

after Eccentric Resistance Exercise in Untrained Young Men Akram ebadi, Marefat siahkohian, Babak nakhostin rohi and Mohsen

sheykhlouvand

21

Acute Effect of Glutamine Supplementation on Serum Levels of CPK

after Eccentric Resistance Exercise in Untrained Young Men Akram ebadi, Marefat siahkohian, Babak nakhostin rohi and Mohsen

sheykhlouvand

25

Project-Based According to Functional Knee Braces by Plastic Design Amin Ghannadiasl, Kazem Shakeri and Nasim Nakhlband saei

29

The Effect of Opening Position in the Rectangular Concrete Beams on the Size and Weight of Steel Consumption Amin Ghannadi Asl, Arezoo Gharibi Asl and Soheil Soleymanzade moghaddam

37

Numerical Integration Using Daubechies’ Wavelets by Linear Least

square method Amin Anvarzadeh and Mina Salimi

45






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

11

The Optimization of Consumption steel T-Shaped Concrete Beams by

Genetic Algorithms Amin Ghannadi asl, Arezoo Gharibi asl and Soheil Soleymanzade moghaddam

53

Wahhabism in Republic of Azerbaijan Morteza Ebrahimi, Parisa Baghghal Asgari and Naser Rahmani

57

Power Flow Solution in a Larg Scale Power System Including IPFC Elham Mokaramian, Hossein Shayeghi and Abdolah Younesi

63

A Study of Domestication and Foreignization Strategies in the Persian

Translation of "IL GROTTESCO QUOTIDIANO"

Laleh Mousavi and Tohid Siami

70

Comparison of PID Type Controller Performance in Microgrid

Frequency Deviation Enhancement Using MFO Algorithm Maryam Houshyari, Hossein Shayeghi and Abdollah Younesi

78

Analysis of the Relationship Between Social Capital and Job

Satisfaction in Organizations Masoud Darabi and Nasrin Azizian Kohan

87

Entanglement of Non-inertial Fermions is not Invariably Suitable for

Superdense coding Mehrnoosh Farahmand, Hosein Mohammadzadeh, Hossein Mehri-Dehnavi and

Robabeh Rahimi

92

Thermodynamic Entropy Due to Lorentz Violation Mehrnoosh Farahmand and Hosein Mohammadzadeh

99

New Approach for Solution of Volterra-Fredholm Integral Equations






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

12

Mina Salimi and Amin Anvarzadeh

106

Haar Wavelet Method For Solving One-dimensional Burger’s equation M.Zarebnia and R.Parvaz

111

The impact of Russian and Chechen conflicts on the Caucasus crisis Morteza Ebrahimi, Sed Ali Mortazavi Emami Zavare, Fahime Oleiki and Mehdy Jahantab

116

The America's Role in the Georgia Crisis Morteza Ebrahimi, Somayeh Abbasi and Hamzeh Ganji

123

Qarabag, Reasons of the Formation and Prolongation of the Crisis Morteza Ebrahimi, Naser Rahmani and Parisa Asgari

129

Determine and Evaluate the Aerobic and Anaerobic Threshold Heart

Rate of Maximum Heart Rate Threshold in Sedentary Female

Negar Asghari Moghaddam, Marefat Siahkouhian and Nasrin Azizian

135

The Effect of Noticing and Input Enhancement in Reading on Speaking

Skill by Intermediate Learners Reza Abdi and Golnaz Tarbali

141






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

13

The Effect of Collaboration Conditions on Learning Requesting Functions Reza Abdi and Rokhsareh Haghjoo

147

The Effect of Teaching Compositional, Semi-compositional, and Non-

compositional Idioms on Intake of EFL Learners Reza Abdi,Ghazal Farangizade

153

Exercise and Diabetes: A Review of the Evidence

Sajjad Azizkhah Alanagh, Marefat Siahkohian and Afshin Dalir

160

Optimal Design of PI Controller for Load Frequency Control in a Two-

Area Power System with DFIG Based Wind Turbine Samira Fallahi, Hossein Shayeghi and Abdolah Younesi

166

Macroscopic Quantum Tunneling in Superconductor-Insulator-

Superconductor Josephson Junction Sanaz Zohouri Kakhki and Mohammad Hamdipour

173

The Effect of Planning on Iranian Intermediate EFL Learners' Mastery

of Writing Skill Sara Mirazi and Asgar Mahmoudi

178

Task Scheduling in Cloud Computing Using Particle Swarm

Optimization Shahram Jamali,Fatemeh Alizadeh and Soheila Sadeqi

192

Forecast Record-Distance Running and Speed of Both the 100m and

10,000m Record Soheil Mosavi, Marefat siahkohian, Hamed mosavi and Akram ebdi

199






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

14

The Effect of Submaximal Exercise Combined with Weight Training

and Muscle Hypertrophy Limits Blood Flow to the Arm Soheil Mosavi, Marefat siahkohian and Hamed mosavi and Akram ebdi

203

The Effect of Combination of Strength Arm Muscles Following

Exercise Maximum Congestion Backlash Soheil Mosavi, Marefat Siahkohian, Lotfali bolboli and Hamed Mosavi

209

A study of domestication and foreignization strategies in the Persian

translation of "IL GROTTESCO QUOTIDIANO" Tohid Siami and Laleh Mousavi

214

Physical pr1operties and mechanical behavior under compressive

loading of Green Walnut Zahra Basati, Salman Habibi and Vali Rasooli-Sharabian

223

Some Physical and Mechanical Properties of Hawthorn Fruit Zahra Basati, Salman Habibi and Vali Rasooli-Sharabian

234






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

15

The Symposium Schedule

June 5, 2016

Time Hall 1 Hall 2 Hall 3

11:50

-

12:10

Sevda GEÇEN LalehMousavi, Tohid Siami

Akramebadi,

MarefatSiahkohian, Babak

Nakhostinrohi

Ortadoğu'daKadınOlmak:

SabırTaşı Romanı Üzerine

Yakın Okuma

A study of domestication

and foreignization

strategies in the Persian

translation of "IL

GROTTESCO QUOTIDIANO"

Acute effect of glutamine

supplementation on serum

levels of LDH after eccentric

resistance exercise in

untrained young men

12:10

-

12:30

Shabnam GOLKARIAN RaminMoharami,

ZhilaEbrahimi

SajjadAzizkhahAlanagh,

Marefat Siahkohian,

AfshinDalir

The impact of identity;

manifestation of culture in

the built environment, and

consequences of lack of

identity. Case study (Iran-

Tehran)

Adaptation status and

poetry of Seyyed Ashraf Al-

din Gilani& Ali Akbar Saber

Exercise and Diabetes: A

Review of the Evidence

14:30

-

14:50

Tamar LOMADZE Reza

Parvaz,MohammadZarebnia

Amir

MasoudShokri,FarhadSattar

i,SoghraMirershadi

Pre-election Discourse in

Georgia

Haar Wavelet Method For

Solving One-dimensional

Burger’s equation

Nonlinear Optical

Properties of Perovskite

Nanoparticles






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

16

June 5, 2016 - Continued

14:50

-

15:10

Tamta AMIRANASHVILI Mahdi Rahmatinia

Akbar FarhadiVarkaneh,

GhaderNajarbashi,

BahmanSeifi

The Problem of

Intertextuality – William

Shakespeare and Aldous

Huxley’s Brave New World”

Solving One-dimensional

Burger’s equation

The entanglement

properties of a spin chain

Heisenberg XY model

15:10

-

15:30

Nino ZEDGİNİDZE MasoomehShabani,Ahmad

YousefianDarani

MehrnooshFarahmand,

HoseinMohammadzadeh,Ho

sseinMehri

The Persian Root Shen in

the Georgian Language and

Toponymy

On weak McCoy modules

over commutative rings

Entanglement of non-

inertial fermions is not

invariably suitable for

superdense coding

16:00

-

16:20

Rıza OYLUM ÖzgeNur ÖĞÜTÇÜ Aslıhan AYTAÇ

RomanlardaŞah İsmail: Üç

Roman

ÜzerindenKarşılaştırmalıBir

Analiz

Relations Between Iran and

South Caucasus Countries in

the post-Sanctions Era:

Energy and Transportation

Corridors

THE HISTORICAL

AWARENESS IN THE

NOVEL 'BASKIN' BY

TÖLÖGÖN KASIMBEKOV

16:20

-

16:40

Ahmet KESKİN AslanYavuz ŞİR, Bilgay

DUMAN HalilFatih ALAGÖZ

HAK-MUHAMMED-ALİ

DEDİM: ŞAH HATÂYÎ

ŞİİRİNDE ESTETİK BİR

DİNAMİK OLARAK NİYAZ (I

MENTIONED ALLAH-

MUHAMMAD-ALİ:

INVOCATION AS AN

ESTHETICS DYNAMIC in

SHAH HATÂYÎ’S POETRY)

Iran’s Energy and Security

Policy Towards Its

CengizAytmatov’un

‘Yüzyüze’

ÖyküsündeBaşkişininBenlik

Algısı, The Protagonist's

Sense of Self in the Novel

'Face To Face' by

CengizAytmatov






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

17


16:40

-

17:00

Nuriman ABDÜREŞİD Teona KVANTCHİANİ İpek YILDIZ

Şah İsmail

Hatayî’nınŞiirlerindenÇin-ü

TürkistanBölgesinebir

“Gezinti”

Ethnodemographic and

cultural situation in

Tetritskaro district of

Georgia

AhmetMithatEfendi’nin

“Kafkas”

AdlıRomanındaMillîKimlikÜ

zerine /On the National

Identity of “Caucasian

Novel” of

AhmetMithatEfendi

17:00

-

17:20

Salome BERIDZE Fazıl ÖZDAMAR

Toward The Ancient

Georgian- Iranian

Toponymy Conections

THE EFFECTS OF THE

FOLKTALES TO THE

CREATION OF POEM: AŞIK

ABBAS AND HAN ÇOBAN

POEMS

June 6, 2016

Hall 1 Hall 2 Hall 3

9:30-

9:50

Tamuna TCHITCHAGUA

Morteza Ebrahimi,

SomayehAbasi,

HamzehGanji

Armenian Diasporas in

Georgia

Studying the role of the

USA in Georgia`s crisis

The geographical

landscape and

archaeological analysis of

pre-historic settlement

patterns of East of

Azerbaijan based on the

first part of archaeological

surveys of Namin






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

18


09:50-

10:10

Ketevan TSIMINTIA

MasoudDarabi,

SajjadPaydar,

BehnamArefi, Mehdi

GhorbaniGharazaki

Zahra Basati, Salman

Habibi,ValiRasooli-

Sharabian

Ossets in Georgia: History

and Modernity

solution to attract sports

tourism

Physical properties and

mechanical behavior under

compressive loading of

Green Walnut

10:10-

10:30

Ana RAMAZASHVİLİ SadeghFarahmand Amin,

KambizPushaneh

Zahra Basati, Salman

Habibi,ValiRasooli-

Sharabian

Alternative Flea Market in

Tbilisi

Relationship in the

adaptability rate of person-

environment and stress

between primary stage

teachers in districts1،2

Ardabil based on Person-

environment adaptation

model

Some physical and

mechanical properties of

Hawthorn fruit

11:00-

11:20

Fatma TOPDAŞ

EbrahimZareImani, Amin

GhorbaniGoshaehOlya,

AlialnaghiMostafaei

FaridehManafi,

Reza AlipanahMoghadam

ANAR RIZAYEV’İN ‘AK

LİMAN’ VE ‘BEŞ KATLI

EVİN ALTINCI KATI’ ADLI

ROMANLARINDA

SİMGESEL BİR

DEĞER: MEKÂN

Routing in Vehicle

Networks Based the

Location of Returning

Message in the Route

Evaluation of MDA and

SOD in secondary iron

overload model






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

19


11:20-

11:40

Seçkin SARPKAYA

Amin Ghannadiasl,

KazemShakeri,

NasimNakhlbandsaei

FaridehManafi, Zahra

Farzanehsheikhahmad,Ara

shMehripiryvatlo,Reza

AlipanahMoghadam

Camasbname’denMasallar

aŞahmaran:

TürkiyeSahasıMasallarında

Şahmaran Tipi veAnlatıları

Project-based according to

functional knee braces by

plastic design

Estimation of catalase in

Serum as a Biomarker for

antioxidative Stress in

Patients with Esophageal

Cancer

11:40-

12:00

Emrah SEFEROĞLU

Amin GhannadiAsl,

ArezooGharibiasl,

SoheilSoleymanzadeMogad

dam

Sam

Rahimnejad,Mohammad

Reza Rahimnejad

BEN’DEN BİZ’E: BAHTİYAR

VAHAPZADE’NİN

ŞİİRLERİNDE MİLLİ

KİMLİK İNŞASI

The effect of opening

position in the rectangular

concrete beams on the size

and weight of steel

consumption

Effect of Bacopamonnieri

extract on the motor

activity change due social

isolation-induced stress

12:00-

12:20

Emine GÜVEN

Maryam Houshyari,

HosseinShayeghi,

AbdollahYounesi

Seyyed Saied Disnad,

Samira MahmoudiNia

ON THE MATTER OF

TRANSLATİON AMONG

TURKİSH DİALECTS AND

ABOUT PROPER NOUNS

Comparison of PID Type

Controller Performance in

Microgrid Frequency

Deviation Enhancement

Using MFO Algorithm

Effects of erythropoietin in

the prevention of cell

damage and necrosis in the

liver induced by ischemia-

reperfusion in rats






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

21


14:20-

14:40

Alev UYSAL Aysel OSOYDAN

Erdem TAZEGÜL

EVALUATİON OF

CONCEPTUAL AND

SYMBOLİC PLANE OF THE

HATAYİ-LOVE-POWER

TRİANGLE AT İSKENDER

PALA’S NOVEL

“ŞAH&SULTAN”

ÖZE DÖNÜŞ

GÖSTERGELERİ:

ŞEHRİYAR’IN

HEYDERBABA’YA SELAM

ŞİİRİ

ZENCAN AĞZI ÜZERİNE

BİR İNCELEME

14:40-

15:00

Erkan BEDER Hakan ÇALIK Andrei MAXIMCHYK

TopraktanAteşeBirAşkınSe

rgüzeşti

REFLECTED IMAGE OF

GEOGRAPHY ON POETRY:

CAUSCASUS IN MIKAIL

MUSFIK’S POEMS

Trophies of the Russian–

Turkish and Russian-

Persian wars of the XVIII–

XIX centuries in the

collection of the Caucasian

Military History Museum

15:00-

15:20

Emel ŞENGÖNÜL Sema ORUÇ Ömer TEMİZKAN

CengizAytmatov’un

"BeyazGemi"sindeModerni

zmEleştirisi

JOURNEY FROM

HOMELAND TO FOREIGN

LAND IN POETRY OF

ELMAS YILDIRIM

Türkiye’de “Öteki” ve

“Yerli”

BirHalkOlarakKaraçay-

Balkarlar

15:20-

15:40

Akif XANSULTANLI Taha Tuna KAYA Erasti ELIJARASHVILI

GürcistandaBorçalıBölgesi

ndeAşıklıkGeleneklerininT

arihi

AN EVALUATION ON

POEMS OF HATAYÎ IN

CÖNK 6706 REGISTERED

IN SIVAS - ZIYA BEY

LIBRARY

Political Aspects of

Caucasian Regional

Security in 21st

Century:The History and

Reality






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

21

Acute Effect of Glutamine Supplementation on Serum

Levels of LDH after Eccentric Resistance Exercise in

Untrained Young Men

Akram ebadi Soheil mosavi

Marefat siahkohian Babak nakhostin rohi

Mohsen sheykhlouvand

Physical education,Mohaghegh Ardebili, Iran Physical education,Mohaghegh Ardebili, Iran Physical education,Mohaghegh Ardebili, Iran Physical education,Mohaghegh Ardebili, Iran

Abstract L-Glutamine is the most abundant amino acid in human muscle protein synthesis is and can Lactate

Dehydrogenase (LDH) is one of biochemical degradation of muscle cells in blood serum reduce.

Increased serum Lactate Dehydrogenase and exercise extrovert is more pronounced among non-

athletes. The aim of this study is acute influence of L-Glutamine supplementation on serum levels of

LDH after eccentric resistance exercise in young men. Methods: 16 randomly selected young man

(age: 22.35±2.27yr; body mass: 69.91± 9.78kg; height: 177.08±4.32cm) disabled and the two groups

(n=8) control group (n=8) were divided that all subjects were obtained twice in the 8th with

maximum dominant leg begins to warm up, then in 3 sets of 15 teeth with 70%1 RM performed knee

flexion. Test the positive side move to the zero angle of the knee joint did and the motion negative

(eccentric contraction of the quadriceps) was carried out by subjects. Also, rest for 3 minutes

between each session was considered. The active group received L-Glutamine acute. Blood samples

were taken from the subjects after 24 hours and data using spss software and analyzed by parried

sample T test (P≤0.05). Results showed that acute consumption of L-Glutamine in the active group (P

= 0.001) were significant and in the control group (P = 0.17), no significant effect was observed. This

study showed that acute consumption of L-Glutamine can be Lactate Dehydrogenase is reduced and

muscle damage.

Keywords: Lactate Dehydrogenase, L-Glutamine ,eccentric exercise






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

22

Introduction

Many athletes use a variety of dietary supplements to improve their performance and minimizing

risk of injures to provide them with an advantage over their opponent (2). DOMS and impaired

muscle function are the common consequences of excessive EE (1). Glutamine is the most abundant

amino acid within the human body (4). Multiple roles of dietary protein and key amino acids such as

glutamine create a variety of potential applications for hard-training athletes (4). Increase

intramuscular glutamine levels have been directly linked to influencing muscle cell volume (9),

which enhances protein synthesis, and increases muscle size. By increasing muscle mass, the

contractile force of a muscle can be increased (2).During exercise, increases and decreases in plasma

glutamine levels have been demonstrated and these variations are reflected by the type, duration,

and intensity of exercise (6). Exercise induced muscle damage to muscle fibers resulting in an

inflammatory response (7) and myofibrillar damage along the Z-band (8).

In general, DOMS continues to increase after exercise and peaks between 24 and 48 h after exercise).

The reasons behind DOMS have been a steady interest for many sports scientists for a long time.

Although several factors including lactic acid, connective tissue damage surrounding muscles, muscle

temperature, muscle spasm, inflammatory responses, free radicals, and nitric oxides have been

suggested for causing DOMS, there is no clear explanation Previous literatures have speculated that

the cause of DOMS is due to structural muscle damages and perturbation of calcium homeostasis or

acute inflammatory responses to exercise .The EMG spectrum from eccentric, concentric muscle

contractions and increased serum levels of muscle proteins such as creatine kinase (CK) in humans

were studied as a factor of mechanical damage of muscle fiber and functional change of metabolic

tissue (9,10). Prophylactic and therapeutic nutritional interventions involving protein, protein

hydrolysate, mixed amino acids, selective amino acids, and branched-chain amino acids have been

demonstrated to be effective in reducing some or all of the symptoms of muscle damage following

isolated eccentric muscle actions (11,13), resistance exercise (14),downhill running (15), and

endurance exercise (17).

Method

16 randomly selected young man (age: 22.35±2.27yr; body mass: 69.91± 9.78kg; height:

177.08±4.32cm) disabled and the two groups (n=8) control group (n=8) were divided that all

subjects were obtained twice in the 8th with maximum dominant leg begins to warm up, then in 3

sets of 15 teeth with 70%1 RM performed knee flexion. Test the positive side move to the zero angle

of the knee joint did and the motion negative (eccentric contraction of the quadriceps) was carried

http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC3758038/#B2











Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

23

out by subjects. Also, rest for 3 minutes between each session was considered. The active group

received L-Glutamine acute. Blood samples were taken from the subjects after 24 hours and data

using spss software and analyzed by parried sample T test (P≤0.05).

Results and Discussion

LDH one of the tiny blood factors that are indicative of muscle damage in the hours after intense

exercise significant increase in the blood and muscle. Extreme eccentric muscle exercises cause more

damage, and enzymes in the plasma to enter into the muscle cells and thus can be identified muscle

damage after exercise. Research a lot about that eccentric exercise causes muscle damage and

destruction there. The sports supplements can reduce muscle damage and its value in plasma

research also shows that the amino acid intake can prevent further muscle damage. Glutamine is the

most abundant amino acid in human muscle that can damage and destroy muscle cells after eccentric

exercise prevent the aim of this study is that acute consumption of glutamine what the outcome will

be. Results showed that athletes who use non-acute 0.1 grams of glutamine per kg of body weight

had decreased blood lactate dehydrogenase which indicates muscle damage is low (p = 0.001). This

increase was observed in the group that had consumed glutamine (p = 0.17). The results showed that

acute consumption of glutamine supplementation of 0.1 grams per kilogram of body weight non-

athletes reduce muscle damage and muscle damage can be prevented.

References

1. O’Reilly K, Warhol M, Fielding R, Frontera W, Meredith C, Evans W. Eccentric exercise-induced

muscle damage impairs muscle glycogen repletion. J Appl Physiol. 1987;63:252–6. [PubMed] 2. Waddell D, Fredricks K. Effects of a Glutamine Supplement on the Skeletal Muscle Contractile

Force of Mice. Am J Undergraduate Res. 2005;4:11–8. 3. Rahmani Nia F, Farzaneh E, Damirchi A, Shamsi Majlan A. Effect of L-Glutamine Supplementation

on Electromyographic Activity of the Quadriceps Muscle Injured By Eccentric Exercise. Iran J Basic Med Sci; 2013; 16: 808-812.

4. Lowery L, Forsythe CE. Protein and overtraining: potential applications for free-living athletes. J Int Soc Sports Nutr. 2006;3:42–50. [PMC free article] [PubMed]

5. Cruzat VF, Rogero MM, Tirapegui J. Effects of supplementation with free glutamine and the dipeptide alanyl-glutamine on parameters of muscle damage and inflammation in rats submitted to prolonged exercise. J Cell Biochem Funct. 2010;28:24–30. [PubMed]

6. Babij P, Mattews SM, Rennie MJ. Changes in blood ammonina, lactate, and amino acids in relation to workload during bicycle ergometer exercise in man. Eur J Appl Physiol. 1983;50:405–

7. Newsholme EA. Why is L-glutamine metabolism important to cells of the immune system in health, post-injury, surgery, or infection. J Nutr. 2001;131:2515–2522. [PubMed]

http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/3624128

http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC2129153/









Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

24

8. Clarkson P, Hubal M. Exercise-induced muscle damage in humans. Am J Phys Med Rehabil. 2002;81:52–69. [PubMed]

9. Low SY, Taylor PM, Rennie MJ. Response of glutamine transport in cultured rat skeletal muscle to osmotically induced changes in cell volume. J Physiol. 1996;492:877–85. [PMC free article] [PubMed]

10. Joohyung Lee, College of Physical Education, Kookmin University, 77 Jeongneung-ro, Seongbuk-gu, Seoul 136-702, Korea, Tel: +82-2-910-4782, Fax: +82-2-910-4789,

11. Merletti R, Lo Conte L, Sathyan D. Repeatability of Electrically-evokedMyoelectric Signals in the Human Tibialis Anterior Muscle. J Electromyogr Kines. 1995;5:67–80. [PubMed]

12. Zhou Y, Li Y, Wang R. Evaluation of exercise-induced muscle damage by surface electromyography. J Electromyogr Kines. 2011;21:356–62. [PubMed]

13. Buckley JD, Thomson RL, Coates AM, et al. Supplementation with a whey protein hydrolysate enhances recovery of muscle force-generating capacity following eccentric exercise. J Sci Med Sport. 2010;13:178–81. [PubMed]

14. R. B., fc. W. OGILVIE, AND J. A. SCHWANE. Eccentric exercise-induced injury to rat skeletal muscle. J. Appl. Physiol.: Respirat. Environ. Exercise Physiol. These experiments were designed to study skeletal muscle p54( 1): 80- 93, 1983.-

15. Nosaka K, Sacco P, Mawatari K. Effects of amino acid supplementation on muscle soreness and damage. Int J Sport Nutr Exerc Metab. 2006;16:620–35. [PubMed]

16. Kraemer WJ, Ratamess NA, Volek JS, et al. The effect of amino acid supplementation on hormonal responses to resistance training overreaching. Metabolism. 2006;55:282–91. [PubMed]

17. Etheridge T, Philp A, Watt PW. A single protein meal increases the recovery of muscle function following an acute eccentric exercise bout. Appl Physiol Nutr Metab. 2008;33:1–6. [PubMed]

18. Phillips T , Childs AC , Dreon DM , Phinney S , Leeuwenburgh C University of Florida, Biochemistry of Aging Laboratory, College of Health and Human Performance, Center for Exercise Science, College of Medicine, Gainesville 32611, USA. Medicine and Science in Sports and Exercise [2003, 35(12):2032-2037]

19. Greer BK, Woodard JL, White JP, et al. Branched-chain amino acid supplementation and indicators of muscle damage after endurance exercise. Int J Sport Nutr Exerc Metab.

20. W. J. Evans, C. N. Meredith, J. G. Cannon, C. A. Dinarello, W. R. Frontera, V. A. Hughes, B. H. Jones, H. G. Knuttgen Journal of Applied Physiology Published 1 November 1986 Vol. 61 no. 5, 1864-1868 DOI:

21. Nosaka K , Clarkson PM Exercise and Sports Science, Department of Environmental Science, Yokohoma City University, Japan. International Journal of Sports Medicine [1996, 17(2):120-127]

22. Vinicius Fernandes Cruzat1, Marcelo Macedo Rogero2 and Julio Tirapegui1, Effects of supplementation with free glutamine and the dipeptide alanyl-glutamine on parameters of muscle damage and inflammation in rats submitted to prolonged exercise. Article first published online: 2 NOV 2009 DOI: 10.1002/cbf.1611










http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=AUTH:%22Phillips+T%22

http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=AUTH:%22Childs+AC%22

http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=AUTH:%22Dreon+DM%22

http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=AUTH:%22Phinney+S%22

http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=AUTH:%22Leeuwenburgh+C%22

http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=JOURNAL:%22Med+Sci+Sports+Exerc%22


http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=AUTH:%22Nosaka+K%22

http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=AUTH:%22Clarkson+PM%22

http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=JOURNAL:%22Int+J+Sports+Med%22






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

25

Acute Effect of Glutamine Supplementation on Serum Levels of CPK

after Eccentric Resistance Exercise in Untrained Young Men

Akram ebadi

Soheil mosavi

Marefat siahkohian

Babak nakhostin rohi

Mohsen sheykhlouvand

Physical education,Mohaghegh Ardebili, Iran Physical education,Mohaghegh Ardebili, Iran

Physical education,Mohageg Ardebili, Iran Physical education,Mohaghegh Ardebili, Ira

n

Abstract Glutamine is the most abundant amino acid in human muscle protein synthesis is and can Creatine

kinase (CPK) is one of biochemical degradation of muscle cells in blood serum reduce. Increased

serum Creatine kinase and exercise extrovert is more pronounced among non-athletes. The aim of

this study is acute influence of glutamine supplementation on serum levels of CPK after eccentric

resistance exercise in young men. Methods: 16 randomly selected young man (age: 22.35±2.27yr;

body mass: 69.91± 9.78kg; height: 177.08±4.32cm) disabled and the two groups (N=8) control

group (N=8) were divided that all subjects were obtained twice in the 8th with maximum dominant

leg begins to warm up, then in 3 sets of 15 teeth with 70%1 RM performed knee flexion. Test the

positive side move to the zero angle of the knee joint did and the motion negative (eccentric

contraction of the quadriceps) was carried out by subjects. Also, rest for 3 minutes between each

session was considered. The active group received glutamine acute. Blood samples were taken from

the subjects after 24 hours and data using spss software and analyzed by parried sample T test

(P≤0.05). Results showed that acute consumption of glutamine in the active group (P = 0.04) were

significant and in the control group (P = 0.36), no significant effect was observed. This study showed

that acute consumption of glutamine can be Creatine kinase is reduced and muscle damage.

Keywords: Glutamine, Creatine kinase, eccentric exercise






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

26

Introduction

Many athletes use a variety of dietary supplements to improve their performance and minimizing

risk of injures to provide them with an advantage over their opponent (2). DOMS and impaired

muscle function are the common consequences of excessive EE (1). Glutamine is the most abundant

amino acid within the human body (4). Multiple roles of dietary protein and key amino acids such as

glutamine create a variety of potential applications for hard-training athletes (4). Increase

intramuscular glutamine levels have been directly linked to influencing muscle cell volume (9),

which enhances protein synthesis, and increases muscle size. By increasing muscle mass, the

contractile force of a muscle can be increased (2).During exercise, increases and decreases in plasma

glutamine levels have been demonstrated and these variations are reflected by the type, duration,

and intensity of exercise (6). Exercise induced muscle damage to muscle fibers resulting in an

inflammatory response (7) and myofibrillar damage along the Z-band (8).

In general, DOMS continues to increase after exercise and peaks between 24 and 48 h after exercise).

The reasons behind DOMS have been a steady interest for many sports scientists for a long time.

Although several factors including lactic acid, connective tissue damage surrounding muscles, muscle

temperature, muscle spasm, inflammatory responses, free radicals, and nitric oxides have been

suggested for causing DOMS, there is no clear explanation Previous literatures have speculated that

the cause of DOMS is due to structural muscle damages and perturbation of calcium homeostasis or

acute inflammatory responses to exercise .The EMG spectrum from eccentric, concentric muscle

contractions and increased serum levels of muscle proteins such as creatine kinase (CK) in humans

were studied as a factor of mechanical damage of muscle fiber and functional change of metabolic

tissue (9,10). Prophylactic and therapeutic nutritional interventions involving protein, protein

hydrolysate, mixed amino acids, selective amino acids, and branched-chain amino acids have been

demonstrated to be effective in reducing some or all of the symptoms of muscle damage following

isolated eccentric muscle actions (11,13), resistance exercise (14),downhill running (15), and

endurance exercise (17).

Method

16 randomly selected young man (age: 22.35±2.27yr; body mass: 69.91± 9.78kg; height:

177.08±4.32cm) disabled and the two groups (n=8) control group (n=8) were divided that all

subjects were obtained twice in the 8th with maximum dominant leg begins to warm up, then in 3

sets of 15 teeth with 70%1 RM performed knee flexion. Test the positive side move to the zero angle

of the knee joint did and the motion negative (eccentric contraction of the quadriceps) was carried

out by subjects. Also, rest for 3 minutes between each session was considered. The active group












Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

27

received L-Glutamine acute. Blood samples were taken from the subjects after 24 hours and data

using spss software and analyzed by parried sample T test (P≤0.05).


CPK one of the tiny blood factors that are indicative of muscle damage in the hours after intense

exercise significant increase in the blood and muscle. Extreme eccentric muscle exercises cause more

damage, and enzymes in the plasma to enter into the muscle cells and thus can be identified muscle

damage after exercise. Research a lot about that eccentric exercise causes muscle damage and

destruction there. The sports supplements can reduce muscle damage and its value in plasma

research also shows that the amino acid intake can prevent further muscle damage. Glutamine is the

most abundant amino acid in human muscle that can damage and destroy muscle cells after eccentric

exercise prevent the aim of this study is that acute consumption of glutamine what the outcome will

be. Results showed that acute consumption of glutamine in the active group (P = 0.04) were

significant and in the control group (P = 0.36), no significant effect was observed. This study showed

that acute consumption of glutamine can be CPK is reduced and muscle damage.

References

1. O’Reilly K, Warhol M, Fielding R, Frontera W, Meredith C, Evans W. Eccentric exercise-induced

muscle damage impairs muscle glycogen repletion. J Appl Physiol. 1987;63:252–6. [PubMed]

2. Waddell D, Fredricks K. Effects of a Glutamine Supplement on the Skeletal Muscle Contractile

Force of Mice. Am J Undergraduate Res. 2005;4:11–8. 3. Rahmani Nia F, Farzaneh E, Damirchi A, Shamsi Majlan A. Effect of L-Glutamine Supplementation

on Electromyographic Activity of the Quadriceps Muscle Injured By Eccentric Exercise. Iran J Basic

Med Sci; 2013; 16: 808-812.

4. Lowery L, Forsythe CE. Protein and overtraining: potential applications for free-living athletes. J

Int Soc Sports Nutr. 2006;3:42–50. [PMC free article] [PubMed] 5. Cruzat VF, Rogero MM, Tirapegui J. Effects of supplementation with free glutamine and the

dipeptide alanyl-glutamine on parameters of muscle damage and inflammation in rats submitted to

prolonged exercise. J Cell Biochem Funct. 2010;28:24–30. [PubMed]

6. Babij P, Mattews SM, Rennie MJ. Changes in blood ammonina, lactate, and amino acids in relation

to workload during bicycle ergometer exercise in man. Eur J Appl Physiol. 1983;50:405– 7. Newsholme EA. Why is L-glutamine metabolism important to cells of the immune system in

health, post-injury, surgery, or infection. J Nutr. 2001;131:2515–2522. [PubMed]

8. Clarkson P, Hubal M. Exercise-induced muscle damage in humans. Am J Phys Med Rehabil.

2002;81:52–69. [PubMed]












Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

28

9. Low SY, Taylor PM, Rennie MJ. Response of glutamine transport in cultured rat skeletal muscle to

osmotically induced changes in cell volume. J Physiol. 1996;492:877–85. [PMC free article] [PubMed] 10. Joohyung Lee, College of Physical Education, Kookmin University, 77 Jeongneung-ro, Seongbuk-

gu, Seoul 136-702, Korea, Tel: +82-2-910-4782, Fax: +82-2-910-4789,

11. Merletti R, Lo Conte L, Sathyan D. Repeatability of Electrically-evokedMyoelectric Signals in the

Human Tibialis Anterior Muscle. J Electromyogr Kines. 1995;5:67–80. [PubMed]

12. Zhou Y, Li Y, Wang R. Evaluation of exercise-induced muscle damage by surface

electromyography. J Electromyogr Kines. 2011;21:356–62. [PubMed]

13. Buckley JD, Thomson RL, Coates AM, et al. Supplementation with a whey protein hydrolysate

enhances recovery of muscle force-generating capacity following eccentric exercise. J Sci Med Sport.

2010;13:178–81. [PubMed]

14. R. B., fc. W. OGILVIE, AND J. A. SCHWANE. Eccentric exercise-induced injury to rat skeletal muscle.

J. Appl. Physiol.: Respirat. Environ. Exercise Physiol. These experiments were designed to study

skeletal muscle p54( 1): 80- 93, 1983.-

15. Nosaka K, Sacco P, Mawatari K. Effects of amino acid supplementation on muscle soreness and

damage. Int J Sport Nutr Exerc Metab. 2006;16:620–35. [PubMed]

16. Kraemer WJ, Ratamess NA, Volek JS, et al. The effect of amino acid supplementation on hormonal

responses to resistance training overreaching. Metabolism. 2006;55:282–91. [PubMed]

17. Etheridge T, Philp A, Watt PW. A single protein meal increases the recovery of muscle function

following an acute eccentric exercise bout. Appl Physiol Nutr Metab. 2008;33:1–6. [PubMed] 18. Phillips T , Childs AC , Dreon DM , Phinney S , Leeuwenburgh C University of Florida, Biochemistry

of Aging Laboratory, College of Health and Human Performance, Center for Exercise Science, College

of Medicine, Gainesville 32611, USA. Medicine and Science in Sports and Exercise [2003,

35(12):2032-2037]

19. Greer BK, Woodard JL, White JP, et al. Branched-chain amino acid supplementation and indicators

of muscle damage after endurance exercise. Int J Sport Nutr Exerc Metab.

20. W. J. Evans, C. N. Meredith, J. G. Cannon, C. A. Dinarello, W. R. Frontera, V. A. Hughes, B. H. Jones, H.

G. Knuttgen Journal of Applied Physiology Published 1 November 1986 Vol. 61 no. 5, 1864-1868 DOI:

21. Nosaka K , Clarkson PM Exercise and Sports Science, Department of Environmental Science,

Yokohoma City University, Japan. International Journal of Sports Medicine [1996, 17(2):120-127]

22. Vinicius Fernandes Cruzat1, Marcelo Macedo Rogero2 and Julio Tirapegui1, Effects of

supplementation with free glutamine and the dipeptide alanyl-glutamine on parameters of muscle

damage and inflammation in rats submitted to prolonged exercise. Article first published online: 2

NOV 2009 DOI: 10.1002/cbf.1611









http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=AUTH:%22Phillips+T%22

http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=AUTH:%22Childs+AC%22

http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=AUTH:%22Dreon+DM%22

http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=AUTH:%22Phinney+S%22

http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=AUTH:%22Leeuwenburgh+C%22


http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=AUTH:%22Nosaka+K%22

http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=AUTH:%22Clarkson+PM%22

http://europepmc.org/search?page=1&query=JOURNAL:%22Int+J+Sports+Med%22






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

29

Numerical Integration Using Daubechies’ Wavelets by Linear

Least square method

Amin Anvarzadeh

Mina Salimi Department of Applied Mathematics, Mohaghegh University of Ardabil, iran

Department of Applied Mathematics, Mohaghegh University of Ardabil, iran

Abstract

In this paper, we use a method based on Daubechies wavelets for obtaining numerical solution of

definite integral. This approximation depends on pure scaling functions expansion. The Method

transforms definite integrals to a system of algebraic equations. We apply least square method for

solving linear system. In order to illustrate the efficiency and accuracy of the method a few test

examples are given.

Keywords: Numerical integration, Daubechies’ wavelets.

1.Introduction

Integration of a function on bounded interval is an important operation for many applied science

problems such as physical problems. There are several numerical approximating method for

numerical integration of a function. Most procedure for approximating value of definite integral are

based on use the polynomial that approximate the function. Daubechies’ wavelets are bases function

that satisfy certain mathematical requirements and are used for approximation of a function and also

the Daubechies wavelets bases are orthonormal bases that having compact support on [0,D-1], where

the parameter D is called the Daubechies number or wavelet genus. The basic scaling function

represented by ( )x and basic wavelet function represented by x such that they both satisfy the

following two-scaling relations respectively

1

0

2

D

l

lx a x l

, (1)






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

31

1

0

2

D

l

l

x b x l

, (2)

Where the coefficients 1

0

D

la

are called filter coefficients, and 11

l

l D lb a [1]. And the

Daubechies orthonormal basis is formed by [2]

22 2j

jij x x l , (3)

and

22 2j

jij x x l . (4)

Denoted the set of orthogonal functions by { , }ij x l Z for a particular j, generates a space

2jV L R and 2

jW L R is orthogonal complementary in 1jV . Let jP denote the orthogonal

projection 2jL VR . Then the vector space jV have the following conditions defining a

multiresolution analysis [2,3]:

(i) 2jV L R and 2 1 0 1 2V V V V V

(ii) min ,jf x P f x f x g x where jg x V

(iii) 12j jf x V f x V for all j Z .

(iv) The projection jP f x converges to f x when j tends to infinity:

lim jj

P f x f x

or 0j jV is dense in 2L R

such that

1, 1, 1, 1,j j l j l j l j l

l l

P f x C x d x

, (5)

where the coefficients ,j lc and ,j ld are as follows:

, ,j l j lc f x x dx

, (6)

and

, ,j l j ld f x x dx

. (7)






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

31

2.Method

Let be the basic scaling function of Daubechies number D and assumes that is known at the

dyadic rationals 2q

m , 0,1, , 1 2qm D , for some chosen q N . Pure scaling function

expansions of a function f(x) can be written as follows [4]:

, ,j l j l

l

f x c x

, x R , (8)

at th e grid pint

2k r

kx x , k Z , (9)

where r N corresponds to some chosen resolution of the real line and

, ,j l j lc f x x dx

. (10)

when ,x a b for ,a b N , we impose the resolution 2r on interval ,a b , i.e.

2k r

b ax k

, 0,1, ,2 1rk . (11)

so (8) takes the following form [5]:

2 1

, ,

2 2

j

j

b

j l j l

l a D

f x c x

, , .x a b (12)

So f(x) at grid point , 0,1, ,2 12

rk r

b ax k k

and r j can be written as follows:

2 1

, ,

2 22 2

j

j

b

j l j lr r

l a D

b a b af k c k

, (13)

if we use (3), so (13) takes the following form:

2 1

2,

2 2

2 22 2

j

j

bjj

j lr r

l a D

b a b af k c k l

, (14)

which can be written in matrix form as follows:

22j

rf AC (15)

where

2 12

0 , , , ,2 2 2

Tr

r r r r

b ab ab af f f f f

, (16)






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

32

1 1

2 (2 ( ) 2)

( 2 2) ( 2 1)

,

(2 1) (2 1) 2 4 ( )( ) ( )

2 2 r j

j j

j j

b a D

a D b

A

b a D b a

(17)

,2 2 ,2 3 ,2 1, , ,j j j

T

j D j D j bc c c c

. (18)

Note that when we overhaul the system shown in (15) we find that the matrix A is not a square

matrix. Therefore we can’t solve the system shown in (15) , then we will use linear least square

method to solve above system to obtain column-vector C. Linear least squares method is a

procedure to determine the best fit line to data. The linear least square problem is formally

defined as follows:

Given a real m n matrix A and a real vector b, find a real n-vector x such that the function:

( )r x Ax b ,

is minimized[6].

At end of this section we denoting the integrals of ( )x by r(x) which written as [7]:

x

0

r x φ y dy . (19)

Let , ,jf x V x a b for ,a b Z , we can expand this function by (12). Integration both side of Eq.

(12) from x=a to x=b and using integration theorem yields

2 1

, ,

2 2

j

j

b b b

j l j l

l a Da a

f x dx c x dx

2 1

2,

2 2

2 (2 )

j

j

bbjj

j l

ul a D a

c x l dx

2 1

2,

2 2

2 2

j

j

bbjj

j l

l a D a

c u du

. (20)

Using definition of r(x) shown in (19), Eq. (20) can be written as follows:

2 1

2,

2 2

(2 ) (2 )2

j

j

b bj

j l

l a Da

j jr b l a lx d rf x c

. (21)

which can be written in matrix form as follows:

22

bj

a

f x dx RC

. (22)






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

33

where matrix C is the same shown in (15) and R is as follows:

2 2 2

2 1 1

2 2 2

1 2 1

Tj

j

j

j

r b a D r D

r b a D r D

R

r r a b

r r a b

. (23)

The system shown in (22) can be computed when we obtain the column-vector C from the system

shown in (15). Then we use least square method to find the inverse of a matrix A. In other

words we use pseudo inverse. Denoting 1

T TA A A A

as a pseudo inverse of the matrix A[6].

Then column-vector C computed as follows:

22j

rC f A

. (24)

so (22) takes the following form:

2

b

jr

a

f x dx Rf A . (25)

Hence Eq. (25) is used to evaluate the values of definite integral of a function using Daubechies’

wavelets by linear least square method.

In this section we employ the error analysis for the Daubechies’ wavelets bases by linear least square

method described above to evaluate an approximation value of definite integral and obtain upper

bound of the absolute error.

Lemma1. Let A be m n ( m n ) and full rank matrix. Then the minimum-norm solution to

the underdetermined system Ax=b is given by ( 1)( ,)T Tx bAA A

(26)

note that the matrix ( 1)( )T TA A A is pseudo inverse of A.

proof. The proof is given in [8].

Lemma 2. In Eq. (6), ,

1 /2, 2 max

j l

j D pj l Id C f

, where

1

0

1

!

D

pC x x dxp

, and

2Dp .

Proof. The proof is given in [5].

Lemma 3. Let f(x) 2L ( ) be a continuous functions difined for a x b , ( )

b

a

H f x dx and






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

34

( )j

b

j V

a

H P f x dx Then:

( 1)

22

j D

j jE H H C

. (27)

Proof. The absolute error may be defined as:

2 1

, ,

2 2

( )

j

j

b b

j i l i l

i j l Da

E d x dx

, (28)

which ,i ld are defined in (7). So

2 1 2 12

, , , ,

2 2 2 2

( ( ) ( ))

j j

j j

b b b

j i l i l m k m k

i j m jl D k a Da

E d x d x dx

2 1 2 1

, , , ,

2 2 2 2

( )

j j

j j

bb b

i l m k i l m k

i j m jl D k a D a

d d x dx dx

2 12

,

2 2

( )

j

j

b

i l

i j l a D

d b a

by using lemma 2 in Eq. (27), it takes the form

,

2 12

2 2

212 ( )2 max

j

jj l

b

j

i j l

i D pI

a D

C fE b a

,

2 12 ( 1)

2 2

2

2 (m )ax

j

jj l

bi D

i j

pI

l a D

C b af

,

2 ( 1) 22

2 )

2

( 1 2

2max

1 2j l

j Dp

I DfC

, (30)

taking the square root of (30) yields

,

( 1) 2max 2j l

p j DI fC

. (31)

Hence

( 1) 22 j DjE C . (32)

(29)






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

35

Hence the accuracy in the numerical integration using Daubechies’ wavelets bases by linear least

square method improves as we increase j or D.

In order to show the numerical result, the following examples are introduced and the approximate

value are obtained for j=9,11 and D=4,6,8. In Table 1- 3 the relative errors with respect to the exact

value are shown.

Example1. 1

2

0

5 12x x dx

(see Table 1).

Table 1-Relative error above method with respect exact value.

J D=4 D=6 D=8

9 1.7668E -

07

9.3151E – 08 0.0000E + 00

1

1

1.1760E -

08

6.1369E - 09 0.0000E + 00

Example2. 1

2

0

sin( )x dx

(see Table 2).


J D=4 D=6 D=8

9 2.9132E- 06 1.43151E –

06

1.1272E – 09

1

1

1.2403E -

07

1.10215E - 08 0.0000E + 00

Example3. 3

31

1

( 1)dx

x

(see Table 3).






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

36


J D=4 D=6 D=8

9 6.7668E - 03 6.3151E – 03 6.1137E - 03

1

1

3.4012E - 03 3.2769E - 03 3.0147E - 03

From Tables 1-3 it can be noticed that above method for numerical integration of definite integrals

using Daubechies wavelet by linear least square methods have acceptable accuracy and the

approximate value of definite integral is improved by increasing j and D.

References

1. Williams, J.R and Amaratunga, K. (1994), “Introduction to Wavelets in Engineering”, International

Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering, 37, pp. 2365-2388.

2. Dabechies, I. (1992), “Ten Lectures on Wavelets” SIAM, Philadelphia.

3. Goswami, J.C. and Chan, A.K. (2011), “Fundamentals of Wavelets, Theory, Algorithms and

Applications”, John Wiley and Sons Inc, New York.

4. Nielsen, M. (1998). “Wavelets in scientific computing”, Ph.D. Thesis (Dissertation), Technical

university of Denmark.

5. Hashish, H., Behiry, S.H. and EL-Shamy, N.A. (2009). “Numerical integration using wavelets”,

Journal of Applied Mathematics and Computation, 211, pp. 480-487.

6. Datta, B.N. (1995) “Numerical Linear Algebra and Applications”, Brooks/Cole Publishing Company,

USA.

7. Jin, F. and Ye, T.Q. (1997), “Instability Analysis of Prismatic Members by Wavelet-Galerkin

Method”, Advanced in Engineering Software, 30, pp. 361-367.

8. EL-Beshbeshy, W.S. (2005). “Wavelet Solution for Solving Partial Differential Equations, Ph.D.

Thesis, Mathematical and Physical science Dept., Faculty of Engineering, Mansoura University, Egypt.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

37

Project-Based According to Functional Knee Braces by Plastic Design

Amin Ghannadiasl Kazem Shakeri

Nasim Nakhlband saei

Faculty of Engineering, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran Faculty of Engineering, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran

MSc student, Faculty of Engineering, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran

Abstract

Design is according to a kind of modern methods of structural design. Now days this method have

been developed in order to improve the performance of earthquake-resistant structures. Though

often design codes use force to analyze for the seismic effects buildings in earthquake. On the other

hand deformation and shift control are essential in the design of structures. In this paper, plastic

design has been studied on performance form structural steel design with knee bracing system.

Therefore, several structures with different heights with knee bracing system against lateral loads

according to Iranian Earthquake Design codes and the tenth issue of national building codes is

considered as the basic structures. And again based on performance with the methods of plastic

design are designed. Basic structures and designed structures are based on the performance under

analysis inelastic Pushover. It can be seen that the method of operation under severe earthquakes,

create mechanism of surrender purposes, but the method of force the number of plastic hinges are

creating in columns. Finally, it can be concluded with design structural based on functional can be

taken a new step to improve seismic performance.

Keywords: Functional design, knee braces, deformation of the building

1. Introduction

Earthquake resistant design of structures is one of the most important factors of the modern

societies. Scientists studying the destructive effects of past earthquakes on structures are trying to

dissolve the deficiencies of the design methods of buildings. The destructive effects and abundant






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

38

damages caused by major earthquakes during the twentieth century, made the government agents,

experts, and engineers to think about a proper solution for confronting this natural phenomenon.

Among the new methods for design of structures, performance-based design method can be noted,

which is developed today in order to improve the performance of earthquake resistant structures.

The conducted researches during the recent years indicate the superiority of the performance-

based design method over the force-based design method. In this paper, the performance-based

design method for structures with knee-bracing system is fully explained. The purpose of this study

is to evaluate the performance-based design methods against the force-based design methods. Seo

and Kim have conducted studies titled seismic design of steel structures with knee braces. Recently,

Aristizabal Ochoha has conducted researches on the knee-bracing systems. Naeimi and Bozorg have

also studied the seismic performance of knee-bracing systems and Shaban Abdolmohammadi has

evaluated the performance-based design method for steel moment resisting frames in a study.

2. Method

1-1- Performance-based design of steel structure with knee-bracing system in this paper is done in

such a way that first we consider a structure with 5 stories and a defined plan. This structure has the

knee-bracing system in both directions. The structure is considered to be located in Ardabil city and

on the soil type II. The structure is a residential and parking building, so is placed in the category of

the buildings of medium importance.

1-2- The studied structure is modeled in ETABS 2015 software and is analyzed by using the

equivalent static analysis method. The analyzed structure in this step is then again analyzed using

the nonlinear static (pushover) analysis method. The aim of this effort is to evaluate the output of the

two different methods and to compare them.

Nonlinear static analysis:

1-3- After performing the equivalent static analysis and designing the steel structure members, the

preparations for the nonlinear static analysis (pushover analysis) is provided. For this, first we

define the nonlinear static load cases in ETABS 2015. We perform the command “Define Menu>Load

Cases”. In this menu we click the “Add New Case” button and define the nonlinear static load case

“PUSHG1” according to Figure (1).

By doing this, the gravity loads are in fact applied to the structure and the nonlinear analysis under

seismic loading begins at this final state. After the gravity loads are applied to the structure, the

software modifies the stiffness matrix of structure according to the applied gravity loads. The gravity

load case “PUSHG2” is also defined according to Figure (2).






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

39

Figure (1): Definition of gravity load

PUSHG1

Figure (2): Definition of gravity load

PUSHG2

We click the “Modify/Show” button in front of the term “Results Saved” and in the opened box first

we choose “Final State Only” and then check the box “Save Positive Displacement Increments Only”.

After defining the gravity loads we define the lateral loads. The lateral loads are defined both positive

and negative in directions of X and Y following the gravity loads.

Definition of nonlinear hinge properties:

In order to observe or change the nonlinear hinge properties we perform the command “Define

menu>Section Properties>Frame/Wall Nonlinear Hinges…”. Different types of nonlinear hinges can

be defined among which axial load, moment of inertia about strong and weak axis, shear in strong

and weak axis and the interaction between force and moments are most widely used. After defining

the required nonlinear hinge properties in this study, the hinges are assigned to the members. For

this purpose, according to the performance and the type of hinge that might be formed in the

members, the appropriate nonlinear hinges are assigned to them.

In the present step, in addition to linear static loads the analysis is also performed for nonlinear

static loads. The nonlinear analysis is commonly progressed to the destruction of structure, however,

different criteria are defined for destruction of structure including the criteria of hinges rupture, the

criteria of the mechanism formation and the criteria of nonlinear displacement (deformation) for

which an ultimate limit state must be determined in order to limit the amount of displacement.

According to the seismic rehabilitation standard of existing structures, this ultimate limit state is

equal to the target displacement.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

41

3. Results and Discussion

The results of investigating the story displacements in the equivalent static analysis model shows

that the structural drift limitation is not achieved and also the demand to capacity ratio of line

members such as beam and column in stories is not suitable, hence, modification of the lateral

displacement and strengthening of members are required. In the nonlinear static (pushover)

analysis model, as displayed in Figures 4 and 5, with increasing the lateral loading in places in

which the hinge occurs in the cross section, the hinge formation sign is appeared.

Figure (4): Formation of plastic hinge in frame A Figure (5): Formation of plastic hinge in frame D

The studied structure meets the target displacement determined based on rehabilitation standard

and also the desirable rehabilitation objective.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

41

Figure (6): Pushover Curve - Base Shear vs Monitored Displacement

Table(1)

Base Shear vs Monitored Displacement

Step Monitored

Displ

Base

Force A-B B-C C-D D-E >E A-IO IO-LS LS-CP

cm N

0 0.002 0 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

1 -0.307 57207.9 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

2 -0.616 114415.8

2 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

3 -0.926 171623.7

7 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

4 -1.235 228831.7

6 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

5 -1.544 286039.8

3 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

6 -1.854 343247.9

339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

42

Step Monitored

Displ

Base


cm N

8

7 -2.163 400456.2

4 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

8 -2.472 457664.6

2 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

9 -2.782 514873.1

4 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

10 -3.091 572081.8

3 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

11 -3.4 629290.7

1 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

12 -3.71 686499.7

8 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

13 -4.019 743709.0

7 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

14 -4.328 800918.5

9 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

15 -4.638 858128.3

8 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

16 -4.947 915338.4

3 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

17 -5.256 972548.7

9 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

18 -5.566 1029759.

45 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

43

Step Monitored

Displ

Base


cm N

19 -5.875 1086970.

45 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

20 -6.184 1144181.

8 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

21 -6.494 1201393.

51 339 0 0 0 0 339 0 0

22 -6.636 1227646.

75 338 1 0 0 0 339 0 0

23 -6.951 1279957.

75 336 3 0 0 0 339 0 0

24 -7.475 1346793.

76 335 4 0 0 0 339 0 0

25 -7.784 1383974.

49 335 4 0 0 0 336 3 0

26 -8.359 1449542.

17 332 7 0 0 0 335 4 0

27 -8.976 1496216.

79 331 8 0 0 0 335 4 0

28 -9.278 1516819.

1 331 8 0 0 0 334 5 0

References

1. Jinkoo Kim, Youngill Seo, “Seismic design of steel structures with buckling-restrained knee braces”,

Journal of Constructional steel research 59, p.1477-1497, July 2003.

2. Aristizabal-Ochoa, J. D., “Disposable knee bracing: improvement in seismic design of steel frames”,

J. Structure. Engineering, ASCE, 1986, 112, (7), 1544-1552






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

44

3. Naeemi, M. and Bozorg, M. (2009). Seismic Performance of Knee Braced Frame. World Academy of

Science, Engineering and Technology, No. 50, PP. 976-980

4. Shaban Abdolmohammadi, Moein, (1393), “Evaluation of performance-based design of steel

moment resisting frames” M.Sc. Thesis, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil.

5. Mousavi, Hashem, Aghaeipour, Tohid, (1393) “Comparison of strength- and performance-based

design methods in studying of vulnerability and strengthening of steel buildings” Zanjan

university.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

45

The Effect of Opening Position in the Rectangular Concrete Beams on the Size and Weight of Steel Consumption

Amin Ghannadi Asl Arezoo Gharibi Asl

Soheil Soleymanzade moghaddam

Engineering, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran Engineering, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran Engineering, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran

Abstract

In the construction of moderns buildings, many pipes and ducts are necessary to accommodate

essential services like water supply, sewage, air-conditioning, electricity, telephone, and computer

network usually these pipes and ducts are placed underneath the sofitt of the beam and, for aesthetic

reasons, are covered by a suspended ceiling, thus creating a dead space that adds to the overall

building height depends on the number and depth of ducts to be accommodated. To avoid increasing

the height of the ceiling and dead weight floor, it is better that pipes and ducts pass from the beams

of ceiling for this purpose beams should be designed in the form of opening. In this paper, opening

position is beam height. Also in this article is investigated, the effect of the presence or absence of

openings in the beam height on the tensile, compressive and shear steel in reinforced concrete

beams. For this purpose, the program is provided by matlab. The results show that changes in cross-

sectional dimensions and position of opening cause to change the amount of area tensile,

compressive and shear steel, and the total weight of the steel in reinforced concrete sections.

Keywords: reinforced concrete beam with opening, the amount of used steel.

1. Introduction

In modern building construction, transverse openings in reinforced concrete beams are often

provided for the passage of utility ducts and pipes. These ducts are necessary in order to






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

46

accommodate essential services such as water supply, electricity, telephone, and computer network.

These ducts and pipes are usually placed underneath the soffit of the beam and for aesthetic reasons,

a recovered by a suspended ceiling, thus creating a dead space. In each floor, the height of this dead

space adds to the overall height of the building depending on the number and depth of ducts.

Therefore web openings enable the designer to reduce the height of the structure, especially with

regard to tall building construction, thus leading to a highly economical design.

The presence of transverse openings will transform simple beam behaviour into a more complex

behaviour, as they induce a sudden change in the dimension of the beam’s cross section. However, as

the opening represents a source of weakness, the failure plane always passes through the opening.

The ultimate strength, shear strength, crack width and stiffness may also be seriously affected.

Furthermore, the provision of openings produces discontinuities or disturbances in the normal flow

of stresses, thus leading to stress concentration and early cracking around the opening region.

Similar to any discontinuity, special reinforcement or enclosing of the opening close to its periphery,

should therefore be provided in sufficient quantity to control crack widths and prevent possible

premature failure of the beam. This section presents the classification of Reinforced Concrete (RC)

beams with circular openings based on the opening’s size and position.

The method used in this paper:

1. The algorithm for the design of concrete beams with openings based on regulations Iran.

2. To avoid from this, it considered that shear force is limited according to regulations Iran to

prevent increasing the diameter of the hole.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

47

Figure 1: Rectangular concrete beam design algorithm

Figure 2: Rectangular concrete beam design with compressive bars algorithm

3. The use of shear force to obtain stirrups area and Rebar reinforcement.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

48

Figure 3: shear resistance

sV provided by shear reinforcement at an opening

Shear across the failure plane are those by the sides of the opening within the distance of

ob d :

(b d )v yv

s o

A fV

S

Where b is width of beam width and 0d is diameter of opening

vA is area of shear stirrups and

yvf is yield strength of stirrups. According to references of (2).


As can be seen by increasing the diameter of the hole due to limitations intended to diameter hole

cut in the area of tensile steel was low at the beginning of beam and in the middle of beam with

increases bending and decreases of shear it will increases. But the area of compressive steel beam is

zero because diameter hole is small. Also in the area of shear steel will increases at the beginning of

beam and in the middle of beam with increases bending and decreases of shear it will decreases also

this method is true for the weight of shear steel at the beam. And also by increasing the diameter of

the hole can be seen that the total amount of steel consumption increases.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

49

Figure 4: The area of tensile bars (mm2), according to length (mm)

Figure 5: The area of compression bars (mm2), according to length (mm)






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

51

Figure 6: stirrups area and Rebar reinforcement (mm2/mm), according to length (mm)

1-4- Figure 7: The weight of stirrups area and Rebar reinforcement (kg/m), according to length

(mm)






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

51

Figure 8: The weight of tensile steel (kg/m), according to length (mm)

Figure 9: The total weight of steel (kg/m), according to diameter (mm)

1070

1080

1090

1100

1110

1120

1130

1140

0 50 100 150 200






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

52

References

Concrete beam book by civil engineering regulations Iran.

Concrete beam whit openings analysis and design by M. A. Mansur and Kiang- H wee tan.

The artical of Reinforced concrete beams with web openings: A state of the art review A. Ahmed,

M.M. Fayyadh, S. Naganathan, K. Nasharuddin.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

53

The Optimization of Consumption steel T-Shaped Concrete Beams by Genetic Algorithms

Amin Ghannadi asl Arezoo Gharibi asl

Soheil Soleymanzade moghaddam

Engineering, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran Engineering, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran Engineering, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran

Abstract

Optimization theory is method studies to find their optimal. The "optimal" as a technical term

implies quantitative measurements and mathematical analysis, while best things are the less

accuracy and more for everyday use. In this paper, by providing appropriate algorithm for the design

of T-shaped concrete beams and also optimized by genetic algorithm want to get the best rate of

consumption steel. In this article, the numerical results use to optimize the T-shaped concrete

beams.

Keywords: genetic algorithm, optimization, T-shaped concrete beam.

1. Introduction

Genetic algorithm is one of the methods of stochastic optimization based on the concept of natural

selection and genetic that inspired evolution of humans. This method uses the approximate

population of possible solutions to issues offer is expressed. Genetic Algorithm produced by

repeating the generation and development-focused people by the fitness function. For this purpose,

the initial population consisted of people randomly and then to The development of any of the

people using the fitness function evaluates and then jump on the genetic operators such as

integration and has practiced And higher qualified people to form a new population creates. This will

continue until the conditions of termination algorithm.

This method can be used in a wide range of issues in various fields such as engineering, mathematics,

and surgery.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

54

In this paper, by providing appropriate algorithm for the design of T-shaped concrete beams and also

optimized by genetic algorithm want to get the best rate of consumption steel.

2. The method used in this paper:

1. The algorithm for the design of concrete T shape beams based on regulations Iran.

Figure 10: T shape concrete beam design algorithm






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

55

Figure 11: T shape concrete beam design with compressive bars algorithm


We conclude from this graph, genetic algorithms, rather than trial and error, much earlier finds the

optimal level, and this issue is more with increased span length.

Figure 12: Genetic and the try error according to length (m)

0

20000

40000

60000

80000

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35

Chart Title

the try error genetic






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

56

GA was able to repeat fewer, roughly the same cost, optimizes cross section.

Figure 13: The cost of genetic and the try error according to length (m)

References

Concrete beams based on regulations Iran.

Space truss weight optimization using genetic algorithms, the artical by Ehsan Mahmoudi

Koochaksarai.

0

1

2

3

4

5

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35

Chart Title

the cost of try error the cost of genetic






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

57

Wahhabism in Republic of Azerbaijan

Morteza Ebrahimi Parisa Baghghal Asgari

Naser Rahmani

Assi. Professor, Department of Political Science, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran.

M.Sc. Student, Department of Humanities, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran.


Abstract

After the collapse of the Soviet Union, the Muslim republics of the central Asia and Caucasus where

considered as a new objectives for the diversion radical movements specially Wahhabism. In this

geographic set republic of Azerbaijan considered as one of main objective countries for many

reasons and the leader of Wahhabism groups were engaged in missionary activity in this country.

The main reasons for activity of this groups are, although the Azerbaijan is a Muslim country with

majority of Shiite, but nowadays it is in a bad situation in area of religion and religiosity and religion

community of this country is in a type of intellectual confusion. The three cases which can be

considered as main reasons for formation of this situation are, first is religious and ideological

vacuum which is legacy of communist rule. Second is selecting the Secular model as type of political

system in a Muslim country which is follower of Ahle Bait (PBUT), and the third is lack of attention

and emphasis on religion and the religion of the majority community and insists on equality of all

religions from perspective of type and amount of activity and propaganda from the government.

Keywords: Wahhabism, Caucasus, Religion vacuum, Republic of Azerbaijan.

1. Introduction

Republic of Azerbaijan with 86 600 square kilometers area is the most important country in the

South Caucasus. This land belonged to Iran till 200 years ago. But in the war of Iran and Russia by

the treaty of Golestan and TurkmenChay joined to Russia. After the collapse of the Soviet Union in

October 1991 Republic of Azerbaijan has announced independent and as an independent political

unit in international arena has recognized. Nowadays one of the most important radical movement






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

58

that has been obstacle for Muslims success in all over the world and has lend lots of sorrow for

Islamic world is Wahhabism. At the moment Republic of Azerbaijan is one of the countries that has

become a place for action and prowl of this radical movement. This article examines the role of

Wahhabism and Wahhabism threat for Azerbaijan and the regions.

2. Discussion

Intellectual and political history of Wahhabism

Ahmad ibn Hanbal (164-241H.q):

Ahmad ibn Hanbal, the founder of the Hanbali sect and had been considered as one of the thought

leaders of Hadith, was born in Rabi al awal 164 AH in Baghdad. Ahmad ibn Hanbal was a jurist who

travel a lot, and in the pursuit of knowledge and tradition to Hijaz, Yemen, Kufa and Basra travelled.

And gathered lots of Hadiths. And put them in a series called documentary of Ibn Hanbal. Ahmad

had many masters, in fiqh and hadith, So that Ibn Khallikan considers him one of the companions

and special students. Of Imam Shafi.'

Ibn Hanbal after 77 years of living in the twelfth of Rabi al-Awwal 241 AH, after a nine-day course of

the disease died in Baghdad a , and his body was buried in the tomb of bab al Hor. His life history,

testifies that Ahmed resistance in his beliefs, drew emotions of people to him. And gradually he

became the imam of belief among Sunnis and could publish Sunni beliefs as were valid to him. He

was the founder of his school called "Hanbali"

Ibn Taymiyyah:

Ahmad Ibn Taymiyyah, was born five years after the fall of the Abbasi Caliphate in Baghdad, in a

district called Horran in Sham. This city in the years before his birth and his childhood was invaded

by the Mongol. So, people of the city, including Abdul Halim Ibn Taymiyyah’s parents were forced to

leave the city to go to Damascus. Ahmad ibn Taymiyyah as a jurist, Hanbali narrator, aroused against

all liberal and modernist. Some of the reasons that scholars objected to ibn Taymiyyah were as

followers:

1. Considering a body for God

2. Considering a place/location for God as an object

3. God is alike objects and creatures

4. Denying the Spiritual magnificent of prophet Mohammad after his death






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

59

5. Denying prophets pilgrimage and intercession

6. Insulting the prophet’s

7. Most important calling all the Muslims infidel

Actually he believed that any action that hadn’t be done in prophet’s time shouldn’t be done after

him .ibn Taymiyyah derived 3 rules from the general principles.

1. No benefactor person or friends of friends of God should be a means to get closer to God,

2. Don’t refuge to any one for help , living or dead

3. Shouldn’t be bowed to any ones grave or tomb specially prophets

In fact, they believe that funeral and mourning is forbidden because dead man can’t do anything not

spiritual and worldly affairs.

Muhammad ibn Abdul Wahhab

Muhammad ibn Abdul Wahhab was born in 1115 AD in Uyayna. Muhammad's father had taught

religious affairs justice in Uyayna. Mohamad was interested in interpretation books and hadith and

fiqh opinions from his childhood and had been taught Hanbali tradition by his father, who was a

Hanbali scholar. Abd al-Wahhab studied religious science and starred judging as a career.

Muhammad son of Abdul Wahhab after the end of the introductory courses went to the Medina for

studying. During in his studying he had told some words that had some special ideas behind them. So

that his teachers were worried about his future and told he will mislead people if started for

proselytism. Mohammad ibn abd al wahhab was brought in tribal society and because of his father’s

hanbali beliefs and his job that was judging became interested in hanbalis figh and whom that had

studied it specially ibn taymiyyeh and his student ibn gayim and also ibn addaolhadi .so for getting

more information about these persons and informing of the cultural social and political atmosphere

of Syria and Iraq that were ruled by the Ottoman Empire traveled to those areas.

Religions in Azerbaijan

Islam

Republic of Azerbaijan has been one of the most important Islamic centers of the ancient years, and

still have ethnic links with Islamic history and shiee art. More than five thousand places according

with the Shiite Islamic architecture there is in this republic. Three hundred institutions and religious

consensus in the country that operate legally and are supervised by DQIDK. There are also three

hundred mosques in the country that are acting in cultural and religious features legality, but twenty

percent of them do not work. Baku Islamic University and the Sumgait Islamic University are those

academic centers that Field of "Islamic theology" taught there.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

61

The rise of Wahhabism

The Religious vacuum created in Azerbaijan in the years after independence, was a good time to

propagate other religions and sects emerging and attract an audience among people who had lived

seventy years in irreligious, People who were strongly eager for speaking out, after getting their

freedom, were walking after their awake mettle, and lived like an arid desert waiting for water. On

the other hand ruinous war in Karabakh and political chaos in Azerbaijan in early years of

independence as well as the crisis in Chechen in the North Caucasus (in later years) the opportunity

to advertise and spread of different religions and sects such as Wahhabism, in the Republic created.

History of Wahhabism attendance in Republic of Azerbaijan

Wahhabis in the early 90's by Arab charities help have found their way to Azerbaijan. Abu Bakr

Mosque (the largest Wahhabi mosque in Azerbaijan where followers of the Wahhabi doctrine often

gather in this mosque) with the financial assistance of the Kuwaiti charitable foundations

established in Baku in 1998 and its supervision was given to "Suleiman gamat" who was educated in

Saudi Arabia In these years some Arab charities were expelled from Azerbaijan. But for the activity of

Abu Bakr Mosque hadn't made limits and because of that some members of the mosque and

publications accused haji gamat to cooperating with the government. At this timeد"Ali Khan Musa of"

one of the members of the Abu Bakr mosque was known as one of the figures. In this time, Wahhabis

call him Ekhwan. Wahhabis as the third largest group of foreign missionaries using the pristine

religious and ideological atmosphere of Azerbaijan entered on the scene of Azerbaijan. And

missionaries of the Wahhabi sect from 1995 began onwards to promote the Wahhabism and

destruction of other religions, especially Shi'a Islam.

The followers of the Wahhabi sect gradually expanded its activities in the Republic of Azerbaijan and

began to brainwashing in this country.

Wahhabi active groups in Republic of Azerbaijan

The early years of the twentieth century due to the rapid spread of this cult in Azerbaijan ,The other

paths of this cult parallel to each other has spread and growth. Four main groups that nowadays are

active in Azerbaijan include: Jihad Population, Salafis, migration population (excommunication) and

the Brotherhood that each branch had its own president and its own principles and beliefs

associated.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

61

Wahhabis major fields of activity

Nowadays Azeri Wahhabis and followers of this religion that are acting by support of Arabia and

other Arab countries financial help by the name of charity units , With the establishment IN war

refugee camps and penetration into the education system of the country , tend to propagandize their

religion. As ANS Press reported that studies on the schools has shown that the influence of radical

religious movements among students is expanding.

Azeri rulers fight against Wahhabism

Azerbaijani Governors after 11 September 2001 and knowing the nature of these groups who could

face the rule of Azerbaijan with a huge challenge, revised on their decisions, and considered some

restrictions on them to prevent their growth .Although it seems nowadays the fight against this

movement has got a Steep slope. The two cases are mentioned below:

1. In November 2005, on the eve of parliamentary elections in Azerbaijan, politicians of this county

were talking about the threat of political stability of Azerbaijan from the Wahhabism more and more.

This concern was justified based on the evidence, and one of the evidence was in relation of

sending 14 ton of religious publications to Baku ,in Azerbaijani , Russian , Arabic , Uzbek-Kazakh

languages for the Muslim Council of the Caucasus from the Muslims Commission of Kuwait. The

government banned these book, because in many of them Wahhabism was advertised and Sunni and

Shiite, Islam branches, were against each other.

2. In 2014 lham Aliyev during his visit to Iran and his meeting with the Supreme Leader, showed his

concern about Wahhabism, and said that (religious extremism) is as the cause of common concern

between the two countries states and called for greater ties with the Islamic Republic of Iran.

3.Conclusion

Wahhabism at the beginning of its activity in Azerbaijan introduced itself as submissive and

supportive of policies of the ruling system. And bye the praising of the sovereignty of that country ,

by urging on the continuation of its campaign, their followers were increasing, and after

strengthening its position, there is a threat to the stability and security of this country and these are

the exactly the same process that in other countries have experienced before. Unfortunately the

America and the Zionist regime support, is a key factor in the spread of the cult of the Wahhabi sect

in Azerbaijan. The fears of forming Shia government in the neighbourhood of Islamic Republic of Iran






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

62

according to the historical, cultural and religious commonalities between the two countries has

caused to create rifts and divisions between the two nations more and more. Azerbaijan Sunni

Muslims that make up about 25% of the population, in the absence of Wahhabi influence are not

considered a new threat to the Azerbaijani government and the Shia community. But high sentiments

among the ethnic groups in the Caucasus and non-Azeri of most Sunnis living in sensitive border

areas has caused the movements of anti-Shiite Wahhabis, create the risk of violent facing between

the followers Sunni and Shia. So Baku recently realized the danger of Wahhabism, and monitored its

activities, and Wahhabism tactics in this field is blowing in religious conflicts and sectarian strife.

References

1.What is happening in Azerbaijan? WWW.hawzah.net

2.Nosrati, Ahmad, danger of Wahhabism in Azerbaijan, 1392: WWW.arannews.com

3.Representative of the Supreme Leader in Hajj and pilgrimage areas, recognizing Saudi Arabia,

released Hiram, without date, unwarranted, Page 108

4.Qazet newspaper, 525

5.Ansari, Reza, October, Religion in Azerbaijan: Winter 1392, WWW.qafqaz.ir

6.Mobaleghi, Ahmad, history of religions: Page 1430

7.Goli, Hassan Wahhabi threat to Azerbaijan, Journal Aran, sixth year: Number 15 and 16 spring-

summer 1387

8.Abdullahi, Aref, presence of Wahhabism in Azerbaijan, scientific research Journal of Caucasus, fifth

year, Number: 17-18, Summer 93

9.Ansarimehr, Reza, Religion in the Republic of Azerbaijan, winter 1392, www.gafgaz.ir

10.Commonwealth of Independent States and Baltic republics, pages 15, 148,

11.How the Wahhabi sect was founded and what is the difference between the Wahhabis and

Sunnis? www.mashreghnews.ir

12. Davitashvili ,Zurab, translation: Amirahmadian, Bahram, Ethnic - geographical backgrounds and

political crisis in the Caucasus, Humanities institution And cultural studies, Human Sciences

Comprehensive Portal ,No. 145-146

http://www.hawzah.net/

http://www.arannews.com/

http://www.qafqaz.ir/

http://www.gafgaz.ir/

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commonwealth_of_Independent_States

http://www.mashreghnews.ir/

https://ge.linkedin.com/in/zurab-davitashvili-1135162b






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

63

Power Flow Solution in a Larg Scale Power System Including IPFC

Elham Mokaramian

Hossein Shayeghi

Abdolah Younesi

Technical Engineering Department, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran



Abstract

Abstract: In this paper a power injection model (PIM) of interline power flow controller (IPFC) by

applying the Newton-Raphson method is discussed. This model is incorporated into Newton-

Raphson power flow to study the effects of IPFC parameters in the power flow study. The IPFC has

much more flexible topologies, consists of at least two converters, and can be used to control power

flows of a group of lines. It can be anticipated that the IPFC may be used to solve the complex

transmission network congestion management problems that transmission companies are now

facing in the transmission open-access environment. The Newton-Raphson power flow solution

method with IPFC model is a useful tool for operation and control of power systems.

Keywords: Interline power flow controller (IPFC), Newton-Raphson power flow, Power injection

model (PIM), Loss minimization

1. Introduction

Flexible AC Transmission System (FACTS) is a technology based concept that can provide a full

dynamic control over active and reactive power flow on transmission systems based on the key

control variables such as transmission line impedance, phase angle and terminal voltages [1]. The

latest generation of FACTS controllers are unified power flow controller (UPFC) and interline power

flow controller (IPFC). It is found that, in the past, much effort has been made in the modeling of the






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

64

UPFC for power flow analysis [2]-[4]. The IPFC is conceived for the compensation and power flow

management of multi-line transmission system. Like the STATCOM, SSSC and UPFC, the IPFC also

employs the voltage sourced converter as a basic building block [5]. A simple model of IPFC with

optimal power flow control method to solve overload problem and the power flow balance for the

minimum cost has been proposed [6]. This paper investigates the performance of IPFC in a power

system network. A detailed mathematical model of IPFC which will be referred as IPFC power

injection model has been presented. This model is helpful in understanding the impact of IPFC on

power system. Further, the IPFC injection model can easily be incorporated in the steady state power

flow model. The proposed model is used to demonstrate the features of IPFC. This paper shows that

the IPFC has the capability of regulating bus voltages, active power flow, reactive power flow and

minimizing the power losses simultaneously [7].

IPFC CONTROLERControl para

Measured para

System data

Measured Vdc

Cdc+

-

dc link

HV1

HV2

2. INTERLINE POWER FLOW CONTROLLER

A. Operation Principles of IPFC

In its general form, the IPFC employs a number of dc to ac converters, each providing series

compensation for a different line. The converters are linked together at their dc terminals and

connected to the ac systems through their series coupling transformers [8]. The simplest IPFC

consists of two back-to-back dc-to-ac converters, which are connected in series with two

transmission lines through series coupling transformers and the dc terminals of the converters are

connected together via a common dc link. With this IPFC, in addition to providing series reactive

compensation, any converter can be controlled to supply real power to the common dc link from its

own transmission line [9].

B. Mathematical Model of IPFC






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

65

In this section, a mathematical model for IPFC which will be referred to as power injection model is

derived. This model is useful to study the impact of the IPFC on the power system network and can

easily be incorporated in the power flow algorithm [7]. Usually, in the steady state analysis of power

systems, the VSC may be represented as a synchronous voltage source injecting an almost sinusoidal

voltage with controllable magnitude and angle. Based on this, the equivalent circuit of IPFC is shown

in Fig.2. In this circuit, is the complex n n nse se seV V (n=j, k) controllable series injected voltage.

n n n

jse se seZ R X

(n=j, k) is the series transformer impedance [10]. iV ,

jV and kV are the

complex bus voltages at the buses i, j and k respectively, defined as m m mV V (m= i, j and k).

Therefore, the current source can be expressed as

nn

jsese n se

VbI (1)

Now, the current source (nseI ) can be modeled as injection powers at the buses i, j and k. The

complex power injected at th

i bus is

*

,,

( I )nseinj i i

n j ks V

(2)

Subtitle (1) in (2)

*

,,

( )n

inj i in j k

jse n se

Vbs V

(3)

After simplification, the active power and reactive power injection at th

i bus are

, ,,

( ) ( si e ) n( s )in in

i ininj i inj i i se sen j k

RE S V V bP

(4)

,, ,

( ) ( cos( se ))in in

i ininj i i se seinj i n j k

IMQ S V V b

(5)

The complex power injected atth

n bus (n=j,k) is

*

,n(I )

nseinj nS V (6)

Substitute (1) in (6)






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

66

*

,n( )

in

inj nj

se in seVbs V (7)

After simplification, the active power and reactive power injections at th

n bus are

, ,n( ) sin( se )

in inn ininj i inj se se

RE S V bP (8)

,n, ( ) cos( se )

in inn ininj n se seinj i

IMQ S V V b (9)

Based on (4), (5), (8), and (9), power injection model of IPFC can be seen as three dependent

power injections at buses i, j and k.

As IPFC neither absorbs nor injects active power with respect to the ac system, the active power

exchange between the converters via the dc link is zero, i.e.

* *Re(Vse I Vse I ) 0ij ji ik ki (10)

Where the superscript * denotes the conjugate of a complex number. If the resistances of series

transformers are neglected, (10) can be written as

,

, ,

0inj m

m i j k

P

(11)

3. IMPLEMENTATION OF IPFC MODEL IN NR METHOD

A. Power Balance Equations with IPFC

The IPFC power injection model can be incorporated into NR power flow algorithm by addition of

power injections to the corresponding power mismatch equations. The power balance equations can

be expressed as:

0

,i i inj iP P P

0

,i i inj iQ Q Q

0

,nn n injP P P

0

,nn n injQ Q Q






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

67

Where the superscript ‘0’ denotes the power mismatch without IPFC and n=j, k.

4. Results and Analysis

In this section, numerical results are carried out on IEEE 57-bus system [19] to show the robust

performance and capabilities of IPFC model. In the test system, bus 1 is considered as slack bus,

while bus 2, 3, 6, 8, 9 and 12 as generator buses and other buses as load buses. For all the cases, the

convergence tolerance is 1e-7 p.u. System base MVA is 100. The inductive reactance of the coupling

transformers are taken to be 0.01 p.u.

Beginning, the power flow solution i.e. bus voltages, line flows and line losses of 57-bus system are

calculated using Newton-Raphson method without IPFC. Next, for the same system the power flow

solution is obtained using NR method with IPFC. The one converter of IPFC is embedded in a line

between the buses 13-14 which is considered as 1st line and the other converter of IPFC is placed in

a line between the buses13-15 which is considered as 2nd line and bus 13 is selected as common bus

for two converters. The bus voltages, line flows and line losses of test system without and with IPFC

(parameters Vse= 0.3 p.u and θse=- 120) are shown in Table I, II and III respectively

Table 1

LINE FLOWS WITHOUT AND WITH IPFC

From-To

Active power flow Reactive power flow

(MW) (MVAR)

Without With Without With

IPFC IPFC IPFC IPFC

13-14 -0.089 -0.534 0.259 0.268

13-15 -0.485 -0.595 0.127 0.170






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

68

Table 2

Line Losses without and with IPFC

Total active power losses Total reactive power losses

(P.U) (P.U)

without IPFC with IPFC without IPFC with IPFC

0.240 0.212 1.167 1.016

5. Conclusion

In this paper, a power injection model of IPFC has been presented. This model is incorporated in NR

power flow solution method to study the effects of IPFC parameters in power flow studies.It is

shown that there is a possibility of regulating bus voltage, active and reactive power flow and

minimizing the power loss with proper IPFC parameters.. The strong multi line control capability of

IPFC plays an important role in power systems. The NR power flow solution method with IPFC model

is a useful tool for planning, operation and control of power systems.

References

1.Shea, John. "Understanding FACTS-concepts and technology of flexible AC transmission systems

[Book Review]." Electrical Insulation Magazine, IEEE 18.1 (2002): 46-46.

2. Fuerte-Esquivel, C. R., and E. Acha. "Unified power flow controller: a critical comparison of

Newton-Raphson UPFC algorithms in power flow studies." Generation, Transmission and

Distribution, IEE Proceedings-. Vol. 144. No. 5. IET, 1997.

3. Noroozian, M., et al. "Use of UPFC for optimal power flow control." Power Delivery, IEEE

Transactions on 12.4 (1997): 1629-1634.

4. Fuerte-Esquivel, C. R., E. Acha, and H. Ambriz-Perez. "A comprehensive Newton-Raphson UPFC

model for the quadratic power flow solution of practical power networks." Power Systems, IEEE

Transactions on 15.1 (2000): 102-109.

5. Gyugyi, Laszlo, Kalyan K. Sen, and Colin D. Schauder. "The interline power flow controller concept:






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

69

a new approach to power flow management in transmission systems." Power Delivery, IEEE

Transactions on 14.3 (1999): 1115-1123.

6. Teerathana, S., and A. Yokoyama. "An optimal power flow control method of power system using

interline power flow controller (IPFC)." TENCON 2004. 2004 IEEE Region 10 Conference. Vol. 100.

IEEE, 2004.

7. Babu, AV Naresh, and S. Sivanagaraju. "Mathematical modelling, analysis and effects of interline

power flow controller (IPFC) parameters in power flow studies." Power Electronics (IICPE), 2010

India International Conference on. IEEE, 2011.

8.Gyugyi, Laszlo, Kalyan K. Sen, and Colin D. Schauder. "The interline power flow controller concept:

a new approach to power flow management in transmission systems." Power Delivery, IEEE

Transactions on 14.3 (1999): 1115-1123.

9. Shea, John. "Understanding FACTS-concepts and technology of flexible AC transmission systems

[Book Review]." Electrical Insulation Magazine, IEEE 18.1 (2002): 46-46.

10. Zhang, Yankui, Yan Zhang, and Chen Chen. "A novel power injection model of IPFC for power flow

analysis inclusive of practical constraints." Power Systems, IEEE Transactions on 21.4 (2006): 1550-

1556.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

71

A Study of Domestication and Foreignization Strategies in the Persian Translation of "IL GROTTESCO QUOTIDIANO"

Laleh Mousavi Tohid Siami

MA student,, Department of Humanities, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran Headmaster of literature and foreign language Department of Humanities, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran

Abstract

The purpose of the present study was to investigate the use of Venuti’s domestication and

foreignization strategies in the translation of the book "il grottesco quotidiano" from Italian into

Persian. All cases of domestication and foreignization were identified and organized as single lexical

items, expressions and idiomatic expressions. The data then were analyzed according to the criteria

introduced by Venuti. In this study, Newmark's methods are also used for translating culture-specific

concepts. The results of the data analysis revealed domestication to be the dominant strategy in

rendering culture-bound lexical items or expressions.

Keywords:domestication,foreignization,culture-bound lexical items orexpressions,Venuti,Newmark,

il grottesco quotidiano

1. Introduction

The terms foreignization and domestication were introduced into translation studies (TS) by

Lawrence Venuti (1995). Generally speaking, domestication designates the type of translation in

which a transparent, fluent style is adopted to minimize the strangeness of the foreign text for target

language readers, while foreignization means a target text is produced which deliberately breaks

target conventions by retaining something of the foreignness of the original (Shuttleworth & Cowie

1997:59).






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

71

The conflict between domestication and foreignization as opposite translation strategies can be

regarded as the cultural and political rather than linguistic extension of the time-worn controversy

over free translation and literal translation (Wang Dongfeng 2002：24). That is to say, only when

there are differences in both linguistic presentation and cultural connotation, domestication and

foreignization exist. The present paper seeks an objective way to test the plausibility and practical

applicability of the domestication/foreignization in the translation of culture specific lexical items

and idiomatic expression in the Persian Translation of "IL GROTTESCO QUOTIDIANO."

2. Theoretical Foundations

Domestication is a translation strategy of using “a transparent, fluent, ‘invisible’ style in order to

minimize the foreignness of the target text (TT)” (Munday 2008: 144). By contrast, foreignization is

not transparent and it eschews fluency for a more heterogeneous mix of discourses in order to

signify the difference of the foreign text (Venuti 1995).

The domestication vs. foreignization dichotomy is comparable to another age-old dichotomy, namely

that between free and literal translation. However, those two dichotomies are not synonymous. The

free vs. literal dichotomy refers to linguistic form, while the domestication vs. foreignization

dichotomy concerns the two cultures involved, i.e. whether an ST is adapted to the target culture, or

the foreign cultural elements are preserved.

In the German culture of the Classical and Romantic periods, Friedrich Schleiermacher proposed

two paths that ‘der eigentliche Uebersetzer’ can take: “Either the translator leaves the author in

peace, as much as possible, and moves the reader towards him; or he leaves the reader in peace, as

much as possible, and moves the author towards him.” (1813: 241–242). The first path is similar to

Venuti's foreignizing translation, whereas the second path is similar to Venuti's domesticating

translation.

Schleiermacher sees foreignization and domestication as binary opposites, and he explicitly claims

they must not be mixed; the translator has to opt for one or the other method and then be consistent

in its use. Combining the two methods would lead to unreliable results; the author and the reader

could completely miss each other (Schleiermacher 1813: 47). By contrast, Venuti states that

domestication and foreignization are ‘heuristic concepts designed to promote thinking and research’

rather than binary opposites (Munday: 145–146).

Both Schleiermacher and Venuti advocate foreignizing translation, but for different reasons.

Schleiermacher advocates foreignizing method because it puts the language in motion (1813: 69).

Schleiermacher is explicitly against the domesticating method because he thinks that the thought






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

72

and its expression cannot be separated. There is no way to make a foreign author speak the domestic

language as if it were his own.

The reason Venuti is opposed to domestication is not because it is impossible, but because it is

unfair. According to Venuti (1995: 20), domestication involves ‘an ethnocentric reduction of the

foreign text to target-language cultural values.’ Another negative consequence of domestication,

according to Venuti, is that it makes the translator invisible because the translation reads like an

original. Venuti therefore prefers foreignization as a form of resistance to the ‘violent, ethnocentric’

(Anglo-American) cultural values.

In the contemporary international translation field, it was Eugene Nida who first advocated

domestication (Yang 2010: 78). Nida differentiated between ‘formal’ and ‘dynamic’ (functional)

equivalence. While ‘formal equivalence’ strives to preserve form as well as content, ‘dynamic

equivalence’ aims at producing in translation an equivalent effect on the target readers that the

original text had on the original readers. Nida preferred ‘dynamic equivalence,’ mostly because he

was dealing with Bible translation, where the most important thing is to successfully carry the

message through, disregarding the form of the message.

Both domestication and foreignization implicate manipulation of the text. Whether one or the other

strategy will be applied depends on variables such as the purpose of the translation (Skopos), the

status of the receiving literary system (polysystem theory), i.e. the power relations between the

source and the target literary systems, and other variables of the historical, social and cultural

setting in which the translation takes place. In order to see why a certain strategy is used in a certain

context, we have to turn to the analysis of real translations in the following sections of the paper.

3. Methods of translation

Newmark (1988b) mentions the difference between translation methods and translation

procedures. He writes that, "while translation methods relate to whole texts, translation procedures

are used for sentences and the smaller units of language". He goes on to refer to the following

methods of translation:

Word-for-word translation: in which the SL word order is preserved and the words

translated singly by their most common meanings, out of context.

Literal translation: in which the SL grammatical constructions are converted to their nearest

TL equivalents, but the lexical words are again translated singly, out of context.

Faithful translation: it attempts to produce the precise contextual meaning of the original

within the constraints of the TL grammatical structures.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

73

Semantic translation: which differs from 'faithful translation' only in as far as it must take

more account of the aesthetic value of the SL text.

Adaptation: which is the freest form of translation, and is used mainly for plays (comedies)

and poetry; the themes, characters, plots are usually preserved, the SL culture is converted

to the TL culture and the text is rewritten.

Free translation: it produces the TL text without the style, form, or content of the original.

Idiomatic translation: it reproduces the 'message' of the original but tends to distort nuances

of meaning by preferring colloquialisms and idioms where these do not exist in the original.

Communicative translation: it attempts to render the exact contextual meaning of the

original in such a way that both content and language are readily acceptable and

comprehensible to the readership (1988b: 45-47).

4. Methodology

Different scholars have analyzed the strategies and procedures involved in the translation of CSIs ,

suggesting various classifications of such strategies. For the purpose of this paper, we draw upon one

of the pioneers in this field, Newmark (1988). He suggests a number of procedures for translating

CSIs, namely transference, naturalization, cultural equivalence, functional equivalence, descriptive

equivalence, synonymy, through-translation, shift or transposition, modulation, recognized

translation, translation label, compensation, componential analysis, reduction and expansion,

paraphrase, couplet, and notes. The Cultural specific concepts were culled from the ST and TT and

were classified based on The following categories: Toponyms, Anthroponyms, Means of

transportation, Date, Food and Drink, Idioms, Measuring system, Scholastic reference.

5. Data Analysis

The collected data were analysed according to the following criteria.

Transference: According to Newmark, "Transference is the process of transferring a SL word to a TL

text as a translation procedure"1. When the translators face the following cases, they should use the

method of transference: name of all living or dead people, geographical names, name of the periodical

and newspapers, plays, films, etc.

1

Newmark (1988, p.81)






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

74

Method of

translation

CSCs1

Target language Source language

Word –for word Anthroponym فلر دا تسا Floro d'Avanza

Word –for word Toponym سي هرتي دی کاسترتسا San martino di

Costrozza

Naturalization: "This procedure succeeds transference and adapts the SL word first to the normal

pronunciation, then to the normal morphology of the TL".

Method of

translation

CSCs Target language Source language

Word –for word Anthroponym ترزا Teresa

Word –for word Object کارت پستال La Carta

Word –for word Drink ليواد گرم La Limonata calda

Cultural Equivalent: This strategy is "an approximate translation where a SL cultural word is

translated by a TL cultural word"2.

Method of translation CSCs Target language Source language

Communicative

translation

Food برج سفيذ In bianco

Communica

tive translation

Drink هشربات الکلی Il vino

Functional equivalent: According to Newmark, functional equivalent "applied to cultural words,

requires the use of a culture-free word, sometimes with a new specific term"1.

1

Cultural specific concepts

2







Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

75

Method of

translation


Literal translation Drink یک بطری

شيذی عالی

Una buona bottiglia

Descriptive equivalent: In this strategy the translator uses some descriptions to clarify the meaning

for his audience. Using this strategy enable us to have a correct perception of CSIs by using other

words and phrases.

Method of

translation


Literal translation Religious celebration هکاى هقذس Il luogo rinomato

Componential analysis: Componential analysis is defined as "comparing an SL word with a TL word

which has a similar meaning but is not an obvious one-to-one equivalent, by demonstrating first

their common and then their differing sense components. Normally the SL word has more specific

meaning than the TL word"2

Method of

translation


Communicative

translation

Means of

transportation

ساتب

Pullman

Synonymy: According to Newmark, synonymy is defined as a "near TL equivalent to a SL word"3.

Method of

translation


Word-for word Food تخن هرغ L'uovo

Modulation: In this strategy the translators try to create the message of the SL in the TL in

conformity with the current norms of the TL.4

1

Newmark (1988, p.83) 2

Newmark (1988, p.114) 3

Newmark (1988, p.84) 4







Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

76

Method of

translation


Literal translation concept چر شم Un aspetto sinistro

Paraphrase: "This is an amplification or explanation of the meaning of a segment of the text”1.

Method of

translation


Idiomatic translation Idiom رق را ب فع

خد برگرداذ

Convogliare verso sè

quel fiume di miele

Through-translation: It concerns mostly the literal translation of common collocations, names of

organizations and some popular phrases.

Method of

translation


Literal translation Concept جار ججال Una scenata

Literal translation Concept فس فس

زاى

L'ansante

References

English

1.Baker, Mona. 1998. Routledge Encyclopedia of Translation Studies. London and New York:

Routledge. pp.240-242.

2.Lefevere, André, ed. (1992). Translation/History/Culture: A Sourcebook. Edition 2003, Taylor &

Francis e-Library. London – New York: Routledge.

3.Munday, Jeremy (2008). Introducing Translation Studies: Theories and Applications. 2nd Edition.

4.London – New York: Routledge.

5.Newmark, Peter (1988). Approaches to Translation. New York – London: Prentice Hall

6.International.

7.Nida, Eugene. 2001. Language and Culture-Contexts in Translation. Shanghai: Shanghai Foreign

8.Language Education Press.

1







Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

77

9.Schleiermacher, Friedrich (1813). Ueber die verschiedenen Methoden des Uebersezens.

10.Reproduced in Das Problem des Übersetzens 1963, ed. Hans Joachim Störig. Stuttgart: Henry

Goverts Verlag, 38–69.

11.Shuttleworth, M. & M. Cowie. 1997. Dictionary of Translation Studies. Manchester, UK: St Jerome

Publishing.

12.Venuti, Lawrence (1995). The Translator’s Invisibility: A History of Translation. London - New

York: Routledge.

13.Venuti, Lawrence (1998a). The Scandals of Translation: Towards an Ethics of Difference. London -

New York: Routledge.

14.Venuti, Lawrence (1998b). Strategies of translation. Baker, Mona, ed. Routledge Encyclopedia of

Translation Studies. Edition 2003, Taylor & Francis e-Library. London – New York: Routledge, 240–

244.

فارسی

نظریه ترجمه، دیروز و امروز )دانشگبه فردوسی مشهد( "خساعی فر، علی، -15

اجتمبعی به بررسی مسئله برابری در ترجمه ادبیبت داستبنی از انگلیسی به -رویکردی نشبنه شنبختی"، 1386صیبمی، توحید، -16

،رسبله دوره دکترای زببنشنبسی همگبنی."فبرسی

، 22, شمبره 6، مطبلعبت ترجمه، دوره "برخورد بب هم آیی هب در ترجمه هبی انگلیسی به فبرسی"، 1387گیتی، تببستبن کریم خبنلویی، -17

9 -22از صفحه

55-63، صص32، مترجم، سبل نهم، شمبره "تعبدل در ترجمه"، 1379کوشب، منصور، -18

12-15، صص 74)مترجم(، سبل چهبردهم، شمبره ، خساعی فر، علی"استراتژیهبی ترجمه"، 1374ونوتی، الرنس، -19

نبمه کبرشنبسی ارشد. ، پبیبن"در ایران 80بومی سبزی و بیگبنه سبزی در ترجمه ادبیبت کودک در دهه " 1391یسدی، سلمب زینب، -20






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

78

Comparison of PID Type Controller Performance in Microgrid Frequency Deviation Enhancement Using MFO

Algorithm

Maryam Houshyari

Hossein Shayeghi

Abdollah Younesi

Electrical Engineering Department, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran Electrical Engineering Department, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran Electrical Engineering Department, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran

Abstract

This paper deals with an MFO algorithm based design of load frequency different PID type controller

for a microgrid consisting of solar photovoltaic, diesel engine generator, fuel cell with the equa-

electrolyzer and ultra-capacitor has been considered for simulation studies. The intermittent nature

of solar power may cause serious problem of frequency fluctuation. Therefore, IPD and PDPI

controllers designed for the purpose of minimization of frequency deviation and results are

compared with PID controller. Control gains of the different controllers are optimized using Moth-

flame optimization algorithm. Performance study of the power system is carried out under different

perturbation condition. It is found that MFO based optimized PDPI controller is very superior to PID

and IPD controllers in terms of settling time, overshoots and some performance indexes.

Keywords: Microgrid, Load frequency control, MFO algorithm, PID controller.

1.Introduction

Any country in the world, electricity is one of the most demanding forms of energy in every one's

daily life. In recent years the increasing concerns about the limited fossil fuel resources, their impact

on the environment, especially the global warming and the harmful effects of carbon emissions have

created a new demand for clean and sustainable energy sources [1]. The gap between power






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

79

generation and demand is widening day-by-day which has forced electric power utilities to supply

power to the customers erratically. Not only this, there are many places in the world which are yet to

be electrified due to energy shortage issue. Moreover, growing concern on deteriorating

environmental condition has led the electrical power utilities round the world to search renewable

energy sources based power generation technologies. Renewable energy sources based power

generation technologies are clean, sustainable and environment friendly [2]. Solar power generation

is one of the most promising renewable power generation technologies. Fuel cell also has potential to

be considered as one of the green power sources of the future. However, renewable energy sources

are mostly intermittent, so they can’t supply quality power constantly. This problem solved by

combining more renewable energy sources together with non-renewable or storage devices [3].

Currently, the microgrid power system is expected to create the smart power system for rural and

isolated areas due to some advantages such as high quality and reliability, increasing efficiency,

reducing costs, and environmentally friendly etc. The oscillations of load demand lead to mismatch

between the power generation and load demand resulting in mismatch in system frequency (f) from

the nominal value.

In the past, many researches have been proposed for controlling the oscillations of the frequency in

microgrid. Many control strategies have been proposed in the literature. In [4], optimization of

controller parameters proposed. Also in Refs. [5-6] variable structure control and in [7] energy

storage controllers have been reported

The Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) controller has its widespread acceptance in the industrial

processes due to its simplicity in understanding and its applicability to a large class of process having

different dynamics [9]. Thus, in this paper type PID controllers designed simultaneously, for any

renewable / non renewable energy sources. Type PID controllers are IPD and PDPI controllers

presented in [10].

In the recent years, optimization techniques are being used to obtain the optimal solutions efficiently

to the problems related to the operation and control of hybrid power system. Thus, the main

motivation of the present work triggers from the use of this novel Moth-Flame Optimization (MFO)

for optimizing controllers parameters for frequency regulation of the proposed hybrid power

system. The main inspiration of this optimizer is the navigation method of moths in nature called

transverse orientation. The statistical results on the benchmark functions show that this algorithm is

able to provide very promising and competitive results [11].

In this paper, a microgrid consisting of Photovoltaic (PV), Diesel Engine Generator (DEG), Fuel Cell

(FC), Aqua Electrolyzer (AE) and Ultra-Capacitor (UC) is proposed. The power system frequency

deviates for sudden changes in load or solar PV power. The controllers are installed before the

sources to alleviate this frequency deviation. The gain of the type PID controller is optimized using






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

81

MFO algorithm to mitigate frequency deviation owing to sudden generation/load change and

dynamic performance of PID controller compared with the IPD and PDPI controller.

2.Proposed Microgrid System

The generalized block diagram of the studied microgrid is shown in Fig. 1. The system consists of

diesel generator, FC, aqua electrolyzer, solar thermal and Ultra-Capacitor.The mathematical models

with first order transfer functions, fuel cell, aqua electrolyzer, PV system, diesel engine generator are

shown in this section. Nominal system parameters of the investigated microgrid model are presented

in [1].

a.

DEG

PV

AE

FC

UC

Controller

Controller

Controller

Controller

PL

b. Fig 1. Block diagram of the hybrid power system

A. Diesel Generator

Diesel generator can be used for emergency power supply. With sudden increase in load, it is

necessary that a diesel engine prime. Moreover, it has a fast dynamic response and have a good

capability of fluctuation rejection. The operation of DEG block may be given by simple transfer

functions as stated in Eqs. (1).

(S)1

DEGDEG

DEG

KG

T s

(1)

B. Solar PV system

Photovoltaic (PV) system converts the solar radiation coming from the sum into electrical energy.

The output power of the system is given by:

{1 0.05( 25)}PV aP S T (2)

Where, ɳ is conversion efficiency factor ranging from 9% to 12%, S (=4084 m2) is the measured area

a is ambient temperature in degree Celsius. The transfer

function of the PV system is given as [12]:

1( )

1

PVPV

PV

PG S

ST

(3)

C. Aqua Electrolyzer






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

81

AE apart from being used as a device to produce hydrogen for a FC unit, it also serves as the

controllable load. With the help of proper controller action, AE absorb the rapidly fluctuating output

power from wind turbine generators and solar photovoltaic power system. The transfer function

model of aqua electrolyzer can be expressed by [12]:

(4)

D. Fuel Cell

Energy of fuel directly into electrical energy without classical combustion. Because of high efficiency

and reliability, modularity, fuel flexibility, having no geographical limitations and being environment

friendly, FC are seen as very prominent alternative to be used along with intermittent sources like

wind turbine generator and solar photovoltaic that can be used in interconnected and islanded micro

grid. For low frequency domain analysis it is represented by a first order lag transfer function model

given as [19]:

(5)

E. Ultra-Capacitor

Ultracapacitors are electrochemical type capacitors which are used to store electrical energy during

surplus generation and deliver high power within a short duration of time duration of time during

the peak-load demand. Similarly the transfer function of the ultracapacitor can be represented as a

first order lag:

( )1

UCUC

UC

KG s

sT

(6)

F. Adopted Control Strategy

In this paper, type PID controllers are equipped for diesel generator, fuel cell, aqua electrolyzer, and

ultracapacitor. Input to each controller is the sum of the error in supply demand and product of

frequency deviation of power system and the gain. PID controller is one of the most commonly used

conventional controllers used by the process industries. It is, easily, realizable and it offers superior

performance in eliminating steady state errors and improving overall system dynamic response [13].

The architecture of the considered type PID controller is depicted in Fig. 2.

INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT INPUTOUTPUT

(a) (b)(c)

Fig. 2. Type PID controller; (a) PID Controller, (b) IPD Controller, (c) PDPI Controller.

( )1

AEAE

AE

KG s

sT

( )1

FC

FC

FC

KG s

sT






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

82

3.Moth-Flame Optimization Algorithm

Moth-Flame Optimization (MFO) algorithm is a novel nature-inspired algorithm. The main

inspiration of this algorithm is the navigating mechanism of moths in nature called transverse

orientation [11]. Moths fly in night by maintaining a fixed angle with respect to the moon, a very

effective mechanism for travelling in a straight line for long distances. However, these fancy insects

are trapped in a useless/deadly spiral path around artificial lights. In this paper, the MFO algorithm

are used to verify the performance of PID controller IPD and PDPI. In this paper, we consider the

ITSE performance criteria, of frequency deviation as the objective function. The fitness function is

the objective function we want to minimize. By minimizing the fitness function we get the optimal

parameters of PID, IPD and PDPI controllers.

4.Simulation Results and Discussions

MFO algorithm has been applied to optimal tune the different gains of the traditional controllers

incorporated in the studied microgrid, of Fig. 1 for frequency stabilization. In the present work, the

performance of ‘‘PID controller’’ is compared with ‘‘IPD and PDPI controller’’and the effectiveness of

the proposed IPD and PDPIcontroller is examined by simulation studies under two perturbation

conditions like (a) 1% step increase in load demand and 2% step in solar PV power, (b) 1% random

change in load demand. Results (overshoot and settling time) presented in Table 1.

A. Performance analysis with 1% step increase in load demand and 2% step in solar PV power:

A step disturbance of 0.01 p.u. is applied to the load demand at t= 0.5 s. The profile of Δf for the

different system configurations are shown in Fig. 3(a). From this Figures, it may be noted that the

proposed ‘‘IPD and PDPI controllers’’ system configuration outperforms the other system

configuration (i.e. ‘‘PID controller’’) in terms of settling time and overshoot. The power output of the

diesel generator are shown in Figs. 4(a) for PID, IPD and PDPI controllers. Diesel power plot shows

that for ‘‘PDPI controller’’, the power input is less, which is better, as the diesel generator is an

nonrenewable energy source. Now, a step disturbance of 0.02 p.u. is applied to the solar PV power.

The profiles of Δf for the different system configurations are shown in Fig. 3(b). From this Figures, it

may be noted that the proposed ‘‘IPD and PDPI controllers’’ system configuration is better the other

system configuration in terms of settling time and overshoot. The power output of the diesel

generator shown in Figs. 4(b). Figs. 4(b) shows similar results, alike while the 1% step increase load

demand.Results (settling time and overshoot) presented in Table 1.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

83

Table 1. Analysis of different controllers sytem with 1% step increase in load demand

Disturbances at

Controller

OS

TS(sec)

Disturbances at

Controller

OS

TS(sec)

Load Demand

PID 0.01 1.8236

Solar PV Power

PID 0.011 7.8982

IPD 0.0054 1.9274 IPD 5.7718e 10

PDPI 0.0063 1.9274 PDPI 8.1944e-4 6.2491

Fig.3. Frequency deviation-(a) Change in load demand; (b) Change in photovoltaic power, Solid (PDPI

Controller), Dashed-dotted (IPD Controller); Dashed (PID Controller)

Fig.4. Diesel power output deviation -(a) Change in load demand; (b) Change in photovoltaic power,

Solid (PDPI Controller), Dashed-dotted (IPD Controller); Dashed (PID Controller)

B. Performance analysis with random change in load demand

The effect of load variation is undertaken into account as random load change as an input

disturbance in the proposed microgrid to examine the performance of different system

configurations. Due to this random load variation, the nature of Δf is shown in Fig. 5. Even due to the

randomness of the variation in load demand, the proposed ‘‘IPD and PDPI controllers’’ system

configuration is giving better performance than the other system configuration.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

84

Fig. 5. Frequency deviation with 1% random in load demand. , Solid (PDPI Controller), Dashed-dotted

(IPD Controller); Dashed (PID Controller)

C. Performance analysis based on performance indices

The values of IAE and ISTE, as defined in Eqs. (7)-(8), are calculated for the three system

configurations at the end of developed program. The values of these performance indices are

featured in Table 2 on sample basis corresponding to 1% step increase in load demand. From this

Table, it may be noted that the proposed ‘‘IPD controller’’ system configuration is the best

configuration for the studied microgrid over ‘‘PID controller’’ model in terms of system stability.

0

IAE f dt

(7)

2

0

. .ITSE t f dt

(8)

Table 2. Values of different with 1% step increase in load demand.

Performance Index Controller

PID(×10-6) IPD(×10-6) PDPI(×10-6)

IAE 3200 1600 2200

ITSE 13.27 3.0666 5.3891






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

85

5.Conclusion

The microgrid requires a control system for the purpose of minimization of frequency deviation. In

this paper, in order to reduce frequency deviation under varying condition of load and solar PV

power, IPD and PDPI controllers has been designed for the proposed system using MFO algorithm. It

has been that the proposed controllers outperform the PID controller. IPD and PDPI system

configuration works very well under normal condition and it can tolerate satisfactorily the load

variation as well as intermittent solar PV power condition. Under small random load system

configuration also behaves well.

Refrences

1.Das, D. C., Roy, A. K., & Sinha, N. (2011, December). PSO based frequency controller for wind-solar-

diesel hybrid energy generation/energy storage system. In Energy, Automation, and Signal (ICEAS),

2011 International Conference on (pp. 1-6). IEEE.

2.Shankar, G., & Mukherjee, V. (2016). Load frequency control of an autonomous hybrid power

system by quasi-oppositional harmony search algorithm. International Journal of Electrical Power &

Energy Systems, 78, 715-734.

3.Pena, R., Cárdenas, R., Proboste, J., Clare, J., & Asher, G. (2008). Wind–diesel generation using

doubly fed induction machines. Energy Conversion, IEEE Transactions on, 23(1), 202-214.

4.Perera, A. T. D., Attalage, R. A., Perera, K. K. C. K., & Dassanayake, V. P. C. (2013). A hybrid tool to

combine multi-objective optimization and multi-criterion decision making in designing standalone

hybrid energy systems. Applied Energy, 107, 412-425.

5.Nandar, C. S. A. (2013). Robust PI control of smart controllable load for frequency stabilization of

microgrid power system. Renewable energy, 56, 16-23.

6.Bhatti, T. S., Al-Ademi, A. A. F., & Bansal, N. K. (1997). Load frequency control of isolated wind diesel

hybrid power systems. Energy conversion and management, 38(9), 829-837.

7.Mendis, N., & Muttaqi, K. (2013). An integrated control approach for standalone operation of a

hybridised wind turbine generating system with maximum power extraction capability.

International Journal of Electrical Power & Energy Systems, 49, 339-348.

8.Senjyu, T., Nakaji, T., Uezato, K., & Funabashi, T. (2005). A hybrid power system using alternative

energy facilities in isolated island. Energy Conversion, IEEE Transactions on, 20(2), 406-414.

9.Das, D. C., Roy, A. K., & Sinha, N. (2012). GA based frequency controller for solar thermal–diesel–

wind hybrid energy generation/energy storage system. International Journal of Electrical Power &

Energy Systems, 43(1), 262-279.

10.Vukic, Z., & Kuljaca, O. (2002). Lectures on pid controllers. Faculty of Electrical Engineering and

Computing University of Zagreb.

11.Mirjalili, S. (2015). Moth-flame optimization algorithm: A novel nature-inspired heuristic

paradigm. Knowledge-Based Systems, 89, 228-249.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

86

12.Lee, D. J., & Wang, L. (2008). Small-signal stability analysis of an autonomous hybrid renewable

energy power generation/energy storage system part I: time-domain simulations. Energy Conversion,

IEEE Transactions on, 23(1), 311-320.

12.Shayeghi, H., Jalili, A., & Shayanfar, H. A. (2008). Multi-stage fuzzy load frequency control using

PSO. Energy Conversion and Management, 49(10), 2570-2580.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

87

Analysis of the Relationship Between Social Capital and Job Satisfaction in Organizations

Masoud Darabi Nasrin Azizian Kohan

MA student of sports management (Physical Education and Sports Science, Mhaghegh Ardabili, Iran) Assistant professor of sports management (Physical Education and Sports Science, Mhaghegh Ardabili, Iran)

Abstract

Social capital is an important social issue a means to achieve other forms of capital, including

economic, human and cultural capital. One of the impressionable important of social capital, is job

satisfaction. Thus, the present study was to understand the importance of social issues and accepting

these assumptions that job satisfaction in different organizations،under the influence of social capital

people employed at the organization. pays off to explain the theoretical and empirical literature on

social capital and its impact on job satisfaction and in this explained present research at home and

abroad through the meta-analysis examined. The theoretical framework is based on the theory of

Putnam, Bourdieu, Coleman's social capital and Fisher, Hapax, Hersey and Blanchard on job

satisfaction and a combination of several other theories in this area is, and the effect of independent

variables, including dimensions of social capital is measured on dependent variable job satisfaction.

The methods used in this study, is documents and is a kind of meta-analysis. meta-analysis the

findings of the research conducted indicates that the dimensions of social capital variables (trust,

partnership, cooperation, solidarity, empathy and mutual respect, social networks) and the

dependent variable of job satisfaction, there is a significant and positive relationship.

Keywords: social capital,job satisfaction,partnership,empathy,Cooperation

1.Introduction

In the traditional view of management development, financing, economic, physical and human

resources played a most important role, but in the current era for development, executives more

than the economic capital, physical and human need, they need social capital, for without the use of

capital other capital improvements will be done. In a society that lacks sufficient social capital other

funds are wasted. Thus, social capital is considered as a guiding principle for achieving development

and Successful managers are able to communicate with the community to meet the production and






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

88

development of social capital]1[The role of social capital, physical capital and financial organizations

is very important. If organizations do not have the social capital in the community, other funds will

be value added]2[Therefore, managers should pay much attention to the attitude of the staff, because

the attitudes, behavior and can affect people of potential employees to their actual capabilities]3[.

Job satisfaction least three reasons is very important for managers. (1) There is ample evidence that

dissident leave the Organization. (2) Studies show that happy employees of better health and live

longer. (3) Job satisfaction is a phenomenon that transcends the boundaries of organizations and

companies and its effects in the private lives of employees can also be seen outside the

organization]4[.

From one side, social capital concepts in the present age is the key to the success of staff and On the

other side, job satisfaction, increasing productivity and providing better service to the Clientele]5[.

Because, according to the original dimensions of social capital, trust, social norms, social awareness

and community involvement and civic and connecting people with each other, If more people in an

organization and their career planning and process involved, have higher social awareness and the

social norms of cooperation and trust more commonplace, have higher job satisfaction from their

work and higher job satisfaction, A more efficient organization and successfully lead its members

and physical and mental well-being and finally helps community mental health [6].

Considering the importance and the role that social capital plays in creating job satisfaction on the

other side the importance of job satisfaction, the study is designed to investigate the factors affecting

job satisfaction in terms of social capital. This study issue is examination of the impact of social

capital on job satisfaction based on previous research.

2.Method

This study is a documentary research using meta-analysis methods based on investigation and

previous internal and abroad research in recent years, deals the subject.

Meta-analysis of previous research

A. Research conducted abroad:

Wing Chun Chang (2009) in an article entitled evaluation of social capital and personal satisfaction in

Taiwan to the conclusion that Partnerships with nonprofit organizations and religious participation

and charities and social services was positively associated with the level of personal satisfaction.

Other results of this research are:






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

89

Social capital has inversely related with age.

Social capital is positively related to net income.

Partnerships with nonprofit organizations and religious participation is positively related to the

amount of social capital. It states that social capital is complementary friendly and religion behaviors

[7].

Yamaguchi, Ikushi (2012) in a study by an examination of self-determination, Organizational social

capital, Job satisfaction and organizational commitment in both Japan and America countries

Concluded that social capital has a profound impact on job satisfaction and organizational

commitment [8].

Boas and Wind (2012) in his study exploring the relationship employment- based social capital, Job

stress, Burnout and intent to leave among child protections workers concluded that social capital

indicators (trust, understanding and mutual respect, cooperation) are effective in reducing job stress

and job satisfaction. It is much more pronounced for older workers [9].

B. Research conducted Inside:

Safarzadeh (2010) by examining the effect of social capital indicators on occupational activities Staff,

first, addressed to measure the social capital among faculty members and in examining the

relationship and its impact on job satisfaction concluded that social capital has a direct and

significant impact on physical activity faculty members' job [10].

Aryan nasab (2011) in a study aimed to evaluate the impact on job satisfaction District 3 Education

Teachers of Qom, components of social capital (trust, participation, support, social interaction and

network membership) should be considered. Came to the conclusion that a significant relationship

between these components with teacher's job satisfaction. The results show that about 65% of

changing teachers' job satisfaction by variable Social capital can be explained [11].

3.Results and Discussion

Given the number of components and different aspects of the review, the results are very numerous

and varied. Here even the opportunity to provide a detailed summary of the results is not. As

mentioned, different research results are compared to distinguish different aspects here is what the

outcome of the investigation. Here and in aggregate findings can be related to admission of error and






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

91

taking advantage of the scale Likert judge on the status of work environments. According to the final

status of social capital in each of the aspects described as follows:

The top 60 percent: good or high condition

Between 40 and 59 percent: state average

Below 40 percent: unfavorable or down

Relationship between social capital and job satisfaction

In general, social capital theory with an emphasis on listed and analysis of the benefits of social ties

at different levels, gives a new analysis of satisfaction at work. With regard to the collection and

analysis of the theoretical foundations that were cited in this section, social capital variables as the

basis for job satisfaction was chosen analysis. If you check this variable can be used to form and

subject matter were testing relevant theory to accommodate the requirements and conditions of the

studied population.

Significantly between the social capital and employees' job satisfaction and the relationship

between the two variables are directly related. With the increase of social capital, i.e.

employees, their job satisfaction increases.

There is a significant relationship between cohesion and job satisfaction there. Satisfaction

with distinct social organizations in order to destroy jobs and are harmful for satisfaction.

The results indicated that the success of individual features it depends on the organization's social

status. Employees who earn higher social capital that is placed at the center of social networks, may

during their working life enjoy their professional development. Social needs of fundamental human

need they tend to have intimate relationship with your colleagues and also be accepted by the group.

Thus improving cooperation between people makes improving job satisfaction and increase the

motivation of individuals. Human relations and solidarity probably more than any other factor in job

satisfaction is important, people interested work with people they like and can cope with them. They

will work good for president. And when he does not like, leave your job. Build trust and friendly

relations is the first step the responsibility of the authorities is in the workplace, which is a part of

society. If organization officials create trust among employees and also note the informal relations

and programs need to increase informal and friendly relations between their employees, Meanwhile,

organizations can reduce costs, and also increase their productivity.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

91

The proposed model for explaining the relationship between social capital and job

satisfaction

References

1- Alvani, M, Shrvani,A, social capital (concepts, theory and applications), Mani Press, 2006

2-Field, John, Social Capital, Routledge Taylor Francis Group, London and New York, 2004

3- Robbins, Stephen IP-2004, Organizational Behavior, translation Arabs and Mohammad Ali

Parsaeian, Tehran: Cultural Research Bureau. Fifth Edition.

4- Stoner, James, Freeman, Edward, management, leadership and control, translated by Mohammad

Erabi and Ali Parsaeian. Tehran, Institute for Trade Studies and Research,2004

5- Delve, cultural pathology examination of the organizational culture and approach, strategy,

culture, 2008

6- Taj bakhsh, K, trust and democracy and the development of social capital, Tehran, Shiraz

Publishing,2005

7-Chang Y. Gender differences in relationship between social capital and individual smoking and

drinking behavior in Taiwan, Journal homepage, social science & medicine, 67, pp 1321-1330, 2009

8-Yamaguchi, Ikushi, A Japan- us cross-cultural study of relationship among organizational social

capital, job satisfaction, and organizational commitment, International Journal of Intercultural

Relations, 20012

9-Boyas, Javier, Leslie H. Wind, Exploring the relationship employment- based social capital, Job

stress, Burnout and intent to leave among child protections workers. An age-based path analysis

model children and youth services Review, vole 34, pp 50-62, 2012

10-Safarzadeh, H., Ahmed Sharif, M, Zackery, A, the effect of social capital indicators on occupational

activities of faculty members, Journal of Educational Technology, Issue 2, Pages 152-145, 2010

11-Aryayi Nasab, Z, to investigate the impact on job satisfaction District 3 Qom, Master Thesis, 2010






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

92

Entanglement of Non-inertial Fermions is not Invariably

Suitable for Superdense coding

Mehrnoosh Farahmand

Hosein Mohammadzadeh

Hossein Mehri-Dehnavi

Robabeh Rahimi

Department of Physics, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, 5619911367, Ardabil, Iran Department of Physics, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, 5619911367, Ardabil, Iran

Department of Physics, Babol University of Technology, 47148-71167, Babol, Iran. Department of Physics, Science and Research Branch, Islamic Azad University, Tehran, Iran

Abstract Two particles, even being far from each other have quantum correlation as a result of the existence of entanglement in between them. Therefore, information can be shared by entangled particles, sitting in separate places. Superdense coding is one of the quantum protocols that relies on entanglement. In this paper, we study superdense coding with an non-inertial observer in beyond single mode approximation. We investigate the probability of success for superdense coding and quantum correlation of the state. Entanglement behavior is studied considering an entanglement measure so called logarithmic negativity. Comparing logarithmic negativity with probability of superdense coding is shown these quantities have different behaviors, particularly, when the beyond single mode approximation is strong.

Keywords: superdense coding, entanglement, non-inertial frame

1.Introduction

Entanglement has central importance in quantum information theory. Since world is relativistic and

many implementations of quantum information tasks require relativistic systems, relativistic effects

in quantum information have been exposed in vast domain of researches.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

93

Entanglement treatments and its application in quantum information processing have been

investigated for non-inertial observers in single mode approximation (Mehri-Dehnavi at al., 2011;

Mehri-Dehnavi at al., 2015). It has been shown that entanglement in infinite acceleration limit is non-

zero between spinor modes in single mode approximation (Alsing, at al., 2006). For exploitation of

how entanglement is played a role in presence of Rindler horizon, the results have been extended to

beyond single mode approximation (Bruschi, at al., 2010).

The main purpose of this research is to study superdense coding (Bennett, at al., 1992) with an non-

inertial observer in beyond single mode approximation. We compare the probability of success in

superdense coding with the logarithmic negativity (Peres, at al., 1996). It is shown these quantities

have different behaviours in beyond single mode approximation.

2.Superdense coding

Superdense coding process (Bennett, at al., 1992; Rahimi, at al,. 2006) begins with a pair of

entangled two-level particles that is shared between Alice, as sender, and Bob, as receiver. An EPR

pair (Einstein, at al., 1935) or a Bell state, in the two-dimension Hilbert space of the two particles is

used, that is a maximally entangled. Suppose Alice and Bob share a Bell state, ⟩ , as follows

⟩

√ ( ⟩ ⟩ ⟩ ⟩), (1)

where subscripts A and B show Alice's qubit and Bob's one, respectively. Alice has a two-bit message,

00, 01, 10, or 11, that she wants to send it to Bob. Alice operates one of the four unitary operators,

on her qubit. Therefore, the initial Bell state, Eq. (1), transforms to one of the four

orthonormal Bell states. Then Alice transmits her manipulated qubit for Bob. Bob performs a

measurement in the Bell-basis, that is yielded one of the four distinctive results, based the outcome,

the initial two-bit message is distinguishable. So in the super dense coding a classical two-bit

message is encoded by one of the four Bell states, by the sender, and the receiver decodes this

quantum state by a suitable measurement and achieves the original information.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

94

3.Superdense coding in non-inertial frame

Alice and Bob, as two inertial observers, start the process by sharing a maximally entangled two-

qubit state, an EPR pair, such as Eq. (1). Consider Alice remains at rest and Bob accelerates

uniformly. The Minkowski vacuum and one particle modes from Bob's view point is expanded in

terms of the corresponding Rindler vacuum and one particle modes in the regions I and II (Alsing, at

al., 2006; Bruschi, at al., 2010), as follows.

⟩ ⟩ ⟩ ⟩ ⟩ ,

⟩ ⟩ ⟩ ⟩ ⟩ , (2)

where ( ( )) with 𝜔 ( ) is the parameter equal to acceleration, and

which indicated the presence probability of particle in right or left Rindler regions, respectively, are

the complex numbers that satisfy

and , -. For simplicity, we only consider the

cases that and are real. Therefore, the initially shared state, Eq. (1) can be rewritten in terms of

left and right Rindler regions such as follow

⟩

√ * ⟩ ⟩ ⟩ ⟩+, (3)

where ⟩ ⟩ ⟩ ⟩ . Alice applies one of the operators, to her qubit as follows

⟩

√ * ⟩ ⟩ ⟩ ⟩+,

⟩

√ * ⟩ ⟩ ⟩ ⟩+,

⟩

√ * ⟩ ⟩ ⟩ ⟩+,

⟩

√ * ⟩ ⟩ ⟩ ⟩+. (4)

Suppose Alice has been used the operator I which does not change the state (3). Then the Alice’s

manipulated qubit is sent to Bob. Now Bob has both qubits in his position. The Rindler region I and II






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

95

are causally disconnected and no information propagates between them. Bob is constrained to move

in the region I, thus the density matrix is obtained by tracing out the region II, as follows

* ⟩⟨ ⟩⟨

⟩⟨ ⟩⟨

( ⟩⟨

⟩⟨ )+. (5)

Bob performs a Bell-basis measurement to decode the classical information, and gets the following

results

Table 1

The Results of measurement in Bell-basis by Bob

⟨ | | ⟩ ⟨ |

| ⟩ ⟨ | | ⟩ ⟨ |

| ⟩

Probability of

finding in the

Bell states

( )

( )

( )

( )

The results of Table 1 show that the probability of success for superdense coding is

( )

. Thus the measurement by Bob on the density matrix after tracing out the region

II depends on the acceleration parameter, r, and the presence probability of particle in the left or in

the right Rindler regions. If , then single mode approximation is achieved. The probability of

success for superdense coding as a function of the acceleration parameter, r, and the presence

probability of particle in the right Rindler region, is shown in Figure. 1. This function is decreasing

with respect to increasing r and with respect to decreasing . We employ the logarithmic negativity

to quantify the entanglement of in Eq. (5), (Peres, at al., 1996). the logarithmic negativity is

defined as

( ) ∑ ( ) ,

where is the partial transpose of the density matrix and ( ) are the eigenvalues of

partial transpose of density matrix . Thus the logarithmic negativity for Eq. (5), is given by






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

96

( ) {

}. (6)

Figure 14 The probability of success in terms of the acceleration parameter, r,

and the presence probability, .

Figure 15 The logarithmic negativity in terms of the acceleration

parameter, r, and the presence probability, .

یاى تحصيالت داشجالوللی بييسهيي سوپزیم



هخردادما 71-71


Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

97

Figure. 2 shows the logarithmic negativity as a function of the acceleration parameter, r, and the

presence probability of particle in the right Rindler region, . In the single mode approximation,

, the logarithmic negativity is a descending function of acceleration, r. So long as the particle is

in the right Rindler region, i.e. it has a small probability to be in the left Rindler region, and for small

value of acceleration, then the logarithmic negativity has similar behaviours to the probability of

success with respect to the acceleration and with respect to the presence probability of particle in

the right Rindler region. It is clear that the logarithmic negativity is decreasing with increasing r and

with decreasing . However, if the particle has larger probability of being in the left Rindler region

and for large value of the acceleration, the logarithmic negativity has different behaviours with

respect to the probability of success. The logarithmic negativity is an increasing function of r, and a

descending function of .


c. We investigated the superdense coding by an accelerated observer in beyond single

mode approximation. The probability of success is dependent to acceleration.

d. In Single mode approximation, qr =1, and for r=0, probability of success is

maximum, i. e. P=1, where is given the original superdense coding (Bennett, at al., 1992). In

this situation the logarithmic negativity is also maximum, N=1. By increasing the acceleration,

the probability of success and the logarithmic negativity are decreasing functions of the

acceleration, as expected.

In beyond single mode approximation, by increasing the acceleration, the probability of success is

always decreasing with respect to increasing the acceleration and with respect to decreasing the

presence probability of particle in right Rindler region. The logarithmic negativity behaves the same

for the small values of acceleration and the large values of presence probability of particle in right

Rindler region. Nevertheless, when the particle has larger probability of being in the left Rindler

region and for the large values of the acceleration, the logarithmic negativity has different behaviors

to the probability of success with respect to the acceleration and with respect to the presence

probability of particle in the right Rindler region. Therefore, the logarithmic negativity is not a

reliable measure for these ranges of the acceleration and the presence probability of particle in right

Rindler. In fact, the logarithmic negativity is not shown suitable entanglement for superdense coding,






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

98

at least, for the special ranges of the acceleration and the presence probability of particle in the right

Rindler region.

References

1.Alsing, P. M., Fuentes-Schuller, I., Mann, R. B., & Tessier T. E. (2006). “Entanglement of Dirac fields

in noninertial frames”. Phys. Rev. A 74, 032326.

2.Bennett, C. H., & Wiesner, S. J. (1992). “Communication via one-and two-particle operators on

Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen states ”. Phys. Rev. Lett. 69, 2881.

3.Bruschi, D. E., Louko, J., Mart n-Mart nez, E., Dragan, A., & Fuentes, I. (2010). “The Unruh effect in

quantum information beyond the single-mode approximation”. Phys. Rev. A 82, 042332.

4.Einstein, A., Podolsky, B., & Rosen, N. (1935). “Can quantum-mechanical description of physical

reality be considered complete?”. Phys. Rev. 47, 777.

5.Mehri-Dehnavi, H., Mirza, B., Mohammadzadeh, H., & Rahimi, R. (2011). “Pseudo-entanglement

evaluated in noninertial frames”. Ann. Phys. 326, 1320.

6.Mehri-Dehnavi, H., Rahimi, R., Mohammadzadeh, H., Ebadi, Z., & Mirza, B. (2015). “Quantum

teleportation with nonclassical correlated states in noninertial frames”.Quantum Inf. Process. 14,

1025.

7.Peres, A. (1996). “Separability criterion for density matrices ”. Phys. Rev. Lett. 77, 1413.

8.Rahimi, R., Takeda, K., Ozawa, M., & Kitagawa, M. (2006). “Entanglement witness derived from NMR

superdense coding”. J. Phys. A 39, 2151.

http://journals.aps.org/prl/abstract/10.1103/PhysRevLett.69.2881


http://journals.aps.org/pr/abstract/10.1103/PhysRev.47.777

http://journals.aps.org/pr/abstract/10.1103/PhysRev.47.777


http://iopscience.iop.org/article/10.1088/0305-4470/39/9/011/meta

http://iopscience.iop.org/article/10.1088/0305-4470/39/9/011/meta






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

99

Thermodynamic Entropy Due to Lorentz Violation

Mehrnoosh Farahmand

Hosein Mohammadzadeh

Department of Physics, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, 5619911367, Ardabil, Iran Department of Physics, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, 5619911367, Ardabil, Iran

Abstract Quantum effects of gravity in the early universe can be led to the existence of the present particles.

We consider a free mass-less scalar field on a spatial lattice has been included in the early universe,

so that all modes of the field are in vacuum state. Such scalar field model represents a modified

dispersion relation as Lorentz violation which displays a quantum gravity model. The vacuum state

in the presence of Lorentz violation can be appeared as particle creation. In this paper, the particle

production due to Lorentz violation is shown as an entropic increase. Therefore, in this approach the

source of the current entropy content of the universe should be directly related to particle creation

stemming from Lorentz violation.

Keywords: particle creation, Lorentz violation, thermodynamics entropy

1.Introduction

In a gravity dominant regime with enormous density of the field, such big-bang and black hole

theories, quantum effects are important. A quantum gravity model is a deviation from standard

dispersion relation, i. e. Lorentz violation. In fact, the modified dispersion relation is achieved by the

process of discrete modeling the spacetime on a lattice (Amelino-Camelia, 2013).

Study of quantum field theory in curved spacetime is shown that the initial vacuum state represents

created particle due to interaction between quantum field and gravitational field (Birrell, at al.,

1984). We use Lorentz violation model with a time dependent Lorentz violation parameter to study

how the present state containing particle is appeared. Also, we employ thermodynamics to






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

111

understanding the current entropy source of universe .We show that the source of the current

entropy content of the universe is directly related to created particle stemming from Lorentz

violation.

2.Free scalar field on a spatial lattice

We consider a mass-less free scalar field in 1+1 dimensions without loss of generality. The Klein-

Gordon equation is such as follow.

, (1)

where exhibits the dispersion relation for plane waves as

𝜔 . (2)

Letting Eq. (1) on a spatial lattice, we have

( ) ( ) ( ) . (3)

where a is the space discrete-time continuum lattice. We will have a symmetric Brillouin zone,

, considering a plan-wave solution on the lattice as follows.

. (4)

Substituting the solution in Eq. (3) yields

𝜔

. (5)

Thus, the dispersion relation for the lattice model is as follows

𝜔

( ). (6)

Eq. (6) for , is yielded

𝜔 ( ), (7)

where in the limit , implies the standard dispersion relation, i. e. Eq. (2). Adding second term of

the Talor extension of the cos-function in Eq. (6), represents a modified dispersion relation as

follows.

𝜔 . (8)






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

111

3.Production entropy

Let us consider a deviation from the standard dispersion relation such Eq. (8), as quantum gravity

effect (Amelino-Camelia, 2013). We assume the back ground structure of space time is flat. For the

early times, , the dispersion relation is 𝜔 , where is the Lorentz

violation parameter. For the late times, , the dispersion relation has the standard form, Eq.

(2). The natural solutions are , but since the dispersion relation is different for two

asymptotic regions, the definitions of basis are not the same. Thus, the initial vaccum state and the

final vacuum state are not equivalent, in analogy with other scenarios of quantum field theory in

curved space time (Birrell, 1984).

According to above interpretation, we choose a time evolution of the Lorentz violation parameter as

follows (Khosravi, 2011)

( )

. (9)

Substituting the operators and into 𝜔 and in Eq. (7), and letting ( ), the Klien

Gordon equation leads to

, ( ) - . (10)

The solution of Eq. (9) is

( ) (√

) ( )

(√ )

( ). (11)

where is the hypergeometric function. Eq. (10) for the far past time, in-region and the far future

time, out-region are as follow 2F1

( )

√

( ),






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

112

( )

√

(

( ) ( )

( ) ( ) ( )

( ) ( )

( ) ( )

( )),

(12)

where is the Gamma function and

√ (𝜔 𝜔 ),

√ (𝜔 𝜔 ), (13)

√ 𝜔 .

Also, 𝜔 √

. The solution of in-region and out-region are related as follow

( )

( ) ( ), (14)

where ( )

( ), ( )

( ) and and are the Bogoliubov coefficients.

Therefore, the created particle is in the following form

( ( ))

( ) ( ). (15)

Then the initial vacuum state converts to an exited state which the context of the particle is given by

Eq. (15).

Considering the vacuum state in the infinity future as a two mode squeezed state, the reduced

density matrix will be as

| |∑

⟩⟨ . (16)






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

113

The density matrix of the created particle can be written in the thermal form such as follows

∑

(

) ⟩⟨

. (17)

Therefore, the created entanglement mode pairs are in a thermal equilibrium with an equilibrium

temperature as follows

( )

. (18)

It has been shown the production entropy of the created particle is given by

, (19)

where T is the equilibrium temperature assigned to created particle, Eq. (18). Substituting Eq. (18)

into Eq. (19) yields

.

/, (20)

where is given by Eq. (15). Regarding to the definition of 𝜔 √

, there is an upper

bound on the k, for positive value of , in the event that the Eq. (20) is always valid for negative

value of . The case

corresponding to , as expected.

The Youth Look

The 3rd CUA’s Graduate Students Symposium

University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran

www.uma.ac.ir/links/tgss

Figure 16: The production entropy

with respect to k for , the

solid line, and for , the

dotdashed line.

Figure 17: The production entropy

with respect to k for , the

solid line, with the upper bound

and for , the dotdashed line,

with the upper bound .






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 105

Figure 1 shows the production entropy with respect to k for two different negative values of . The

production entropy has maxima, where for each Lorentz parameter is different. Increasing the

Lorentz parameter, the maximum value of the production entropy forward to larger value of k.

Figure 2 represents the production entropy with respect to k for two different positive values of .

It is worth mentioning that for each case, valid values of k are less than the upper bound on the k.


We investigated the effects of Lorentz violation by a time dependent modified dispersion relation. In

the past infinity, The vacuum state in the presence of Lorentz violation can be represented the

created particles in the absence of Lorentz violation in the future infinity.The particle production due

to Lorentz violation was shown as an entropic increase. Therefore, in this approach the source of the

current entropy content of the universe was directly related to particle creation stemming from

Lorentz violation.

References

1.Amelino-Camelia, G. (2013). “Quantum spacetime phenomenology” Living Rev. Relativity, 16 (5),

137.

2.Birrell, N. D., & Davies, P. C. W. (1984). Quantum fields in curved space (No. 7). Cambridge university

press.

3.Khosravi, N. (2011). “Particle creation from vacuum by Lorentz violation”. General Relativity and

Gravitation, 43(5), 1417.

اشجیاى تحصيالت دالوللی بييسهيي سوپزیم

قفقاز ای عض اتحادیۀتکويلی داشگا




Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106

New Approach for Solution of Volterra-Fredholm Integral

Equations

Mina Salimi

Amin Anvarzadeh

Department of Applied Mathematics, Mohaghegh University of Ardabil, iran Department of Applied Mathematics, Mohaghegh University of Ardabil, iran

Abstract

In this paper we analyze two methods to approximate of the solution of the mixed volterra-fredholm

integral equations, by making use of the expression of a function of a basis spline and schauder. The

first is collocation method and second one is fixed point method. We analyze some problems of

convergence and stdy the error in each approximation. Numerical results show the theoretical

statements.

Keywords: Volterra-Fredholm equation, collocation method, fixed point method. spline, schauder

basis

Introduction

Let us consider the following Volterra–Fredholm linear integral equation of the second kind:

(1)

Where * + ; , - ; ( ) , - , - and u: , - , with f and

( )

known function satisfying (1).

When modeling real problems, one has frequently to deal with Eq. (1) which has the theoretical and

computational features

of both Volterra and Fredholm equations.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 107

Suitable conditions on ( )and are posed in order to obtain a unique solution of (1) in C[a,b],

under the assumption that f C[a,b] (for proofs in particular Banach spaces, with different conditions

on ( ), refer, for example, to [6,1]).

However, in this paper, to state some results about the convergence of the proposed methods, we

will assume the following

conditions:

From a numerical point of view it is well known that Volterra equations are generally solved through

iterative methods.

On the contrary direct methods are more suitable to the solution of Fredholm equations (see for

example [2] and [3]). We tried to afford the solution of (1) both through an iterative as well as

through a direct numerical method. The aim of this

paper is to analyze and compare these two different numerical methods.

We can reduce (1) to two equivalent compact forms:

(2),(3)

where operators and are defined as follows:

(4),(5)

and I is the identity operator in C[a,b].

The structure of (2) and (3) suggests the idea of constructing and comparing two different classes of

methods: collocation direct methods and iterative fixed point methods (normally referred in

particular to non linear equations).

Both kinds of methods are proposed for a particular class of approximating functions.

Namely, the first method (in the following called CSp) is a collocation method based on a linear

spline class approximation;

the second one (in the following called FPSc) is a fixed point method built on Schauder linear bases.

We compare the two methods in terms of both efficiency and adaptability to the peculiarities of the

integral model under






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 108

consideration. Convergence analysis is carried out in both cases.some preliminaries about the

particular linear splines class and to the description and analysis of

the numerical collocation method. describe the Schauder basis correlated to the fixed point method

and to study the related convergence problems. numerical results for both methods are given. some

final remarks on the comparison between the two methods and some open problems.

we present a numerical model suitable to (1) based on a collocation method using approximating

splines,

in particular the so called variation-diminishing Schoenberg (VDS) splines [12].

Firstly, let us recall some background on linear VDS splines (see for example [8]).

If we define

, - (6)

the values , approximating the function u in ( )are determined imposing that rn,

defined in (6 ), is zero in a set of collocation points ( ) chosen in [a,b]:

(7)

and solving the linear system(7).

we present a numerical model suitable to (1) based on a fixed point method with Schauder bases.

Firstly we recall some necessary background on linear Schauder bases.

we define the operator , - , - defined as it follows:

(8)

Under the hypotheses of existence and uniqueness of the solution of (1) it is well known that the

fixed point theorem assures

a unique fixed point for the operator

For the collocation method we consider:

_ the mesh points as equidistant points in [0,1] with double nodes in 0 and 1,

_ the mesh points all simple in (0, 1) as the approximation points,

_ the collocation points as a set of distinct points of the same number of the approximation points.

For the fixed point method we consider the subset of [0,1] defined as






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 109

supporting the Schauder basis in C[0, 1].

We denote R1 and R2 respectively the max(jerrj) in the fixed point and in the collocation methods,

being err the set of

errors related to the approximation of the unknown function in a suitable subset of points in [0, 1].

Numerical results:

Example. = 15, ( ) and ( ) ( )

For the fixed point method an algorithmic instability is experienced, while in the collocation case the

equations are

more sensitive to the lack of stability of the collocation system. This last effect is currently under

study.

References

1. S. András, Weakly Singular Volterra and Fredholm–Volterra Integral Equations, Mathematica, vol.

XLVIII, Studia Babes-Bolyai, 2003. pp 147–155.

2.K.E. Atkinson, The Numerical Solution of Integral Equations of the Second Kind, Cambridge

University Press, Cambridge, 1997.

3. K.E. Atkinson, H. Weimin, Theoretical Numerical Analysis, Springer-Verlag, New York, 2001.

4. M.I. Berenguer, M.A. Fortes, A.I. Garralda Guillem, M. Ruiz Galán, Linear Volterra integro

differential equation and Schauder bases, Appl. Math. Comput.

159 (2004) 495–507.

5. M.I. Berenguer, M.V. Fernández Muñoz, A.I. Garralda Guillem, M.Ruiz Galán, Numerical Treatment

of Fixed Point Applied to the Nonlinear Fredholm

Integral Equation, Fixed Point Theory Appl. 2009, p. 8. (Article ID 735638).






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 110

6. F. Caliò, E. Marchetti, V. Muresan, On some Volterra–Fredholm integral equation, IJPAM 31 (2006)

173–184.

7. F. Caliò, E. Marchetti, V. Muresan, Theoretical and numerical results about some weakly singular

Volterra–Fredholm equations, Rev. Anal. Numer.

Theor. Approx. 37 (2008) 27–36.

8. F. Caliò, E. Marchetti, An algorithm based on q.i. modified splines for singular integral models,

Comput. Math. Appl. 41 (2001) 1579–1588.

9.C. Dagnino, V. Demichelis, E. Santi, A Nodal Spline Collocation Method for Weakly Singular Volterra

Integral Equations, Mathematica, XLVIII, Babes-

Bolyai, 2003. pp. 71–81.

10. M. Domingo, A.I. Garralda Guillem, M. Ruiz Galán, Fredholm integral equations and Schauder

bases, Monogr. Semin. Mat. Garcia Galdeano 31 (2004)

121–128.

11. D. Gamez, A.I. Garralda Guillem, M. Ruiz Galán, Nonlinear initial-value problems and Schauder

bases, Nonlinear Anal. 63 (2005) 97–105.

12. T. Lyche, L.L. Schumaker, Local spline approximation methods, J. Approx. Theory 15 (1975) 294–

325.

13. A. Palomares, M. Ruiz Galán, Isomorphisms, Schauder bases and numerical solution of integral

and differential equation, Numer. Funct. Anal. Optim. 26

(2005) 129–137.

14. P. Rabinowitz, Numerical integration based on approximating splines, JCAM 33 (1990) 73–83.

15. Z. Semadeni, Product Schauder bases and approximation with nodes in spaces of continuous

functions, Bull. Polish Acad. Sci. 11 (1963) 387–391.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 111

Haar Wavelet Method For

Solving One-dimensional Burger’s equation

M.Zarebnia R.Parvaz

Department of Mathematics and Applications, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, 56199-11367, Ardabil, Iran Department of Mathematics and Applications, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, 56199-11367, Ardabil, Iran

Abstract In this paper, the haar wavelet collocation method is implemented to find numerical solution of the One-dimensional Burger’s equation. The method is based on haar wavelet for space integration and finite difference formulae for time integration. The numerical results have been compared with the exact solution

Keywords: One-dimensional Burger’s equation, Haar wavelet, Finite difference, Collocation.

1.Introduction

One-dimensional Burger’s equation is used in fluid dynamics, for more details see (Johnson, R.W.). In

recent years, many different methods have been used to estimate the solution of the One-

dimensional Burger’s equation; see, for example,( Yang, H.Q., & Przekwas, A.J.). We consider the One-

dimensional Burger’s equation as follows:

( ) ( )

with the initial condition and the boundary conditions

( ) ( ) ( )

( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

where is the coefficient of kinematic viscosity.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 112

The balance of this paper is organized as follows. In Section 2, the haar wavelet collocation method

for the numerical solution of the One-dimensional Burger’s equation is described. In Section 3, the

results of numerical experiments are presented. A summary is given at the end of the paper in

Section 4.

2. Haar wavelet collocation method

In the first step we define the haar wavelet family for , - as follows

( ) ( ) {

, )

, )

( )

where

( )

In the above formulae we consider , and , Also is

defined as

( ) { , )

( )

In the next step, by using finite difference scheme we can find

( )

( )

( ) ( )

( )

where ( ). The nonlinear term in Eq. (7) can be approximated by using the following

formula

( )

( )

( )

Substituting the approximate Eq. (8) in Eq. (7) and rearranging the terms and simplifying we get

( )






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 113

with

( )

and

( )

To continue we define the approximation for as follows

( ) ∑

( ) ( )

where ( ) are haar wavelet. Now we introduce the following notations.

( ) ∫ ( ) ( ) ∫ ( ) ∫ ( )

( )

For this collocation method we define the following collocation points.

( )

We integrate Eq. (12) from to .

( ) ∑

( )

Again, we integrate of Eq. (15)from to .

( ) ( ) ∑

( )

By using boundary conditions we can find ( ) as






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 114

( ) ( ) ∑

( )

Therefore we can rewrite and as follows

( ) ( ( ) ( )) ∑ ( ( ) ) ( )

( ) ( ) ∑

( ( ) ) ( )

Now with Substituting (12), (18) and (19) into (9), we obtain system of equations. Solving this

system we get the unknown the Haar coefficients. We note that if , - , -, , - must be

changed into , - before applying above method.

3. Numerical example

Consider the One-dimensional Burger’s equation with in the interval , -. In this case we

assume that exact solution is

( )

( )

( )

where . For this example we consider boundary conditions as

( ) ( )

The initial condition is taken from the exact solution. Table 1 shows in different times with

, , and . Table 1 shows that the solution obtained by our method is close

to the exact solution.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 115

Table1

Numerical result

time time

0.1 0.6

0.2 0.7

0.3 0.8

0.4 0.9

0.5 1

4. Conclusion

In this paper, the haar wavelet method is used to solve the one-dimensional Burger’s equation. The

method is tested on problem. And the obtained numerical results are compared with the exact

solution. Also, obtained results showed that this approach can solve the problem effectively.

References

1.Johnson, R.W. (1998). The Handbook of Fluid Dynamics, CRC Press, Springer.

2.Yang, H.Q., & Przekwas, A.J. , (1999) , Numerical solution of one-dimensional Burgers equation:

explicit and exact-explicit finite difference methods, Journal of Computational and Applied

Mathematics,103 (2) 251-261.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 116

The impact of Russian and Chechen conflicts on the

Caucasus crisis

Morteza Ebrahimi Sed Ali Mortazavi Emami Zavare

Fahime Oleiki Mehdy Jahantab

AssiProfessor,Department of Political Science, University of Mohaghegh Ardebili, Ardabil, Iran.

Department of Education and Theology of, University of Esfahan, Iran M.Sc.Department of Humanities, University of Mohaghegh Ardebili, Ardabil, Iran.

Department of Member of the ahl-Bayt World Assembly, Tehran, Iran

Abstract

The collapse of the former Soviet Union caused a geopolitical vacuum in the Caucasus, Central Asia.

In such a way that it make it competitive in terms of regional and international powers. The presence

of regional and trans-regional powers take impact on the region behavioral pattern. The question

that lies ahead is that what is the impact of conflicts of Chechnya and Russia on Caucasus region

crisis? The aim of this study is to engage the Caucasus with a historical attitude and the rule of

regional and trans-regional powers in Caucasus crisis and specially Chechnya. In the North Caucasus,

Chechnya declared independence from Russia in 1991 and this was the most important

developments, which later led to a long war with the central government. It seems that the wrong

policies of Moscow and local governments are the main cause of violence in Chechnya. However,

operating inland should be considered. Russians historically have always been against Muslims.

Russians lose a part of its territory with losing Chechnya, because if this first strong and

incompatible republic with the independence of Russia managed, turn immediately to reach the

other republics of the Caucasus and elsewhere in the region is symmetrical

Keywords: Chechnya, Caucasus, Russians, Caucasus crisis

1.Introduction

The Caucasus region is one of the oldest centers of human civilization. Caucasus land, the land of

diverse people, different geographical landscapes, in the northwest neighborhood of Iran, despite of

religious and cultural common interests was separated after the signing of the Treaty of Golestan






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 117

and Turkmenchay during the reign of Fath Ali Shah Qajar from Iran. (Amirahmadian, 1376) By

collapsing of Russian empire and invasion of small and big regional and international powers to fill

the vacuum resulting from the collapse in the first place Caucasus changed, but its adjacent areas,

including North West border areas of Iran, effected by the impact of these developments. Whether or

not the South Caucasus North Caucasus both were the center of different tensions and conflicts.

Chechens violent tensions with Russia and their independence-seeking, the quarrel between

Kabardinoes and Balkars, Karachays and Cherkessiya ... all shows the instability of area (Kazemzade,

1393). In new security studies has added many dimensions to the concept of security, and security

has become a "multidimensional” concept that has included economic and environmental topics till

money and military threats.( Vaezi, 1382) This problem has caused this research explores the

regional powers and their role in creating unrests and insecurities in the North Caucasus region,

particularly Chechen.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 118


Following the end of the Cold War, world geographical situation had changed, subsequently

developments in the Middle East was considered more important than the past., separatist efforts in

Georgia and Chechen, which also makes the region susceptible to new conflicts, Non-peaceful

changes and Beyond the law in some countries governance structures, and organized crime gangs

and trespassers bands Beside many other security problems, disrupted normal life in the region. And

the possibility of positive interaction among regional countries and economically productive

activities neighbors is minimized (Vaezi: 1382, p. 2). Some of the questions that is ahead of the

Caucasus region is that where is the root of insecurity? , what role Chechen-Russian’s conflict in zone

crisis play? In this study with historical view to Caucasus region, as well as the strategic importance

of the Caucasus region's security issues and the role of regional and Trans-regional powers in the

Caucasus conflict in Chechnya, were investigated.

Geographical situation and Caucasus's geo-strategically importance

Caucasus's Mountains are dividing Caucasus region into two distinct parts, North Caucasus and

South Caucasus. Nowadays, South Caucasus includes three independent countries of Azerbaijan,

Georgia and Armenia and the Republic of Karabakh, Nakhichevan, Ajaria, Abkhazia and South Ossetia

(in the heart of Georgia that still depends on Russia). And the North Caucasus includes three

province, two cites and eight autonomous republic of Russia that are still politically depended to

Russia.

Some of the factors that has made Caucasus important: Connection ring between the Europe and

Asia, relational bridge between north and south and east and west, junction or confluence of great

and ancient civilizations, neighboring Muslim world and the world of Christianity, one of the oil and

gas transit routes to Europe. (Vaezi, 1382, S5-3)

Perspectives of Russia and The roots of political behavior

Russian’s attention to the Caucasus has been long history and has been done for various reasons. One

of the most important cause of Russian’s colonial expansion in the Caucasus is the reign’s geo-

strategic importance and value. (Ozcan turgut, 2011: 13) Caucasians almost never looked to

Russians as a friend, and have shown this in numerous historical events such as World War I and II

to the Russians by not cooperating with them, Although in these wars , Russia imperialism in the

socialism and Czarist form has attracted a large number of Caucasians population by force and

persuasion and threats to itself, but after the collapse of the Soviet Union, Caucasian had shown






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 119

their hatred to the Russians and their puppet local governments, by asking political and economic

independence from Moscow, However, despite all the efforts of Russia, the Caucasus in general and

in particular the North Caucasus has always been prone to conflict and instability because the roots

of such conflicts very deep and intertwined, and as long as the demands of ethnic conflict are not

provided in an acceptable form, they can make Russia's interests violently beaten. (Jahantab: 1387,

p: 23)

The internal factors of instability in the Caucasus

Condition and situations that the South Caucasus and North Caucasus are faced implies to threats

and divergence that the region is facing are very diverse and numerous. Types of Security threats can

be searched in Ethnocentrism types of threats, border's disputes, extreme nationalism, separatism,

economic inequality and high inflation. (Jahantab: 1387)

The role of regional and trans-regional powers in the Caucasus crisis:

Regional impact by the independence of the Caucasus and Central Asia and disordering of previous

regularity causes the region's geopolitics irregularities. That changed somewhat as a result of

geopolitics. This set of factors and developments which have arisen since the coexistence of the

republics in the Soviet Union has been associated conditions in the region and has made region more

complex. The situation in the independence countries have faced these countries with some threats

that could destabilize. Internal situations of the Caucasus and foreign relations can alter the balance

of power between countries in the region. (Vaezi, 1382) Russia has always been a land power,

Russia's approach to the Caucasus and play an intermediary role between the Western powers and

some Eastern countries or north and south groups, as a European-Asian non-ideological power, as an

older brother ultimately, has made this country as a smart power. (Sheikh Attar, 1371)

Islam in Chechen and regional issues and roots of political behavior

Chechen Muslims' religious beliefs have two distinctive character: firstly, most of them are Hanafi

religious Muslim, and the other that Sufi's beliefs have a special place in their beliefs and have had a

significant impact in itself. According to official Soviet authorities, Chechen have started the religious

worries activities from mid-eighties. When coincides with the impact of Islamic Revolution in the

Muslim world and on the other hand shake the foundations of the Soviet Communist had been heard.

In the North Caucasus, Chechen’s independence declaring from Russia and its separatism in 1991,

was the important development which later led to the long war with the Russians central

government. In November 1992, a year after the Chechen’s independence, Russia has declared a

state of emergency in North Ossetia and Ingush, due to territorial conflicts and crisis, and






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 120

significantly strengthened its military presence in the region. The clashes were the first sign of ethnic

clashes after the collapse. (Jahantab, 1387, p: 28-31) Chechen -Ingush republic of the Soviet Union at

the beginning of 1991 divided into two separate republics, Chechen and Ingush and asking for

independency from Moscow, but after the crises that happened at the war in 1994 and the first half

of 1995, , Chechen could not achieve its independency from the Russian Federation. Chechens

battles with Russian central government for independency and separation, has begun again from

1999, but couldn’t get it again .According to the new Russian Constitution, Adopted in 1993

,autonomous provinces Adige and Kabarda- Balkar were upgraded to the level of Autonomous

Republic.(Jahantab)

Why Russia does not want to lose Chechnya and the surrounding republics? The reasons of Russia's

insistence on keeping Chechen even at the expense of ruining of cities, villages and a million

Chechens is ,Chechen‘s geographic strategic location, that the south side of it relies on the ridge of

North Caucasus Mountains and it keeps Russia from the threat situation .

(http://mahoseyni.blogfa.com/post-45.aspx)

3.Conclusion

Due to the nature of Caucasus region and its dependence on one of the regional powers , and with

the rise of Communists in the Russia, Caucasus region dominated the Soviet Union had continued ,

Until the 1991's by collapsing of mentioned union , southern parts of the Caucasus in format of

three countries , Azerbaijan, Armenia and Georgia gained their independence, Although the

mentioned three countries had got their independency , and are as a members of the members of

international community .but have not yet rid of historical ties to another power. Today Islamic

extremists is mentioned as the main difficulty in Chechen , which has extended in the entire region .

But the fact is that Islam isn't the only agent / features of Islamic extremism in the Caucasus It

seems the flawed policies of Moscow and local governments is the main cause of violence in Chechen.

However, inland features should be to be considered. Historically Russians have always been

against Muslims and if in certain periods Muslims have been treated smoothly, it was as a historical

inevitability.Russians by losing Chechen, will lose the part of their territory, also they are afraid that

it goes like the game of dominoes, because there is no guarantee that the others won’t follow the

Chechen’s success. In the meantime, we can mention republics of Dagestan, Tatarstan, Ingushetia,

North Ossetia, Adike , Karachay, Circassia , Kabardin, and Balkar, Kalmuk etc .hypothetical and

probable Alliance between Chechen and Dagestan can also exclude Russia from access to some

strategic opportunities and also considerable part of Caspian sea , and it effect negatively on

interests of Russia . Thus, considering this reasons, the Russians strongly attempt to suppress Pro-

independence movement in Chechnya and keeping collection the political geography of Russia.

Mutually, the Chechens attempt strongly to embrace their longtime political aspirations of






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 121

independence of the Slavic collection - North orthodoxy that does not feel their dissimilarity to it. So

there is a hard struggle between them.

References

1.Amirahmadian , Bahram , (1376) The geography of the Caucasus , print and publications of Foreign

Ministry , Tehran

2.Bayat, Kaveh, (1388) storm over the Caucasus (regional relations of the Republic of Azerbaijan,

Armenia and Georgia in the first period of independence 1921-1917), publications printing center of

the Foreign Ministry, Tehran

3.Sheikh Attar, Alireza (1371) The roots of political behavior in Central Asia and Caucasus, printing

and publication the Ministry of Foreign Affairs Institute, Tehran

4.Kazemzade Moses; kazemzade Akbar (1393) article Caucasus's regional and trans-regional power,

the cultural center of the Caucasus Research Journal, No. 18-17 fifth year

5.Jahantab, Mahdi, (1387) Islamic heritage of Iran in the North Caucasus, the International provided

to the World Assembly of Ahl al-Bayt (AS)

6.Vaezi, Mahmoud (1382) factors of instability in the Caucasus and security approaches, Journal of

Central Asia and the Caucasus journal studies, publications printing center of the Ministry of Foreign

Affairs, Tehran






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 122

7.Ozcan turgut,onur,2011Bagimsiz kuzeybkafkasya cumhuuiyeti (1918-1920)

www.kousamysmyazilim.com

8.http://mahoseyni.blogfa.com/post-45.aspx






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 123

The America's Role in the Georgia Crisis

Morteza Ebrahimi

Somayeh Abbasi

Hamzeh Ganji




Abstract

The Background of the emergence of the crisis in Georgia for a long time due to ethnic and

geographic and political conditions existed in Southern Caucasus. Since the independence of the

Republic of Georgia so far, the crisis caused by territorial disputes and two region of Abkhazia and

Vavstya several times get out of control and have led to war. The aim of this study was to draw a

pattern of America behavior in the current political developments in the Caucasus, especially in the

Georgia crisis. What Georgia really can play a role in the United States of America geopolitical

calculations that the West has been so highly regarded?

It seems that importance of geopolitical and geo of Georgia for America is that Georgia allows the

possibility of connecting pipelines of Azerbaijan to Turkey. As well as for America, existence of

political stability in Georgia and coordinate security is of utmost importance. Achievement of

Heartland region and marginal areas of the Russian defense shield in order to prevent the re

hegemony of this country's gate locations in the North Caucasus, prepare the ground for the

presence of West, in the north of Iran in order to harness and further isolation and so on are reasons

that seems Georgia's position on geopolitical calculations West, especially for the United States of

America is critical important.

Key words: the crisis in Georgia, America, the regional situation






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 124

1.Introduction

Perhaps it could be called the 2008 crisis in Georgia, one of the most important events after 2000.

The crisis that led to the limited war between Russia and Georgia resulted in swordplay two old

superpowers (Russia and the US) as well as new European players against each other (Soleymani,

1386, p. 18). During the velvet revolution in Georgia lot of discussion was raised about the amount

and how America's involvement in the transfer of power among analysts. Soviet collapse divided

Caucasus into two parts. Azerbaijan, Armenia and Georgia in the South Caucasus and remaining

territories as the North Caucasus were within the borders of Russia. North Caucasus is located in

remote and undeveloped area, but has a strategic importance (kazemzadeh, 1386, p. 30). The climax

the presence of America, in the field of political and security should be especially considered in

developments in Georgia after the tulip revolution in this country, especially in the August 2008

crisis. Result of these developments is proximity of Georgia to America that the strategic partnership

pact between the two countries is the symbol of proximity. During the Tulip Revolution, America

provided broad support from West-leaning Georgian leaders.

This support was enough that in the mind of Mikheil Saakashvili makes this believe that Georgia

enjoys for obvious security guarantees from America. Contrary to the impression of Saakashvili,

Washington in the crisis of Georgia and Russia in August 2008, did not provide certain operational

support from Tbilisi (www.eurasianet.org). Problem statement: In 1922, the three countries of

Azerbaijan, Georgia and Armenia formed "federation of socialist republics of the South Caucasus,"

and this regional union lasted until 1936. (Cis statistical committee year book1998)). In addition,

Georgia has the extensive participation of Nagorno-Karabakh peace talks that with mediation

between the two countries of Azerbaijan and Armenia restores peace and stability and security into

the Caucasus. (Vahedi, 1382, p. 247). Caucasus region is considered as a critical point and at the same

time one of important points of world due to geographic, political, and geopolitical, political,

historical, sociological and military matters. Republic of Georgia due to being located in the Caucasus

region has always paramount importance. Great powers tried to dominate these areas in order to

exploit from its resources. Conflict of interest of Russia and America, along with internal conflicts in

Georgia, faced the country with multiple crises. Whatever happened in August 2008 was resulting

from internal conflicts and also opposed the interests of America and Russia in this small Caucasus

country. The crisis had many causes including the most important of them was the America's role in

provoking Russia, and finally, Russia's entry under the pretext of supporting of Ossetian into the

arena of conflict. America that had put its preferred government with Rose Revolution in Georgia,

with its support of Georgia in August 2008 has played the most important role in the crisis. The aim

of this study was not to investigate the incident of August 2008, in this research attempts to

investigate the most important actions of America that provoke Russia and the underlying crisis on






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 125

2008 in Georgia. A summary of the geography of the Republic of Georgia: Georgia is mostly

mountainous. More than 80 percent of the country's territory is covered by mountains, foothills.

Georgia is divided into different areas based on the characteristics of Ups and downs of their land; in

the north, the mountains of the Great Caucasus have been drawn as a huge wall. In the south-high

volcanic plateau are located along the longitude, strings of volcanic extinguishers and cavities

accumulated of lava of Javakheti highlands. Also in Georgia, there are rivers, lakes, glaciers and

mineral fountains (Amir Ahmadian, 1376, p.78-79). Georgia, is one of the fragile states in the region,

whose economy has been devastated by civil unrest, the hidden economy forms 85 percent of the

country's economy. 60% of the population live below the poverty line, this entry illustrates the fact

that the South Caucasus is highly dependent on the support of foreign forces and because of that the

United States has sent flood of aid to the region (IRAS, 1389).

The importance of the South Caucasus in regional politics America: South Caucasus is important for

several reasons for America's national security interests, of which it can be pointed to energy

security, access to Central Asia, the fight against terrorism. In terms of geopolitics of the region's

proximity to Russia, Iran and the Middle East are at the forefront of importance (Cornell, 2005).

America early action in this area was moderate and cautious. America's positions on regional issues

were limited to protecting democratic values, with fear of the Islamization of the Muslim republics of

the region and nuclear weapons but gradually the interests of this country became more in the

region (Baba 1374: 129). It seems two major concerns of America after the collapse of the Soviet

Union was to prevent the spread of fundamentalism and Islamic extremism. To do this, the Clinton

administration decided to strengthen relations between countries in the region with its regional

allies, particularly Turkey and Israel.

The US approach to the Caucasus: after the independence of the Caucasus, oil companies, who were

the first US group that entered the region and the presence of rich oil and gas resources, attention of

the US government get more to countries in the region and it was the first time that the United States

had the opportunity to direct intervention in this area. Some of the factors that according to US

government give importance to the region include:

1. Due to the increased requirements of future energy, existence of resources of oil and gas has

increased the importance of this area

2. The oil producing countries in the region have no way to open sea and this is an obstacle in the

way of delivering oil and gas to other parts of the world that have complicated the political situation

in the region.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 126

3. Competition of regional and trans-regional power for participating in and influencing on region,

including countries: Russia, Iran, Turkey, Israel and some European Union countries.

4. Geopolitical importance of the region, particularly after the September 11 attacks and the US

invasion of Afghanistan and Iraq, the region in terms of military and security has become a special

place in US politics.

According to material presented, goals and instruments of the US in the Caucasus can be categorized

as follows:

A) access to oil and gas and controls of extraction and export; b) access to regional markets and

expand business in it; c) Maintain the status quo and strengthen the institutions of the region

countries towards long-term goals; d) to counter the influence of Russia; f) counter Iranian influence;

n) support the expansion of Turkish influence n) strengthening security ties with regional countries;

e) long-term presence in the region; y) the exploitation of political institutions, economic and

strategic western security to achieve strategic goals; US grand objective is widespread influence and

the reliable and long-term presence of in the Caucasus (Kazemzadeh, 1386, p. 42).

United States of America approach to the the Georgia: Central Asia and the Caucasus as part of the

Eurasia was political and Geopolitics territory of Soviet in the Cold War era. The area constituted

southern part of the territory of the Heartland in Theory of Makender, it is possible that it is the

dimension of balance of power and power system in the world. With the collapse of the bipolar

system of the said areas, by means of independent states they found independent geographical-

political identity. And with form of space that experiencing power vacuum, emerged an arena of

multi-level competition. Contraction of Soviet space and its adaptation on Russia's borders and the

advent of open spaces with the power vacuum provided opportunities for expansion space power

rival America (Basiri and Yazidi, 1383: 101).

In the second term of President Clinton, America's goals and policies in these areas was somewhat

transparent and increased importance of this area with American politicians, the presence especially

in Georgia despite the absence of fossil energy resources, so that significant if not, cannot be

overlooked. Financial and military aid, train and equip military forces by the US and Israeli advisers,

accept this country as a member of NATO's Partnership for Peace and assistance promised to accept

in NATO, the country's selection as the main route for Central Asian oil and gas regions - the Caspian

and Caucasus (although other routes, such as Iran and Russia that sometimes is safer and cheaper as

well) are some of aids. This attention especially after the Rose Revolution and the establishment of

the pro-Western Mikhail Saakashvili has been more, so that Rumsfeld was the America's first high-

ranking official who arrived in Tbilisi after the resignation of Shevardnadze and the opposition






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 127

victory and expressed strong support for America in the political, economic and military dimensions

stated that Georgia enjoys a strategic position in the foreign policy of America (Asgari, 1384: 87).

Conclusion

Based on what Brzezinski have wrote in his book, we can say that the purpose of America's presence

in Georgia is not only energy transfer, or the fight against terrorism, but the important point is that

the Republic of Georgia in the geopolitical arena, has a unique position. Republic of Georgia due to a

key position in the Caucasus is the center of gravity in the relationship between the East and South

West. Achievement to Heartland region and marginal areas, defend shield of Russia to prevent its re

hegemony of this country in the region, controlling interests of containing hydrocarbon and oil and

gas pipelines, a buffer between Russia and South areas, particularly Armenia and Iran, the gateway

and the expansion of NATO toward the East, the establishment of the North Caucasus entry gates,

prepare the ground for the West's presence in North Front of Iran to contain and further isolation,

prepare the ground for linking allies such as Turkey and Israel with the aforementioned area,

prepare the ground for the exit of Azerbaijan from geographical isolation, untapped regional

potential market, and most importantly, prevent the creation of strategic alliances with

combinations such as Russia, China, India or Russia, China, Pakistan, India and Iran all are reasons

seems to have made vital the place of Georgia in the geopolitical calculations of West, especially the

United States.

References

1.Amirahmdyan, Bahram. (1376), The geography of the Caucasus, printing of publications Ministry of

Foreign Affairs IRAS (1389 December) economic growth of Azerbaijan, www.iras.ir

2.Noor Ahmad Baba (1373) inherited constraints and the prospects for stability in Central Asia,

translated by Qasem Maleki, Studies Quarterly of Central Asia and Caucasus

3.Basiri, Mohammad Ali; Izadi Zaman Abadi, Mojgan (1383) America's foreign policy objectives in

Central Asia, Caucasus and Central Asian Studies Quarterly Tehran (45)

4.Kazem Zadeh, Hamed (1386). Islamic heritage of Iran in the North Caucasus, presented to the

World Assembly of Ahl al-Bayt, reported field studies symbols of the Islamic Iranian culture and

civilization in the North Caucasus

5.Asgari,Hassan (1384).The role of external actors in the color revolutions: the revolution in Georgia

Tehran: Quarterly Central Asia and the Caucasus (51)

6.Alizadeh,Ali (1380) security look at the issues in the Caspian Sea basin and Central Asian Studies

Quarterly of the Caucasus (35)

http://www.iras.ir/






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 128

7.Vahedi, Elias (1382) Azerbaijan strategic assessment, monitoring and implementation, and

Research Studies Institute of Contemporary Abrar International Tehran






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 129

Qarabag, Reasons of the Formation and Prolongation of the Crisis

Morteza Ebrahimi

Naser Rahmani

Parisa Asgari




Abstract

We are living in a time period with complex global developments. New intellectual phenomena is

surrounded us and we are faced with different challenges in many fields due to these phenomena

and developments. One of these phenomena's is Qarabag problem. The Caucasus region is one of the

most sensitive and crisis-prone regions in the world, which after the collapse of the Soviet Union,

several bloody conflicts and tensions has been seen in this region. Qarabag conflict is one of the

deepest crisis since the collapse of the Soviet republics and Declaration of Independence of its

republics. As a result of the increasing tensions thousands of people killed, injured and displaced

from their homes and were wandering. The crisis of the beginning of the competition between the

major powers is a competitive carrier. The two countries, Armenia and Azerbaijan are faced with

multiple issues to peace and stability. Thus, security and sustainable development of them depends

on the solving crisis like this. The main purpose of this paper is analyzing the reasons of the

formation and prolongation of the Qarabag crisis. In other words, the current work tries to

identifying the events and conflicts occurred between Armenia and Azerbaijan since the 80s in

Qarabag region and the effect of this problem on their other relationships.

Keywords: Qarabag, Caucasus, Armenia, Azerbaijan.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 130

1.Introduction

The historical territory of Qarabag had been one of the primary and very old housing places for

humans. The "ICE" cave, which is human biological marker in the past is situated in this region

(Mollazadeh, H). Qarabag region of Azerbaijan in the south Caucasus Mountains small in the West

Azerbaijan formed from two part plain and mountain. the plain section of karabag is called" Sofla" or

historical karabag. The mountains section of karabag is called "Olya" or mountains karabag. The

region mountainous Qarabag is that disputed now, from the first century AD, part of the historical

province "Artsakh" had been Alban lands of the Caucasus. The people of this region until the fourth

century AD were idolatrous. . With the accept of Christianity by "Avranyr" In the fourth century

paganism worship is closed. With the accept of Christianity by "Avranyr" In the fourth century

paganism worship is closed. But Christianity in this region, unlike surrounding areas Such as

Armenia and Georgia not developed. Groups of people continued to paganism along with

Christianity, SHUH AS (sun, sky, and moon).and part of the People Religion Mazdean Iran (http:

www. Ses-az.com). with the arrival of Islam in the eight century to the Nagorno-Qarabag region, the

Soviet Union was a lot of ethnic diversity, religious. In such a way that the number of this different

tribes to fifty looks. This ethnic disputes is one of the main reasons of the occurrence of conflicts and

crises in the Caucasus following the collapse of the Soviet Union were. Therefore, this article is a brief

description of the current position of the first garbage to the causes of the formation of the long crisis

in the region. And in the end also proposed to end the Ngoro no- Qarabag region in crisis find. The

name of the Qarabag in the historical resources starts of the century-12 Ad. The section "Sofla" is

located in the north.

Discussion and reviews

1-History of Qarabag

Qarabag which is an ancient land area, divided into two major parts, mountains and plains. The

center of this city is called “Ganga”. The mountainous part of the Qarabag is known as “the

autonomous mountain Qarabag province (Bakıxanov, A.2004). In other words, Qarabag is a historical

province in the Azerbaijan. This province starts from small Caucasus and surrounds the territorial

between two "Ores" and "Cur" rivers. This two areas, plain and mountains, always have been

together throughout history and have a close relationship together (Behrad, A, 1993).






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 131

2- The geographic position of Qarabag

Autonomous Qarabag province is located in the southeastern mountains of the Caucasus with an

area approximately equal to 4388 square meters. This region is called “Nagorno-Qarabag” in the

Russian language which means mountains Qarabag. The Armenians use “Artsakh” phrase for this

region. The Qarabag’s forest is very rich in possessing wood, raw materials, turnkey parquet,

musical instruments, and etc. Also, Qarabag has perspective landscapes (Arend, L, 1980).

In general, it can be noted, contrary to public opinion, the status of the Qarabag does not have the

features of a strategic area. Because if it has global and regional importance, had returned to a stable

situation after this problem. For example, the state Kuwait can be mentioned. Iraq at the beginning of

the 1990s attempted to occupation of Kuwait. The response of the international community to meet

the Kuwait, was quite different from the Qarabag’s problem. While both were the same in terms of

nature, i.e. both cases have occurred in Muslim lands.

3- The causes and origins crisis of Qarabag

Qarabag conflict:

Christianity were accepted in the fourth century ad in Qarabag by "Ornayer". In the same time, this

area was taken by the Muslims (http://news.ft.com, Oct. 23, 2003). Azeri people are the majority of

this region’s population and when one of the Armenian took power, they didn’t revolt (Vahedi, E.

2003). In 1985 the Armenian requested Mikhail Gorbachev to annex the Qarabag to Armenia. In gune

1985 the supereme council of Armenia, announced the incorporation of Qarabag in to the Armenian

lands. On behalf of the people of the Azerbaijan were overturned. Since 1988 conflict began again

between the two groups (Vahedi, E). Conflict of Qarabag can be considered as one of the first and

longest ethnic war in the Soviet Union. There are inner and outer factors in Qarabag conflict. The

internal factor is among Azerbaijan and Armenia about the autonomous region of Qarabag. The

conflict, which would be in the nature of this autonomous region (Foreman, D). The Armenian

situation in the nagorno Qarabag autonomous region similar to situation of the Germans in Poland,

the situation of Muslims in Kashmir, Somalia in Ethiopia, and Serbs in Croatia and Bosnia (Abrar

newspaper).

The most important external factor can be pointed as the following (Vaezi, M. 2007).

http://news.ft.com,oct23,2003/






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 132

1-The new generation

now a young generation stepped in to the growing arena in Azerbaijan and Armenia that of course is

not the memory of the Soviet Union and did not lived theirs patterns. The ideological conflicts that

today's youth and there is the old generation, on the factor is crisis continue in the Nagorno-Qarabag.

2- The existence of dignity and the taboo of having for both countries

Each of the parties to the conflict, consider the Qarabag’s conflict as a reputational problem for

themselves. Because in each country, national identity and restoring it is tied with this issue. One of

the advertising slogans used by both side to seize the candidate of Nagorno-Qarabag in the rule it

again.

3- The competition of influential powers

Geographical location of the Caucasus during recent century, power absorption center always has

been opposed to the political. Each of this forces look at the area from different views. With

increasing the involvement powers, this conflict took quite a political respective.

Levon Ter-Petrossian, "Armenia's former president" believes that, "disagreements between Russia

and Organization for Security and Cooperation in Europe (CSCE), is the main obstacle to ending the

crisis is long-term (roundtable, 2003).

4- Ethnic crisis

Ethnic refers to a group of people who throughout history in certain lands have established relation

together such economic, cultural, and kinship. Believed to be ethnic nationalism as a stress factor

element to be known in the international system (Mollazadeh, H.). In other words, ethnic and

religious diversity is also one of the causes of the crisis in Nagorno-Qarabag.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 133

Conclusion

Nagorno-Qarabag conflict has become a Gordian knot and Azeris and nor Armenians can not stop it.

Thay don’t abandon this problem easily which became a reputational problem. Of course it was out

of shape and has spread to the disturbed international system. The regional players and Trans-

regional have been enter the game. Russia from one hand and on the other hand, the US and its allies

were a serious deterioration in the situation. Armenian were predicting that the Qarabag issue will

be resolved in 2009 or 2010. Armen Ashotyan (MP Armenia) on 11 October 2006 stated that the

Qarabag problem in 2006, is not solved. According to his statement the "opening" of this window

depends on who is in power in Armenia (quoting Aras news). The proposed solution to this crisis,

needs the cooperation of all actors in this conflict.

The severity of the crisis will be reduced, if actors reach their desired condition. Because in this

situation, understanding and interaction are the only fruitful options. In this way, firstly Azerbaijan

in its legal form should give the highest level autonomy to Armenians, Secondly, Armenia and the

international community to recognize the territorial integrity of Azerbaijan. And thirdly, through the

competent international authorities the security of the Qarabag’s Armenians should to be ensured

(Javanshir gharabaghi, M. 2003).

References

1.Abrar newspaper, No. 1673, dated 16/8/1994 (Persian).

2.Arend Lijphart, “Democracy in Plural Societies”, (New Haven and London 1980), pp. 51-203, and

E.A. Nordlinger, “Conflict Regulation in Divided Socities”, (Cambridge, 1977), pp. 21 FF.

3.Bakıxanov, A. Golestan Eram: Shirvan and Dagestan history since the beginning until ending of the

Russo-Iranian wars. Tehran, 2004, ISBN: 9643114325, 197 pages (Persian)

4.Behrad, A. Garabag in historical perspective, 1993 spring (Persian)

5.Ethnicity and threats external", roundtable, center for strategic research, March 2003.

6.Foreman, D. Garabag conflict transformation, Former, P.313

7.Http: www. Ses-az.com

8.http://news.ft.com, Oct. 23, 2003.

9.Javanshir gharabaghi, M. Garabag history, Press centre of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs,

2003(Persian).

10.Mollazadeh, H. Republic of Azerbaijan the look to the future, pp. 50-56. (In Persian)

11.Online news site Regnum Russia, quoting Aras, Wednesday, 11/10/2006

12.Vaezi, M. Geopolitical crisis in Central Asia and the Caucasus, Institute for Political and

International Studies, print 2007(Persian).






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 134

13.Vahedi, E. same source, p.210 (Persian)

14.Vahedi, E. Strategic assessment of Azerbaijan, Publications and Research Studies Institute of

Contemporary Abrar International Tehran, print 2003.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 135

Determine and Evaluate the Aerobic and Anaerobic Threshold Heart Rate of Maximum Heart Rate Threshold

in Sedentary Female

Negar Asghari Moghaddam Marefat Siahkouhian

Nasrin Azizian

Faculty of Physical Education and Sport Sciences, Mohaghegh Ardabili university,Ardabil

Professor of Sport Physiology, Mohaghegh Ardabili university, Ardabil

Department of Physical Education and Sport Sciences, Mohaghegh Ardabili university, Ardabil

Abstract

The aim of this study was to answer this question Vastanh aerobic, anaerobic threshold heart rate in

the percentage of maximum heart rate in girls is disabled? For this purpose, 16 disabled students

with an average age of 19/46 ±1/12 years, weight 57/73 ± 7/87 kg, height 161/9 ± 6/08 cm And

body mass index 22/93 ± 3/02 kg per square meter, with no history of heart disease, pulmonary, on

a voluntary basis, were selected. When you increase the work load of low intensity to high blood

lactate levels almost 2 mmol / l increases as well as the VE / VO2 increases disproportionately as the

aerobic threshold is defined. As well as during incremental exercise a certain intensity, blood lactate

concentration increases for non-linear, or intensity of activity which blood lactate concentration4

mmol / l is defined as anaerobic threshold. The aerobic threshold and anaerobic threshold in this

study, the first and second point has to do with heart rate curve breaks.Changes in participants' heart

rate during exercise protocol implementations, using telemetry minute was recorded. To avoid any

error when the minute heart rate telemetry was used, two-hour special on the subject, one of which

was closed and the other was given to researchers. When the subject is the point of exhaustion, the

heart rate was at maximum value that was recorded as maximum heart rate. Results showed that the

mean maximal heart rate subjects 189/46 aerobic threshold heart rate of 135/66 was, So the aerobic

threshold heart rate at 71/60% maximum heart rate is disabled students And given that the average

maximum heart rate for subjects 189/46 anaerobic threshold heart rate of 189/46, so anaerobic

threshold heart rate at 100% maximum heart rate is disabled students. The share of aerobic system

for energy increases, the person's heart rate less to operate. When we increase the exercise intensity,

heart rate increases and the share is reduced aerobic machines and other energy supplier to assume






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 136

the duty of energy supply,especially glycolytic devices that use the anaerobic glycolysis to produce

of the energy.

Keywords: Aerobic threshold heart rate, Anaerobic threshold heart rate, Maximum heart rate

1.Introduction

Exercise any purpose that requires attention to three principles: intensity, duration and frequency

of exercise. Sports activities such as those found in some texts referred. In case of application of the

severity and duration of work, biological adaptations in the form of increased maximal oxygen

consumption (VO2max), anaerobic threshold is manifested. Generally, for exercise activities are

closely related and hence the combination of the two to achieve the desired biological adaptations,

is one of the following methods: 1. Moderate-intensity activity (60 -30 minutes) and high intensity

(anaerobic threshold slightly below, approximately 85-75% of maximum heart rate) 2. Activities of

moderate intensity (10 -4 min) and high intensity (anaerobic threshold slightly above,

approximately 95% to 75% of maximum heart rate) 3. Short-term activities (30 seconds to 3

minutes) and severe (in the VO2max, almost 100% of maximum heart rate) In an increasingly

physical activity, blood lactate increased workload Azshdt the bottom up, when amounts of 2 mmol

/ l increases, the amount of carbon dioxide as well as the pulmonary ventilation (VE / VO2)

increased disproportionately, as anaerobic threshold or lactate first break point (LTP1) defined [2].

In continuation of intensive training with the blood lactate almost 4 mmol / l increase, as well as

VE /VO2 rise further decreases known as anaerobic threshold or LTP2 called [8].The phenomenon

of lactate break point (LTP2), beginning accumulation of blood lactate (OBLA) and anaerobic

threshold as synonymous terms can be used interchangeably. Anaerobic threshold during the run,

also defined as MLSS ]4[, can be used as a tool used to predict the performance in endurance

athletes [5]. Based on the intensity of the activity areas can be established in a maximal exercise

blood lactate accumulation [9]. In this regard, the lactate threshold intensity less than the first

phase, the first and second lactate threshold intensity, phase two and higher than the second

threshold, lactate, classified phase III [11].In the first phase, blood lactate remains close to the

surface rest,But then with increased activity, increased lactate production and harvest is balanced

in phase two and phase three more in production will lead to withdrawal. Between phase one and

two, the lactate threshold is the equivalent of 40 to 60% of maximum oxygen consumption. And

between phases two and three, the second lactate threshold is the equivalent of 60 to 90% of

maximum oxygen consumption, is located.The anaerobic threshold between 60 to 80% of

maximum heart rate and anaerobic threshold between maximum heart rate is 80 to 90% [1].

Anaerobic threshold as the intensity of the work or the amount of oxygen consumption (VO2) is set

to start metabolic acidosis and respiratory gas exchange is associated with changes in [10].

Anaerobic threshold for detailed planning exercise intensity, always one of the important topics of






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 137

interest to researchers and scientists have been sports. Various methods are used to estimate the

anaerobic threshold generally is non-invasive and invasive procedures, but the consensus on this

matter which of these methods is better there. The most accurate method to determine the

anaerobic threshold, invasive procedures that require multiple blood samples during the

incremental test standards and determine the amount of lactate in the blood. On the other hand,

non-invasive methods for estimating anaerobic threshold that these methods are based on the

relationship between heart rate heartbeat-time work and determining break point (HRDP)

is[4,10].When a certain work activity or workload gradually increases, the increase in heart rate

associated with the work load during the recorded activity and heart rate curve - time work, is

drawn. The curve associated with an increased work load, heart rate also increases linearly must, in

the exercise intensity, with increasing work load, heart rate did not increase with the previous

harsh and deviate from a straight line is known as the point of failure, heart rate ( HRDP) is

called[6]. Anaerobic threshold intensity exercise that takes place is different from the athlete to

athlete. For example, non-prepared athletes and non-athletes anaerobic threshold, maximal oxygen

consumption between 55 to 65 percent or 70 to 77 percent of maximum heart rate, While

endurance athletes and athletic, anaerobic threshold may be more than 80% of maximal oxygen

uptake or to reach more than 88 percent of maximum heart rate. A study was conducted to

investigate how to control physiological observation that with increasing distance endurance

athletes practice with a smaller percentage of maximum heart rate work ,To the final haul to end its

practice [7]. So given that little information about the percentage of maximum heart rate for

aerobic and anaerobic threshold heart rate, especially in young people there, this study was

conducted to answer this question.

2.Method

The research method, quasi-experimental designs within the team it has been a repeated test. For

this purpose, 16 disabled students with no history of heart disease, pulmonary, on a voluntary basis,

were selected.The aerobic threshold and anaerobic threshold in this study, the first and second point

has to do with heart rate curve breaks. Changes in participants' heart rate during exercise protocol

implementations, using telemetry polar minute was recorded. To avoid any error when the minute

heart rate telemetry was used, two-hour special on the subject, one of which was closed and the

other was given to researchers. When the patient reaches the stage of exhaustion, the heart rate was

at maximum value that was recorded as maximum heart rate.

In this study, subjects during the last six months at least not any regular exercise. All subjects in

terms of public health and health status, health records and diseases, drug materials and energy, the

diet and level of physical sleep and motility were evaluated and homogeneity. As the age and sex also

plays a role in the identification of aerobic and anaerobic threshold and time to exhaustion, so for age






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 138

and sex were homogeneously. In addition, according to the study objectives and the impact of

physical inactivity and food on the variable, all subjects were asked to 48 hours before performing

any heavy physical exercise or 1-2 hours before eating fatty food and heavy refrain. Aerobic

threshold determined by the subjects Narita (74/8+(0/76×resting heart rate )_0/27× age+ 7/3×1)

was determined. Then for each subject were scheduled day and hour deadline for the

implementation of the first subjects in the study protocol, participated in the laboratory. In the

second phase the participants after the warm-up, Aerobic threshold for the calculation of heart rate

intensity running protocol, performed. Then, for each subject, date and time of the next steps in the

research laboratory to perform at least 72 hours from the scheduled time. In the third stage the

subjects after the warm-up, depending on individual protocols carried out to determine the

anaerobic threshold. To determine the anaerobic threshold increasingly dependent on individual

subjects, the protocol was used. After closing the Polar subjects, for 5 to 10 minutes to warm up to 70

percent of maximum heart rate activity until they reached their MHR. uivalent to 70 percent of MHR

test speed for 1 minute. Then with the passing of each minute, two kilometers an hour on the

treadmill speed increased. This practice continued to exhaustion .Heart rate Deflection point (HRDP)

in the protocol depends on the individual anaerobic threshold were considered as an indicator

estimate. HRDP using the short maximum distance (SDmax) was determined. The protocol depends

on the rate of subjects from the beginning to 70 percent of maximum heart rate by the end of

protocol collected using a computer program, curve polynomial function (Polynamial) set of points

(heartbeat-time) drawing and then baseline and end of the curve using a straight line connected to

each other. Most are the heartbeat of straight lines to curves. Heart rate as a point of failure

(anaerobic threshold) was determined using the slope of the parallel line[3]. Then at the last minute

maximum heart rate program also records the time spent in the laboratory protocol for the next step

was to research the subject. Finally, the participants after jogging warm-up protocol for the

calculation of the anaerobic threshold intensity were performed at the time exhaustion. Heart rate

and time to the minute treadmill speed was recorded at all stages. All measurements were

performed in laboratory conditions in terms of temperature and humidity. During the execution of

this study was to motivate more participants, was hosted them and in the end the gifts were donated

to them. In this study, descriptive statistics in categories of data mean, standard deviation, minimum

and maximum amount Variables charts to determine the anaerobic threshold SDMAX software was

used. Statistical analysis was performed using SPSS version 16.


The results of the students inactive with a mean age of19/46 ± 1/12 years,weight57/73± 7/87 kg,

height161/9 ± 6/08 cm and body mass index22/39 ±3/02 kg per square meter , showed that the

average maximum heart rate for subjects 189/46 Aerobic threshold heart rate of 135/66 was, So






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 139

Aerobic threshold heart rate at 71/60% maximum heart rate is disabled students and Considering

that the average maximum heart rate for subjects 189/46anaerobic threshold heart rate of 175, so

the anaerobic threshold heart rate at 92/36% maximum heart rate is disabled students. The share of

aerobic system for energy increases, the person's heart rate less to operate. When we increase the

exercise intensity, heart rate increases and the share is reduced aerobic machines and other energy

supplier to assume the duty of energy supply, Glycolytic system that uses anaerobic glycolysis for

energy production deals. or anaerobic energy production from glycogen produced in the body that

causes the fatigue in the body and prevents the person from activities ,The most important of which

is to lactate, which causes fatigue and exhaustion Of course, this is not your lactate person, but

acidosis due to the accumulation of lactate in the blood and skeletal muscles that cause it to be.

These acids cause the blood to create disturbances in muscle contraction and is, thus, a substance

that is secreted at the end of neural synapses (Asytl choline), affects. And as the material plays an

important role in his contracting operation has been disrupted, contraction is quite good. Other

factors glycogen depletion and exhaustion include muscle, reducing energy phosphate (ATP), the

increase in hydrogen ions, ADP and Pi increase in the skeletal muscles and other factors reducing

training volume by increasing the amount of exercise.

References

1.Binder ,R., Wonisch, M.,Corra, U.,Cohen-Solal, A. 2008. Methodological approach to the first and

second lactate threshold in incremental cardiopulmonary exercise testing. European Journal of

Cardiovascular Prevention and Rehabilitation, 15: 726-734.

2.Bodner, M., Rhodes, E., Langill, R.1999.Heart rate threshold:Relationship to steady state cycling at

ventilatory threshold in trained cyclists.Jounal of Medicine& Science in Sports,31:p313.

3.Bodner M, Rhodes E, Langill R, et al. 2000. Heart rate threshold: relationship to steady state cycling

at ventilatory threshold in trained cyclists [abstract]. Med. Sci. Sports. Exerc. 3,1: 1561.

4.Chmura,J.,Nazar, K. 2010. Parallel changes in the onset of blood lactate accumulation (OBLA) and

threshold of psychomotor performance deterioration during incremental exercise after trainin in

athletes. International Journal of Psychology &Physiology,75: 287–290.

5. Coen, B., Urhausen, A., Kindermann, W. 2001. Individual anaerobic threshold:

Methological aspects of its assessment in running. International Journal of Sports Medicine, 20: 8-

6. Conconi F, Ferrarti G, et al. 1982. Determination of the anaerobic threshold by a noninvasive field

test in runner. J. Appl. Physiol. 52, 4: 869-873.

7.Esteve-Lanao, J., Lucia A., deKoning, J., Foster, C.2008. How do humans control physiological strain

during strenuous endurance exercise.Journal of Medicine and Science in Sports,20: 29- 43.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 140

8 .Ghosh,AK.2004.Anaerobic threshold:Its concept and role in endurance sport. Malays Journal of

Medicine Science,11:24-36.

9. Kindermann,W., Simon, G., Keul,J. 1979. The significance of the aerobic–anaerobic transition for

the determination of work load intensities during endurance training. European Journal of Exercise

Sport, 51:234-248.

10. Rogers D, Turley K, et al. 1995. Allometric scaling factors for oxygen uptake during exercise in

children. Ped. Ex. Sci. 7: 12-25.

11. Seiler, S.,Tonnessen, E. 2009. Intervals thresholds and long slow distance: The role of intensity

and duration in endurance training.International Journal of Sports Physiological Performance, 15:

27-34.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 141

The Effect of Noticing and Input Enhancement in Reading on Speaking Skill by Intermediate Learners

Reza Abdi Golnaz Tarbali

Department of ELT, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran, Department of ELT, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran.

Abstract This study was to determine the effect of noticing and input enhancement in reading on speaking skill. The participants of this study were 30 learners attending a language learning institute in Ardebil in the form of two groups. Two of the groups were at the intermediate level based on the proficiency test. The two groups at the institute were assigned to one experimental group (enhanced input) and one control group (unenhanced input). First we used the pre-test of speaking, then we had ten reading passages for each session. During the classroom, we had some in-class instructional activities and finally a post-test of speaking was given to the learners and for the assessment of learners' oral production, we used TOEFL speaking rubric. The analysis and comparison between pre-test and post-test through paired sample t-test showed that noticing and input enhancement had helped learners in the experimental group on intermediate level to learn more vocabulary items and improve their oral production.

Keywords: Noticing, Enhanced input, Unenhanced input, Experimental group, Control group






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 142

1.Introduction

Speaking is being capable of speech, expressing or exchanging thoughts through using language. “Speaking is a productive aural/oral skill and it consists of producing systematic verbal utterances to convey meaning (Nunan, 2003).” Harmer (2001) notes down that from the communicative point of view, speaking has many different aspects including two major categories – accuracy, involving the correct use of vocabulary, grammar and pronunciation practiced through controlled and guided activities; and fluency considered to be ‘the ability to keep going when speaking spontaneously’. Among the elements necessary for spoken production, are the following (Harmer, 2001):

1.Connected Speech: effective learners of English need to be able not only to produce the individual phonemes of English (as in saying I would have gone) but also to use fluent ‘connected speech’ as in (I’d ‘ve gone). In connected speech sounds are modified, omitted, added or weakened.

2. Expressive Devices: native speakers of English change the pitch and stress of particular parts of utterances, vary volume and speed, and show by other physical and non-verbal means how they are feeling.

3. Lexis: spontaneous speech is marked by the use of number of common lexical phrases, especially in the performance of certain language functions.

4. Negotiation and language: effective speaking benefits from the negotiator language we use to seek clarification and to show the structure of what we are saying.

This study highlights vocabulary knowledge among these elements. Reading will enable learners to develop their vocabulary knowledge which will effectively contribute to their speaking skills.

Reading is one of the most effective ways of foreign language learning. Reading simply is the interpretation of a written message. Walter R. Hill (1979) briefly defines reading as what the reader does to get the meaning he needs from contextual resources. Reading will add to learners’ conversational performance. Reading will help learners to decipher new words that they need for conversations.

There is increasing high relationship between reading and speaking skill. People who develop larger vocabulary capacity through reading tend to develop larger speaking vocabulary capacity. Indeed, reading power relies on continuous improvement in vocabulary knowledge that provides communication. Therefore fostering improvement in word knowledge through wide reading has the potential for fostering improvement in speaking skills. Reading can play a big part in successful language learning. It can develop speaking skills. It needs to be noted that speaking holds a very significant place in foreign language learning because through speech messages are conveyed.

Noticing and input enhancement are necessary for changing input to intake and refers to conscious attention to the occurrence of input and its storage in the long term memory(Schmidt, 1995). So in






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 143

order for learning to take place, learners must attend to and notice certain language features which are crucial to the target system. Noticing involves conscious registration of an event; understanding entails recognition of general principle, rule or pattern. According to Schmidt, it is awareness at the level of noticing that is crucial for language learning. Conscious attention to the linguistic input facilitates the restructuring of the learners' interlanguage system (Schmidt, 1995). Intake is that part of the input that the learner notices (Schmidt, 1990).

Significantly, Homer combs (2005) claims that the greater saliency a particular form has in the input to which the learner is exposed, the greater chances are for it to be selected by the L2 learner. Although in the pedagogical arena of second language learning (L2) much of the input enhancement and noticing research (Sharwood smith, 1993) has focused on different parts of grammar such as conditional sentences and past simple sentences, or how noticing can influence intonation pattern, the impact of this pedagogical technique addressed how noticing and input enhancement through reading help learners improve their oral production and vocabulary learning in the second language learning environment.

2. Method

The participants of this study were 30 English learners in the form of two classes. Two of the classes were at the intermediate level. After the proficiency test these two classes assigned to one experimental group (enhanced input) and one control group ( unenhanced input).The classes met three times a week and instruction on reading passage in any of the two classes was took place in last 30 minutes of each session. This study lasted for about two months with ten sessions; therefore, ten reading passages were given to the leaners. For experimental group the reading passages with highlighted vocabulary items were given to the learners but for the control group the reading passages without highlighted vocabulary items were given to the learners. In the treatment part, the highlighted vocabulary items were taught explicitly by the teacher for learners in experimental group. We had some in-class instructional activities such as synonym and antonym for each vocabulary item and also we had discussion about the topic of each reading passage by the teacher and learners to engage the learners and promote their attention to notice those vocabulary items. After ten session, the post-test of speaking was given to the learners and leraners'oral production was recorded and assessed through speaking rubric. Finally the analysis of data was done through the paired sample t-test.

3. Results

The first research question sought to investigate the efficiency of noticing and input enhancement in reading on developing learners' oral production. To answer this question, a paired-sample t-test was






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 144

run to compare the mean scores on the pre-test and post-test of speaking to measure the effect of noticing and input enhancement in reading on speaking. As displayed in Table 1, the mean score for the control group was 7.97 and for the experimental group was 8.70.

Table 1

The Results of Paired Samples Statistics for Speaking Pre-test and Post-test

Statistically speaking, the first research question was rejected, indicating that noticing and input

enhancement had significant effect on developing students' oral production. We could also say that

there was a significant difference between control and experimental group according to the means of

the both groups.

Moreover, as table 2 showed, the significant of differences between two group was 0, so we could say

that there was a significant differences between the control group and experimental group and also

we could say that noticing and input enhancement had a significant effect on oral production of

students and through the improvement of students' oral production we could answer to the second

research question that noticing and input enhancement had a great effect on learning the vocabulary

items' of students. Table 2

The Results of Paired Sample T-test for Speaking Post-test

Paired Differences

t df Sig. (2-tailed)

Mean Std. Deviation

Std. Error Mean

95% Confidence Interval of the Difference

Lower Upper

Pair 1 speaking - speaking

-.733 .740 .135 -1.010 -.457 -5.430 29 .000

Mean N Std. Deviation

Std. Error Mean

Pair 1 speaking 7.97 30 1.564 .286

speaking 8.70 30 1.705 .311






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 145

4. Discussion

The positive answer to the first research question showed that input enhancement had a significant

effect on the oral production of students. The performance of the two groups of students on the

achievement post-test indicated that the Enhanced group could outperform the Unenhanced group

on the developing their oral production. It was signified that the learners' ability to speak and learn

vocabulary would increase when the learners' attention was focused on a particular vocabulary in

the course of doing different reading texts. Furthermore, this study suggested that for learning

vocabulary and speaking in English noticing and awareness of the vocabulary items were

necessary.It was worth mentioning that the result of the present study was in line with Schmidt's

(1995) claim that noticing was necessary and effective in language learning. The finding also

supported other input enhancement studies that have reported the ability of the learners in

recognizing and producing vocabulary items correctly when their attention was focused on a

particular vocabulary items while doing reading texts (White, Spada, Lightbown, & Ranta, 1991;

White, 1998).

5. Conclusion

The result of this study might help teachers and practitioners in improving speaking skill and

learning vocabulary items. Input enhancement was a technique which can be used for drawing

students' attention to certain vocabulary items of input and increase the perceptual salience of these

vocabulary items and use them in their speaking in the second language environment. This, also,

would help students to focus on certain vocabulary items and increase the span of their lexical items.

Paying attention to language vocabulary items through input enhancement would be facilitative and

could assist learners in improving their language fluency.

6.References

1.Hammer, T. (2001). Teaching and learning in the language classroom. Oxford: Oxford University Press. 2.Homber Combs, H. (2005). The push toward communication. Curriculum, Competence, and the Foreign Language Teacher, 11, 57–79. 3.Nunan, D. (2003). Practical English language teaching. Boston: McGraw till. 4.Schmidt, R. (1990). The role of consciousness in second language learning. Applied Linguistic, 11, 129–158.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 146

5.Schmidt, R. (1993). Awareness and second language acquisition. Annual Review of Applied Linguistic, 13, 206–226. 6.Schmidt, R. (1995). Consciousness and foreign language learning. A tutorial on the Role of Attention and Awareness in Learning, 10, 1–63. 7.Walter, R.Hill. (1979), M. (2006). Games for language learning. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 8.White, L., Spada, N., Lightbown, P., & Ranta, L. (1991). Input enhancement and L2 question formation. Applied Linguistics, 12, 416–432.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 147

The Effect of Collaboration Conditions on Learning

Requesting Functions

Reza Abdi

Rokhsareh Haghjoo

Associate Professor (Department of English Language Teaching, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil) MA Student (Department of English Language Teaching, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil)

Abstract

Second language learners‟ poor knowledge of pragmatics has recently received attention among

researchers in language learning classrooms. The current study examined the effect of collaboration

conditions on requesting functions. To this purpose, sixty Iranian students were divided into three groups.

The proficiency test and a dialogue construction task as a pretest were administrated. Based on the result of

the proficiency test, participants were divided to three groups: two experimental groups(homogenous

collaborative group, heterogeneous collaborative group) and a control group. The experimental groups

received explicit metapragmatic information on request followed by a dialogue construction task in pairs

during 6 sessions of treatment. The control group received the same information but completed the task

individually. Results of One-way ANOVA of the post-test scores revealed that both experimental groups

outperformed the control group in producing request making.

Keywords: requesting functions, collaboration conditionsIntroduction

1.Introduction

Communicative competence is required for effective language use and communication (Johnson &

Johnson, 1998, p. 62). Pragmatic competence is an aspect of communicative competence and is included in

Canale and Swain's (1980) and Bachman‟s (1990) model of communicative competence. Ellis (2008)

defines pragmatic competence as consisting of the "knowledge of what constitutes appropriate linguistic

behavior in a particular situation" (p. 956).

An important part of educational systems is learning a foreign language. One of the problems of language

learners is that they cannot use their knowledge of language in real situations. This problem is even worse

in EFL setting, where learners have little chance of using language outside the classroom. One possible

solutions is using communicative methods in teaching.

Schmidt‟s (2001) noticing hypothesis and explicit vs. implicit teaching motivated by the hypothesis

recently dominates the field of instructed pragmatics. The noticing hypothesis claims that the attention of






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 148

learners to linguistic forms, functions and contextual factors are necessary for pragmatic input to become

intake.

Although implicit and explicit teaching have predominated in recent studies, new framework for pragmatic

instruction have been added to this field. The concept that is relevant to this study is collaboration

conditions. Collaborative dialogue is for the construction of linguistic knowledge, which is often

operationalized as language-related episodes (Swain and Lapkin 1998; Swain 2006). Collaborative

dialogue is a form of output, but it is an output used for a cognitive function because language mediates

learners‟ process of working together to solve linguistic problems and jointly construct knowledge (Swain

and Lapkin 1998). According to Swain and Lapkin (1998), students talk about the language the language

they are producing, question their language use, or correct each other. vite, permit, and advise.

In Searle‟s taxonomy (1969), command and order are categorized under request. Request can be defined

as attempts by the speakers to get the hearer to do something‟ or as an illocutionary act whereby a speaker

(requester) conveys to a hearer (requestee) that he/she wants the requestee to perform an act, which is for

the benefit of the speaker” (Searle 1976). Politeness is an aspect of pragmatics and concerns linguistic

forms that language users employ to display respect and consideration for their addressees. According to

Holmes (2006), linguistic politeness "is a matter of specific linguistic choices from a range of available

ways of saying something" and "has generally been considered the proper concern of pragmatics" (p. 711).

However, politeness has not been considered thoroughly in interlanguage pragmatics (ILP), as ILP has

mainly focused on what Kasper and Dahl (1991, p. 216) called the "narrow sense" of ILP, that is,

“nonnative speakers‟ comprehension and production of speech acts, and how their L2-related speech act

knowledge is acquired”.

Although implicit and explicit teaching have predominated in recent studies, new framework for pragmatic

instruction have been added to this field. The concept that is relevant to this study is collaboration

conditions in the construction of request functions.

The role of instruction and the teachability of specific pragmatic aspects (e.g. comprehension of

implicature, complimenting, apologising, and requests) have been investigated by scholars like Billmyer

(1990), Bouton (1994), Olshtain and Cohen (1993) and Tateyama (2001). Findings from these studies have

highlighted the positive effect of instruction on the learners‟ use of particular pragmatic items. Many

studies have investigated the effect of collaboration conditions on learning pragmatics. In Leeser‟s (2004)

study, twenty one pairs of adult L2 Spanish learners from a content-based course completed collaborative

task to see how focus on form can be both effective and appropriate. This article grouping learners on the

basis of proficiency (high–high, high–low, or low–low) for investigating the amount, type (lexical or

grammatical) and outcome (correct, unresolved, or incorrect) of language related episodes produced during

a passage reconstruction task. The findings revealed that the proficiency of the dyad members affected

how much the dyads focused on form, the types of forms they focused on as well as how successful they

were at resolving the language problems when they encountered problems (Leeser, 2004).

There are some studies about the role of collaboration conditions on learning vocabulary and grammar. But

to the best of my knowledge, previous studies have failed to explore the role of collaboration conditions on






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 149

request functions. This study intends to shed some light on the influence of collaborative conditions when

learners are heterogeneous or homogenous in learning request making.

The current study seeks to answer the following question:

1. Does collaborative dialogue has any effect on request making?

2.Method

The experimental sequence of the study was carried out over a period of around ten sessions. For the

groups to be comparable and for an experiment like this to be meaningful and for being sure that the

learners in the experimental and control groups enjoyed the same level of knowledge a proficiency test was

administrated in session one. Then based on the results of the proficiency test, participants divided into

three groups: two experimental groups (homogenous collaborative group, heterogeneous collaborative

group) and a control group. In session two a pre-test was given to all three groups which was a ten item

Discourse Completion Task (DCT) designed to elicit the request speech act in different situations and

assess the learners‟ knowledge of these prior to any type of treatment.

Task treatment sessions started with a dialogue. They listened to a short conversation including the

requests in focus. Then, they received a scripted version of the conversations in bold. After receiving the

direct metapragmatic information, the two treatment groups proceeding to the dialogue construction task,

during which learners will be asked to create a request based on given scenarios. The teacher explained to

the participants that a speaker, when speaking with an interlocutor, has to consider the social status and role

relationship of the participants and the imposition of the speech act and determine the degree of formality

and indirectness required for each situation (sociopragmatic points) and accordingly choose an appropriate

politeness strategy. The collaborative groups created a request in pairs. The control group did request

making individually. After the treatment, immediate posttests with the same procedure and order of test

presentations as the pretests were administered to the participating learners.


The current study was an attempt to demonstrate whether collaboration conditions had any impact on Iranian

EFL learner‟s production of request functions. In brief, it was denoted that treatment had a positive impact

on the production of request functions. Having gained some information about the differences in the

performance of the members of the three groups on the post-test to determine whether or not the observed

differences were significant at the critical value (Sig.) of p<0.05. Therefore, a one-way between-groups

ANOVA was conducted. Table 1 provides the results of the ANOVA






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 150

Table 1

The Results of One–way ANOVA for the Post-test

SS Df MS F Sig

Between groups 2036.742 2 1018.371 53.638 .000

Within groups 512.625 27 18.986

Total 2549.367 24






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 151

On a closer inspection of Table 1, one can conclude that the three groups differed significantly with respect

to their mean scores on the post-test because the significant value is observed to be 0.000, which is less

than the critical value (0.05). Although the information presented in Table 7 is very revealing, it does not

show where the observed differences lie. The researchers, therefore, had to run a Scheffe Post-hoc test.

This post-hoc test indicates where the differences among the three groups occur.

The fact that those who were in the homogenous group did significantly better on the posttest suggests that

collaboration conditions in homogenous group were effective in leading learners to produce linguistically

accurate and pragmatically appropriate requests. Findings in this study lend further support to those studies

on the positive effects of explicit instruction which employed explanation and discussion of rules as their

approach to provide learners with metapragmatic information (Kubota, 1995; LoCastro, 1997; Trosborg,

2003; Yoshimi, 2001; Wishnoff, 2000). Another findings contribute to the task-based literature by

demonstrating the benefits of collaborative tasks in improving pragmatics knowledge. Takimoto (2012)

found that collaborative dialogue in a form of metapragmatic discussion gave learners access to

information about pragmatic features, which eventually led to better control of pragmatic knowledge than

the condition where learners completed the task alone, with or without verbalization of the target features.

References

1.Billmyer, K. (1990). 'I really like your lifestyle.' Learning how to compliment in English. Working

Papers in Educational Linguistics, 6 (2), 31 48.

2.Bachman, L. (1990). Fundamental considerations in language testing. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

3.Canale, M., & Swain, M. (1980). Theoretical bases of communicative approaches to second language

teaching and testing. Applied Linguistics, 1(1), 1-47.

4.Ellis, R. (2008). The study of second language acquisition (2nd ed.). Oxford: Oxford University Press.

5.Holmes, J. (2006). Politeness strategies as linguistic variables. In J. L. Mey (Ed.), Concise encyclopedia

of pragmatics (711-723). Elsevier Ltd.

6.Johnson, K., & Johnson, H. (1998). „Encyclopedic dictionary of applied linguistics‟. Oxford: Blackwell

Publishers.

7.Kasper, G., & Dahl, M. (1991). Research methods in interlanguage pragmatics. Studies in Second

Language Acquisition, 13(2), 215-247.

8.Kubota, M. (1995). Teachability of conversational implicature to Japanese EFL learners. The Institute for

Research in Language Teaching Bulletin, 9, 35–67.

9.Olshtain, E. & A. Cohen (1990). “Thelearning of complex speech act behaviour”. TESL Canada Journal,

7, 45 65.

10.Schmidt, R. (2001). „Attention‟ in P. Robinson (ed.): Cognition and Second Language Instruction.

Cambridge University Press, pp. 3–32.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 152

11.Searle, J. (1969). Speech acts: Am essay in the philosophy of language. Cambridge: Cambridge

University Press.

12.Swain, M. (2006). „Languaging, agency and collaboration in advanced second language Proficiency‟ in

H. Byrnes (ed.): Advanced Language Learning: The Contribution of Halliday and Vygotsky. Continuum,

pp. 95–108.

13.Swain, M. and S. Lapkin. (1998). Interaction and second language learning: Two adolescent French

immersion students working together. Modern Language Journal, 82, 320–37.

14.Tateyama, Y. (2001). Explicit and implicit teaching of pragmatic routines: Japanese sumimasen in Rose

& Kasper (eds.), 200-222.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 153

The Effect of Teaching Compositional, Semi-compositional, and Non-compositional Idioms on Intake of EFL Learners

Reza Abdi Ghazal Farangizade

Department of ELT, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran Department of ELT, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran

Abstract

This study aimed at investigating how 30 Persian learners of English at intermediate level used their

first language knowledge to comprehend and produce three types of English idioms, which were

included as compositional, semi-compositional, and non-compositional idioms. The learners were

divided into two groups; one experimental and one control. A pre-test which included both

comprehension and production tests were administered to each group. Then, experimental group

was received treatment in the form of small conversations, but control group was not received any

treatment. In the last session both groups were received immediate post-test and after one month, a

delayed post-test was taken. For the analysis of data a t-test and ANOVA were employed. Results in

both groups showed that compositional idioms had the highest correct responses, followed by semi-

compositional idioms, and non-compositional idioms were the most difficult to comprehend and

produce. In addition, in both groups learners performed better in comprehension rather than

production test.

Keywords: Idiomatic expressions, Compositional, Semi-compositional, Non-compositional idiom,

Idiom comprehension, Idiom production

1. Introduction

Language plays a crucial role in humans' life, and the ability to learn a language is one of the greatest

cognitive and mental gains among humankind. Although language can be learned and achieved from

various points of view, but showing a satisfactory picture of how human beings gain a native or

foreign language and specially their specific expressions can be difficult. However, in recent years






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 154

many researchers and linguists have been found a lot of information about what is language and

how it is used as a first or second language.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 155

In second language research, there has a much less attention paid to the lexicon than the other parts

of language, although this picture is quickly changing (Nation, 2001). In reality the lexicon are

important and essential parts of the language that without them the L2 learners cannot produce

sentences to understand them. Second language learners have difficulty in vocabulary learning since

many English words have two or more meanings especially when they occur in idioms or

expressions and deciding the correct meaning is demanding for learners.

Idioms cannot be defined clearly and comprehensively. This lack of clear and exact definition of

idioms causes teachers and learners some difficulty dealing with idioms (Grant & Bauer, 2004). To

overcome this problem, idioms should be taught and defined very clearly.

Mäntylä (2004) argued that in the past, when language was studied through its structure rather than

meaning, idioms were studied on the basis of their form, and from was on the basis of idioms

definition. Idioms were considered as frozen and multi-word expressions that have little or no

structural variation. Idioms were also seen as dead expressions because there was no relationship

between their meaning and origin. But after the emergence of functionalist approach to the study of

language, the focus shifted from idiom structures to idiom meaning.

Not only are idioms commonly and frequently used in all forms of discourse such as conversations,

lectures, movies, television programs, and so on, but also they are very difficult for L2 learners to

comprehend and produce effectively (Fotovatnia & Khaki, 2012).

Gibbs study stated that idioms are found in all of the languages and some types of the idioms are

culture-specific; it means that these idioms express the same meaning but the way they used and

words which are included in them is different from one culture to another. This explanation opens

some ways to make a classification for idioms in different cultures.

Idioms are classified into three types based on their translation according to the learners’ mother

tongue, which is the purpose of the current study.

The first type which was named as compositional, literal (Fernando, 1996), transparent (Gibbs,

1987), identical idioms, refers to the word by word translation of idioms. For example; English

idiom: He is only skin and bone. Persian idiom: فقط پوست و استخوان است.

The second type was known as semi-compositional, similar, and semi (Fernando, 1996) idioms. This

type refers to the idioms that are similar in some words. For example; English idioms: rainy day.

Persian idiom: روز مبادا.

The last type was addressed as non-compositional, transparent (Gibbs, 1987), different and pure

(Fernando, 1996) idioms, which are totally different but express the same meaning. For example;

English idiom: pulling his leg. Persian idiom: او را دست انذاختن.

In recent years many works have been done in the area of language transfer and that they have

emphasized on the importance of transfer strategy in the process of second language acquisition, but

a very little work has been done on the role of transfer in the acquisition of English idioms EFL

English language learners especially in Iran. So the findings of the current study open some ways for






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 156

researchers to explain the power of transfer strategy with regard to Iranian English language

learners' performance in comprehension and production of English idioms. Generally, the result of

this study help linguists and language teachers to gain some knowledge about which types of idioms

show positive and which type of idioms show negative transfer. In addition, this study will help

language teachers to make a comparison between teaching idioms to different students with

different proficiency levels.

This study intended to address the following research questions:

1) Which of the three kinds of idioms, including compositional, semi-compositional, and non-

compositional idioms will be comprehended and produced easily by intermediate EFL English

language learners?

2) Do learners perform better in comprehension or production of English idioms?

Based on the above research questions we come up with the following null hypothesis

H01: There are no significant differences between the comprehension and production of three

different idioms by intermediate EFL English language learners.

H02: There are no significant differences between the Iranian students’ performance in

comprehension and production of English idioms.

2. Method

Participants

The participants in this study were 30 Persian, English language learners at intermediate level. They

were randomly divided into two groups; 15 students in experimental and 15 students in control

group. Both men and woman were selected for this study.

Instrument

The materials that were used for this study included as: a pre-test, immediate post-test, and a

delayed post-test. The idioms and conversations were selected from the books entitled as 101

American English Idioms; speak English like an American and thesis of Sirus Izadpanah (1996). The

pre-test consisted 15 multiple choice questions and 15 production questions and immediate and

delayed post-test which were exactly the same, had 30 multiple choice questions and 30 production

questions and all of the tests were selected from the thesis of Sirus Izadpanah. For the analysis of

data a t-test and ANOVA were employed.

Procedure

This experiment was lasted for about 10 sessions; a pre-test which included both comprehension

and production tests were administered to both groups at first and second session. Then, from






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 157

session 3 until session 10, experimental group was received treatment in the form of small

conversions which included these three kinds of idioms. The total numbers of idioms were 60 and

they were received 6 of them each session. But control group was not received any treatment. On

session 10 both groups were received immediate post-test and after two weeks or one month, a

delayed post-test was taken. In all of the tests content of comprehension and production tests were

exactly the same.

Data Analysis

For the analysis of data a t-test and ANOVA were employed through the SPSS program.


Before answering research question, first of all the normality was checked in order to demonstrate

that whether our data were normal or not, or in the other words they were normally distributed. As

shown in Table 2 in the following, all four groups in each test showed normality since the sig of

Kolmogorov-smirnov in all of them is greater than 0.05.

The first research question aimed to examine which three types of idioms in each exam such as pre,

post, and delay test were comprehended and produced easily by high school English language

learners. For answering this question repeated measure ANOVA was used followed by post hoc for

determining the relation between three types of idioms. For both, multiple choice and production

test, correct answers were awarded 1 point, whereas wrong answers received 0 points.

The empirical results in SPSS showed that in both groups and in both tests of comprehension and

production, identical or compositional idioms were the easiest to comprehend and produce,

followed by similar or semi-compositional idioms which were well comprehended , and different

and non-compositional idioms were the most difficult to comprehend and produce. In the other

words, there is a significant difference between three types of idioms (sig<0.05) in both groups. So

in here the null hypothesis is rejected because there is a significant difference between the

comprehension and production of three different idioms by intermediate English language learner.

The purpose of the second question was to find whether the students performed better in

comprehension or production test of idioms. For answering this question a paired t-test was used.

The results showed that both groups in three tests performed better in comprehension rather than

production test. The null hypothesis is rejected since there is a significant difference between the

students’ performance in comprehension and production of English idioms.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 158

What we conclude from the previous part is that, compositional idioms are the easiest one to

comprehend and produce since they are word by word translation of students’ mother tongue

idioms, so comprehension and production and in the other words, their remembrance is easier for

students which is followed by semi-compositional idioms which are a bit difficult than

compositional idioms and differ in some small details and words and well comprehend by students;

and finally non-compositional idioms which are totally different from the students mother tongue

idioms, are the most difficult one for students to remember in order to comprehend and produce.

On the other hand, comprehension of idioms is easier for learners rather than production of idioms,

since in comprehension the learners just understand its meaning and relates it to their mother

tongue idioms but in production they should be able to produce a new expression by using new

words.

This study had following limitations and delimitations:

1. The participants in this study were 30 students, so the generalizability of the results must be

treated curiously.

2. The background knowledge of the learners could have affected their answering to the

comprehension and production test; however this was not the concern for this study. For example

they might have passed an idiom course in institutes.

3. In this study only intermediate English language learners involved.

4.References

1.Fernando, C. (1994). Idioms and Idiomaticity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

2.Fotovatnia, Z., Khaki, Gh. (2012). The effect of three techniques for teaching English idioms to

Iranian TEFL undergraduates. Theory and practice in language studies, 2(2), 272–281.

3.Gibbs, R. W., Jr. (1987). Linguistic factors in children’s understanding of idioms. Journal of Child

Language, 14, 569–586.

4.Grant, L., & Bauer, L. (2004). Criteria for re-defining idioms: Are we braking up the wrong tree?

Applied linguistics, 25(1), 38–61.

5. Izadpanah, S. (1996). A study of the effects of transfer on the acquisition of idioms in a foreign

language by Iranian FL learners. M.A. thesis, Islamic Azad University of Tabriz.

6.Mäntylä, K. (2004). Idioms and language users: The effect of the characteristics of idioms on their

recognition and interpretation by native and non-native speakers of English. Jyvaskyla: University of

Jyvaskyla.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 159

7.Nation, I.S. P. (2001). Learning vocabulary in another language. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge

University Press.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 160

Exercise and Diabetes: A Review of the Evidence

Sajjad Azizkhah Alanagh Marefat Siahkohian

Afshin Dalir

MA student of Sport physiology, physical education and sports science, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran Full Profesor of Sport physiology, physical education and sports science, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran MA student of Sport physiology , physical education and sports science, Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran

Abstract

Diabetes or Diabetes is a big problem in public health communities. More than 300/000 people

worldwide have the disease. According to the World Health Organization, nearly two million Iranians

in the year 2000 deaths have been diagnosed with the disease. Projections indicate that by the year

2030 the number of people with diabetes 6/5 million people increases. This is followed by

hyperglycaemia occur. Sports critical role in the prevention and control of diabetes plays. . Since the

role of exercise in controlling this disease has been shown, Exercise can prevent the development of

diabetes. Therefore, should exercise appropriate clinical care systems people be at risk of diabetes.

In this article, we briefly review the pathophysiological diabetes. The more detailed the benefits of

exercise therapy on glycaemic control and cardiovascular risk factors in diabetes, Along with

recommendations and instructions sports programs will be discussed.

Keywords: diabetes, hyperglycemia, pathophysiological, glycemic control

1.Introduction

Diabetes is a disease that is based on the apidemik metabolici estimation of the offered about five to

eight percent of adults in the world to it is suffering. The risk of death and premature morbidity,

cardiac diseases, renal, neurologic, and blindness in people with double the non-diabetic people (1).

Although regular physical activity may have occurred in the prevention and treatment of Diabetes

and complications involved, but most of the people in the prone to diabetes are disabled.In this

Review article on this is after trying to provide knowledge about the beneficial effects of exercise in

diabetes some instructions about the administration of the training program for these individuals






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 161

offering. Two General forms of Diabetes mellitus and Diabetes insipidus classified. No taste in

diabetes sugar absorbed in indigent there is no blood and urine volume increased only due to

diabetes there is a resemblance. The two main forms of diabetes mellitus type 1 and type 2 classified.

The other type is less common, Gestational diabetes and this in the happens during pregnancy. The

risk of diabetes increases with age, obesity and inactivity (2).

The immediate effects of exercise

Fuel metabolism during exercise: Muscle contraction absorbed blood glucose to the muscles.

Physical activity causes a change in the substrate of the free fatty acids (the dominant fuel during the

rest) to mitochondrium, glycogen, glucose, fat, muscle, and amino acids may be less than the amount

(4). Classification of evidence-based Gatherer: physical activity increased the uptake of active

glucose to the muscles and liver glucose production to maintain blood glucose helps. Of the story,

with increasing exercise intensity relying on high carbohydrate to active muscles.

Insulin dependent glucose absorption and no dependent insulin during exercise: Evidence-

based conclusions: the absorption of glucose into skeletal muscle insulin stimulation during rest,

mostly by the enumerator is disturbed in diabetic individuals, while Contracting muscle transfer of

glucose insulin sensitivity through improved and more mechanisms stimulation of separate.

The effects of aerobic exercise: During moderate intensity exercise in non-diabetic, glucose uptake,

climbing by peripheral tissues (skeletal muscle) with increased liver glucose production.The result is

that blood glucose during long-term exercise does not change (3).Evidence-based conclusions:

Moderate intensity aerobic exercise, insulin action and glucose uptake by skeletal muscles to

improve temporarily. In these conditions and without the use of in these conditions and without the

use of insulin causing poor blood glucose risk of outsourcing.

The effects of resistance training: In the immediate effects of resistance training on blood glucose

levels in diabetic patients compared to aerobic exercise there is little evidence. In people with pre-

diabetes conditions (level glucose 100 to 125 mg per deciliter) resistance training resulting in a

decrease in fasting blood glucose for up to 24 hours thereafter.

Evidence-based conclusions: Report about the immediate effects of resistance training in diabetic

patients is limited, but the people before diabetes is a resistance exercise to reduce blood glucose for

24 hour.

Instantaneous changes in muscle insulin resistance: Gorman and Partners showed up to 16

hours after a aerobic exercise reduces blood glucose and paths signal are actively involved in glucose






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 162

uptake into the skeletal muscle (5). In one study showed immediate improvements in insulin

sensitivity in women low-intensity and high-intensity diabetes walk (with the same amount of

energy consumed) were similar (6). Evidence-based conclusions: Physical activity enhances

insulin action instantaneously, which will last from two to 72 hours.

Long-term effects of exercise training

Blood glucose levels and insulin resistance: Traditionally prescribed for the prevention and

treatment of diabetes aerobic exercise.Even an hour of aerobic exercise a week can Sensitivity

improve insulin in diabetic patients. Exercise can skeletal muscle response to insulin by increasing

expression or he activity of proteins involved in metabolism and insulin signaling lift. Practicing a

person's status, the use of carbohydrate during exercise aerobic is affected. A few weeks of aerobic

training increased use of fat during the same activity this action saves muscle glycogen and blood

glucose and finally, reduction of glycogen after exercise is less immediate (7). Evidence-based

conclusions: Both aerobic and resistance training action of insulin, improves glucose control and

lipid oxidation them. At the same time, however, resistance training increases muscle mass effects as

well.

Evidence-based conclusions: Blood lipid response to exercise is not clear, but may be partial

reduction in LDL cholesterol and no change in HDL cholesterol and triglycerides to be accompanied.

But the combination of weight loss and physical activity compared to exercise alone in improving

lipid profile more effective.

High blood pressure: High blood pressure is a major problem that about 60 percent of diabetics are

faced with hair (9 ( .In a study by the American Diabetes Association showed injury and weight

reduction in both systolic and diastolic blood pressure in diabetes reduced (10).Evidence-based

conclusions: Aerobic exercise may be systolic blood pressure decreased slightly, but the decrease in

pressure lower diastolic blood injury in diabetic patients is common.

Mortality and risk of cardiovascular disease: Diabetes is one of the main causes of cardiovascular

disease. As the prevalence diabetes, heart attacks and strokes in patients with triple Group is

matched controls (10). Evidence-based conclusions: Studies suggest that physical activity and

physical fitness to reduce the risk of death mortality from cardiovascular disease in people with

diabetes.

Body weight maintenance and loss: Obesity is a risk factor for diabetes and negative effects

significant progress and treatment of diabetes. Studies show that people can be managed to reduce

significantly the weight of which about 7 hours per week of moderate to pay to sports (15).






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 163

Evidence-based conclusions: Evidence suggests to weight loss through exercise alone, at least 60

minutes of activity exercise per day is needed.

Evidence-based conclusions: It seems to do three sessions exercise activities to improve mental

health and quality of life people with diabetes can help.

Physical activity recommendations for diabetics

Aerobic exercise:

Number of training sessions: Aerobic exercise at least three days week with 48 hours of rest

between intervals of exercise done. In most clinical studies, exercise interventions in diabetes three

days a week Intensity: Aerobic exercise should be moderate, about 40 to 60 percent of maximum

aerobic capacity )Vo2max) run.

Duration: Diabetic patients with at least 150 minutes per week do moderate intensity.

Implementation of 150 minutes, intensity exercise aweek of moderate to severe reduction in

mortality in diabetic patients their relatives (12). Evidence-based conclusions: People with

diabetes should at least aerobic exercise for at least 150 minutes per week of moderate to severe

three days a week.

Resistance training

Number of training sessions: resistance training at least two times week (course three times

better) with doing aerobic exercise, This means that a combination of resistance training and aerobic

each session will lead to greater improvement in insulin sensitivity it is possible (12).

Intensity: Resistance training should be moderate intensity (50% repetition maximum, maximum

weight that can be lifted once) or evere (75 to 80% of one repetition maximum) to achieve the goal

improvement in muscle strength and improve insulin action be taken (13).

Duration: at least five to ten movements per training session that includes the large muscles of the

upper and lower trunk and every move must be repeated 10 to 15 times per set (12,13,14).

Evidence-based conclusions: In addition to aerobic exercise, people diabetes need two to three

sessions per week of resistance training moderate to severe (at least six repetitions for each move)

to pay.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 164

Athletes and clinical considerations:

-Before and even after exercise insulin dose should be reduced.

-Blood glucose before, during and after exercising to be.

-With low levels of blood glucose is not to exercise.

-A meal or snack containing carbohydrates 3 hours ago the sport is received.

-Always some carbohydrate compounds such as chocolate, fruit dried (raisins) and fruits is

associated person.

-Team coach and as a person skilled person aware of the condition of diabetes.

-In order to prevent dehydration always received lots of water (16,17).

2.Method

This study is a documentary research. Using analysis and based on studies and research carried out

in recent years to address the issue of pay.


Sports play a key role in the prevention and control of insulin resistance, pre-diabetes conditions and

problems

Diabetes-related health plays. Both aerobic exercise and insulin resistance and improve glucose

management

Blood, blood lipids, blood pressure, risk of death and cardiovascular mortality and quality of life are.

It should be noted for the advantage of these benefits, exercise regularly and continued to do be.

4.References

1. Thomas GN, Jiang CQ, Taheri S, Xiao ZH, et al. A systematic review of lifestyle modification and glucose intolerance in the prevention of diabetes. Curr Diabetes Rev. 2010; 6: 378-87. 2. American Diabetes Association. Standards of medical care in diabetes. Diabetes Care. 2011; 34: 11-61. 3. Suh SH, Paik IY, Jacobs K. Regulation of blood glucose homeostasis during prolonged exercise. Mol Cells. 2007; 23:272-9. 4. Goodwin ML. Blood glucose regulation during prolonged, submaximal, continuous exercise: a guide for clinicians. J Diabetes Sci Technol. 2010; 4(3): 694-705. 5. O'Gorman DJ, Karlsson HK, McQuaid S, Yousif O, et al. Exercise training increases insulinstimulated glucose disposal and GLUT4 (SLC2A4) protein content in patients with diabetes.Diabetologia. 2006; 49: 2983-92.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 165

6. Galbo H, Tobin L, van Loon LJ. Responses to acute exercise in diabetes, with an emphasis On metabolism and interaction with oral hypoglycemic agents. Appl Physiol Nutr Metab.2007; 32(3): 567-75. 7. Saremi A, Moslehabadi M, Parastesh M. [Effects of Twelve-week Strength Training on Serum Chemerin, TNF-α and CRP Level in Subjects with the Metabolic Syndrome].IJEM. 2011; 12: 536-43. 8. Saremi A, Gheraati MR. [The effect of resistance training on serum myostatin level and insulin resistance in obese/overweight men]. HARAKAT. 2010; 4: 93-108. 9. Saremi A. Effects of resistance training on serum chemerin level and cardiometabolic risk factorsin obesemen. 2nd International Congress of Metabolic Syndrome, Obesity & Diabetes. 2010; Zanjan, Iran. 10. Stewart KJ. Role of exercise training on cardiovascular disease in persons who have diabetes and hypertension. Cardiol Clin. 2004; 22: 569-86. 11. Pi-Sunyer X, Blackburn G, Brancati FL, Bray GA, et al. Reduction in weight and cardiovascular disease risk factors in individuals with diabetes: one-year results of the look AHEAD trial.Diabetes Care. 2007; 30: 1374-83. 12. Donnelly JE, Blair SN, Jakicic JM, Manore MM, et al. American College of Sports Medicine Position Stand. Appropriate physical activity intervention strategies for weight loss and prevention of weight regain for adults. Med Sci Sports Exerc. 2009; 4:459-71. 13. Nelson ME, Rejeski WJ, Blair SN, Duncan PW,et al. Physical activity and public health in older adults: recommendation from the American College of Sports Medicine and the American Heart Association. Med Sci Sports Exerc. 2007; 39: 1435- 45. 14. Dunstan DW, Daly RM, Owen N, Jolley D, et al.Home-based resistance training is not sufficient to maintain improved glycemic control following supervised training in older individuals with diabetes. Diabetes Care. 2005; 28: 3-9. 15. Gordon BA, Benson AC, Bird SR, Fraser SF. Resistance training improves metabolic health in diabetes: a systematic review. Diabetes Res Clin Pract. 2009; 83: 157-75. 16. American Diabetes Association. Diabetes mellitus and exercise. Diabetes Care. 2002; 25: 64- 570. 17. Hornsby WG, Chetlin RD. Management of competitive athletes with diabetes. Diabetes pectrum. 2005; 18: 102-7.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 166

Optimal Design of PI Controller for Load Frequency Control in a Two-Area Power System with DFIG Based

Wind Turbine

Samira Fallahi

Hossein Shayeghi Abdolah Younesi

Technical Engineering Department, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran Technical Engineering Department, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran Technical Engineering Department, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Ardabil, Iran

Abstract

Stability of power system is one of the most important aspects in electric system action in the

presence of wind power. The technological advancements have made it possible for wind generators

to participate in frequency control. This paper shows the optimal design of the PI controller for an

interconnected power system with dynamic participation of doubly fed induction generator based

wind turbines (DFIG) in two case. The Power system model 1 is a two area interconnected power

system without DFIG and the Power system model 2 is a two area interconnected power system with

DFIG. DA algorithm is used for optimal PI controller of two area system and speed controller of DFIG

parameters with considering 2% load disturbance in area 1.

Keywords: Doubly fed induction generator (DFIG), Load frequency control, Inertial control, Wind

energy conversion system.

1. Introduction

Among the various sources of renewable energy, the wind is one of the most promising sources [1].

Frequency regulation in a generation mix having large wind power penetration is a critical issue. The






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 167

aim of the LFC in a power system is to provide an acceptable high level of power quality while

maintaining both voltage and frequency within tolerance limits [2]. Wind turbine generation does

not participation in frequency regulation services in power systems. Doubly fed induction generator

(DFIG)-based wind turbines to demonstrate their possibility to provide separate active and reactive

power control [3]. Few methods are reported in the literature on how variable speed wind turbine

(VSWT) can participate in system frequency regulation [4, 5]. The first method is based on inertial

control and other is power reserve (pitch and speed control) and third is control by communication

method. Inertial control is provided by the DFIG through a supplementary inertia control loop with a

suitable gain [6]. That it is sensitive to system frequency and releases kinetic energy from DFIG. DFIG

injected active power during frequency exclusion. That it is proportional to the derivative of system

frequency [7]. Different method is used to maintain the power system in the stability state. In [8] a

nonlinear artificial neural network controller based on µ-synthesis deal with the LFC issue of inter-

connected power system was proposed. Çam & Kocaarslan in [9] are used a fuzzy game scheduling

proportional and integral controller for improving load frequency dynamic performance of a two

area power system. The objective of this paper is designing optimal PI controller for load frequency

control of a two area interconnected system with DFIG-based wind turbines in both areas.

2.Simulation Model

Fig 1 shows the linearized model of two area interconnected power system. The model includes

system parameters such as damping factor (D), the drop (R), the inertia H, governor time constant

(Th) and turbine time constant (Tt) , power system time constant (Tp) and power system gain (Kp).

The parameter values are presented in [10]. The ∆Pg is the output from which the incremental power

demand ∆PD is sub ducted. The incremental hydraulic valve position change is shown with ∆Ph. ∆PNC

is added to the system according to Eq 1.

12g NC D fP P P P P (1) 1PK

D , 2

P

HT

fD

(2)

Fig 2 shows the model DFIG-based wind turbine control based on frequency change. The base of

emulation control given in Ref [11, 12]. In emulation control of the DFIG, an additional control signal

tries to conform the power set point ∆Pf* as a function of deviation and rate of change of frequency.

The controllers have a duty to keep the turbine at optimal speed in order to generate the maximum

power. The controller provides a power set point ∆PW* that is based on measured speed and

measured electrical power. ∆PNC is consisting of two parts; ∆Pf* and ∆PW

* that are based on frequency

change and optimum turbine speed respectively, as is given by:






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 168

*

f df Pf

dfP K K f

dt (3) * * *

W WP WiP K W W K W W dt (4)

* *

NC f WP P P (5)

Where KWP and KWi are constants of the PI controller. The contribution of the DFIG in system inertia is

given by:

12

2f f

g NC

H d fP D

f dt

P P P PD D f

(6)

*

*

2

12

2df f

H

g NC pf

D

H d fK P D f

f dt

P P P PD K D f

(7)

2B

1B

11

IP

KK

S

22

IP

KK

S

11

R

12

R

1

11

sTh

1

12

sTh

1

1

1 tsT

2

1

1t

sT

1

11

P

PsT

K

2

21

P

PsT

K

1DFIG

1DFIG

112

2 T

s

1Area

2Area

1Ph

2Ph

1PD

2PD

1Pg

2Pg

1f

2f

1

1 rsT 1

W

W

sT

sT

1

R

WiK

s

1

1 rsT

1

2 esH

WPK

f

Freq

measurement

1x 2x

W a s h o u t

f i l t e rDroop

max

min

max

min

min

max

*f

P

*P

Wind

Turbine

PNC

*

3x

Speed controller

,P

NC ref

Fig 1. The model of two area interconnected power system Fig 2. DFIG-based wind turbin

based frequency change

Reference point ∆Pf* is obtained as follows:

*

2

1( )fP X

R (8)

Where ∆X2 is the frequency change measured where the wind turbine is connected to the network.

3. Dragonfly Algorithm

The main inspiration of the DA emanates from the static and dynamic swarming behaviors of

dragonflies. Two basic phases of optimization exploration and exploitation, are designed by

modeling the social in traction of dragonflies in navigating, searching for foods and avoiding enemies






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 169

when searching dynamically or statistically. There are five main factors in position updating of

individuals in swarms as follows:

1

N

i j

j

s x x

(9) 1

N

j

j

i

v

AN

(10) 1

N

j

j

i

x

C xN

(11)

iF x x (12) iE x x (13)

Where x is the position of the current individual, xj is the j-th neighbouring individual and N is the

number of tham, vj is the velocity of j-th tham, x+ and x- show the position of the food source and

enemy respectively. The position of artificial dragonflies update as follow:

1i i i i i i tx sS aA cC fF eE w x (14) 1 1t t tx x x (15)

Where s, a, c, w show the weight factor, f is the food factor, e is the enemy factor and t is the iteration

counter. To improve the randomness, position of dragonflies is updated as following:

1 (d) xt t tx x levy (16) 1

1

2

(x) 0.01r

levyr

(17)

Where d is the dimension of the position vectors, r1 and r2 are two random numbers in [0,1], β is a

constant equal to 1.5 in this work. Finally, the algorithm work is completed [13].

1 !x x (18)

1

1

2

1 sin2

12

2

(19)

3. PI Controller Design

In this paper, the PI controller based on DA algorithm has been investigated for LFC in the two

area interconnected power system with the dynamic participation of DFIG based wind turbine.

To raise the participation of the DFIG in frequency control parameters of speed controller from

DFIG have been obtained. The result has been shown for 10% wind penetration level in table 1.

The ITAE technique is used for obtaining the optimum value of controller as following:






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 170

1 2

0

.simt

tieJ ITAE F F P tdt (20)

4.Simulation ResultS

Simulations have been done in a two area system check the influence of the DFIG in system

frequency control. The results have been extracted for a load perturbation of 2% in area 1 with 10%

level of wind penetration. DA algorithm to obtain the optimal values of the controller is used. Fig 3-5

show the response of the power system with considering DFIG in both areas and without DFIG.

Tables 2 shows analyze result for power system with and without DFIG based wind turbine. The

result shows effectively presence in frequency control.

Table 1. Optimal parameters of the controller for 10% wind penetration

Controller

parameter Area 1 Area2

values Kp1

* Ki1* Kwi1 Kwp1 Kp2

* Ki2* Kwi2 Kwp2

2 0.8434 -1.2918 1.9813 2 0.9574 1.0278 2

Table 2. Analyze result for power system with and without DFIG based wind turbine

Power system without DFIG Power system with DFIG

OS US TS ITAE OS US TS ITAE DF1 0.0194 0.0635 40.0513 1.5939 0.0209 0.0468 16.4837 0.4394

DF2 0.0071 0.0240 48.54 1.6679 1.7822e-05 0.0104 17.890 0.2207

DP12 1.4019e-04 0.0053 47.9018 0.2439 8.5980e-06 0.0033 18.054 0.2207

Fig 3. Frequency response with 10% of DFIG; (a): area 1, (b): area 2. Solid (with DFIG), Dashed

(without DFIG)






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 171

Fig 4. Response of ACE with 10% of DFIG; (a): area 1, (b): area 2. Solid (with DFIG), Dashed (without

DFIG)

Fig 5. Response of tıe line power with 10% of DFIG; Solid (with DFIG), Dashed (without DFIG)

Conclusion

This paper shows the optimal design of the PI controller for an interconnected power system with

the dynamic participation of DFIG-based wind turbines.The peak frequency and settling time are

reduced when the DFIG-based wind turbines participate in frequency regulation along with the

conventional generators. Thus, the presence of DFIG can be effective in frequency control.

References

1. Ibraheem, Niazi, K. R., & Sharma, G. (2015). Study on dynamic participation of wind turbines in

automatic generation control of power systems. Electric Power Components and Systems, 43(1), 44-

55.

2. Pandey, S. K., Mohanty, S. R., & Kishor, N. (2013). A literature survey on load–frequency control for

conventional and distribution generation power systems. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews,

318-334.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 172

3. Jalali, M., & Bhattacharya, K. (2013, July). Frequency regulation and AGC in isolated systems with

DFIG-based wind turbines. In Power and Energy Society General Meeting (PES), 2013 IEEE (pp. 1-5).

IEEE.

4. Lalor, G., Mullane, A., & O'Malley, M. (2005). Frequency control and wind turbine technologies.

Power Systems, IEEE Transactions on, 20(4), 1905-1913.

5. Mullane, A., & O'Malley, M. (2005). The inertial response of induction-machine-based wind

turbines. Power Systems, IEEE Transactions on, 20(3), 1496-1503.

6.Yingcheng, X., & Nengling, T. (2011). Review of contribution to frequency control through variable

speed wind turbine. Renewable Energy, 36(6), 1671-1677.

7. De Almeida, R. G., & Lopes, J. (2007). Participation of doubly fed induction wind generators in

system frequency regulation. Power Systems, IEEE Transactions on, 22(3), 944-950.

8. Shayeghi, H., & Shayanfar, H. A. (2006). Application of ANN technique based on μ-synthesis to load

frequency control of interconnected power system. International Journal of Electrical Power & Energy

Systems, 28(7), 503-511.

9. Çam, E., & Kocaarslan, I. (2005). Load frequency control in two area power systems using fuzzy

logic controller. Energy Conversion and Management, 46(2), 233-243.

10. Verma, Y. P., & Kumar, A. (2012). Dynamic contribution of variable-speed wind energy

conversion system in system frequency regulation. Frontiers in Energy, 6(2), 184-192.

11. Morren, J., De Haan, S. W., Kling, W. L., & Ferreira, J. A. (2006). Wind turbines emulating inertia

and supporting primary frequency control. Power Systems, IEEE Transactions on, 21(1), 433-434.

12. Mauricio, J. M., Marano, A., Gómez-Expósito, A., & Ramos, J. L. M. (2009). Frequency regulation

contribution through variable-speed wind energy conversion systems. Power Systems, IEEE

Transactions on, 24(1), 173-180.

13. Mirjalili, S. (2015). Dragonfly algorithm: a new meta-heuristic optimization technique for solving

single-objective, discrete, and multi-objective problems. Neural Computing and Applications, 1-21






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 173

Macroscopic Quantum Tunneling in Superconductor-Insulator-Superconductor Josephson Junction

Sanaz Zohouri Kakhki Mohammad Hamdipour

Faculty of Basic Science, Department of Physics, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, 5619911367, Ardabil, Iran. Faculty of Basic Science, Department of Physics, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, 5619911367, Ardabil, Iran

Abstract

Tunneling effect is a very important phenomenon, which states if a particles with energy less than

the height of a barrier can tunnel and pass though the barrier, which violate the classical physics. In

classical physics a particle can only pass through the barrier when its energy is at least equal to the

height of the barrier. This tunneling phenomenon which is absolutely quantum effect, has essential

role in the decay of unstable nuclei and has many applications including tunnel diode and the

scanning tunneling microscope (STM). In this paper we study the tunneling in Josephson junction.

Josephson junction is a system in which two superconducting layer separated by an insulating layer

with a thickness in the range of nanometers. In this system tunneling occurs collectively in the

macroscopic scale. This case is called macroscopic quantum tunneling and investigating this

phenomenon because of its effect on current-voltage characteristics of system has great importance.

In this paper we consider a Josephson junction connected to the voltage V then we calculate the

quantum tunneling rate.

Keywords: Josephson junction, Quantum tunneling rate, Superconductivity.

1.Introduction

Cuprate high temperature superconductors have layered structure constituting of periodic layer of

Cu ,Ca, Cu ,SrO,BiO,BiO,SrO planes. Where Cu layers behave as superconducting layer while






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 174

other play the role of insulating layers. Such structure can be considered as a system of Josephson

junctions [Kleiner, R., & et al., (1992)]. Cooper pair can move freely inside superconducting layers

while to go to other layers they should pass through insulator layer which is as a barrier. In external

currents height of the barrier is small and cooper pair can pass through by quantum tunneling. While

in superconductor the cooper pairs are coherent the tunneling occur collectively which is called

macroscopic quantum tunneling ( MQT) [ Caldeira, A. O., & Leggett, A. J. (1992). Voss, R. F., &

Webb, R. A. (1981). Devoret, M. H., Martinis, J. M., & Clarke, J. (1985), J. Clarke et al (1988)] In this

paper we consider a Josephson junction with a typical parameters and try to find height of barrier for

it as function of external current and the macroscopic quantum tunneling rate versus external

current.

2.Method

We consider a single Josephson junction formed by two superconducting layer separated by an

insulator layer with thickness of few angstroms and has two metal plate at top and bottom of system.

We suppose that an external current Iext flows at the direction perpendicular to layers. This is

schematically showed in figure 1.

Figure 1: This figure schematically shows a single Josephson junction formed by two

superconducting layer separated by a insulator layer with thickness of few angstroms there is two

metal plate at top and bottom of junction. Junction biased by external current Iext . One of the various






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 175

ways to describe the quantum tunneling in this system is the path integral formalism. The central

object of the theory is the propagator K which is defined by

( , ; , ) ⟨ | ( )

| ⟩ (1)

Figure 2: in this figure we showed potential energy versus gauge invariant phase differences of order

parameters of two superconducting layers at three different external current 1.2 (long dashed line),

0.85(dashed line), 0.3 (solid line). In subfigures we enlarged minima’s of potential energy in

mentioned currents which in neighbouring region of minima’s approximately has cubic form which

has a quantum well for currents below 1. Height of barrier of this metastable potential decrease by

creasing bias current.

With use of this propagator one can estimate the tunnelling rate which lead to below relation

( ) (2)

For our case a and b was 4.956 and 523.44 respectively and is determined by external

current.


First we need to show the potential energy versus gauge invariant phase differences of order

parameters of two superconducting layers which is itself depend on external current. In three






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 176

different external current 1.2, 0.85, 0.3 we showed the potential energy. In subfigures we enlarged

minima’s as of potential energy in that currents which in neighbouring region of minima’s have

approximately cubic form which has well for currents below 1. This is showed in figure 2. As we can

see from this figure the height of the barrier (which is indicated if figure 2.a by Vm) of this metastable

potential decrease by increasing bias current. We also can see that for currents greater than 1 there

is no well.

Now we want to study the change of height of barrier as a function of external current. We showed

the result at figure 3 (Left), as it is obvious from this figure the height of the barrier is decreasing by

increasing of external current.

a.

Figure 3:(Left) this figure shows height of barrier described and showed in figure 2.a which shows

that this height decrease by increase of current which leads to exponential growth of quantum

tunnelling rate. (Right) In this figure we presented the escape rate versus bias current.

Finally in figure 3 (Right) we showed the escape rate as a function of external current this figure

shows that increase of external current lead to exponential increase of tunnelling current.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 177

References

1.Kleiner, R., & et al., (1992). Intrinsic Josephson effect in single crystals. phys. Rev.

let. 68, 2394.

2.Caldeira, A. O., & Leggett, A. J. (1992).Influence of dissipation on quantum tunnelling in

macroscopic systems. phys. Rev. Lett. 46, 211.

3.Voss, R. F., & Webb, R. A. (1981).Macroscopic quantum tunnelling in 1- Josephson

junctions. phys. Rev. Lett. 47, 265.

4.Devoret, M. H., Martinis, J. M., & Clarke, J. (1985). Measurements of macroscopic quantum

tunnelling out of the zero-voltage state of a current-biased Josephson junction. phys. Rev. Lett. 55,

1908.

5.J. Clarke et al (1988). Quantum Mechanics of a Macroscopic Variable: The Phase Difference of a

Josephson Junction, Science 239, 992.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 178

The Effect of Planning on Iranian Intermediate EFL

Learners' Mastery of Writing Skill

Sara Mirazi Asgar Mahmoudi

Department of English language and teaching, Ahar Branch, Islamic Azad University, Ahar,Iran

Department of English language and teaching, Ardabil Branch, Islamic Azad University, Ardabil, Iran

Abstract

This study was concerned with Iranian intermediate EFL learners' writing. Since writing mastery is a

difficult task for EFL learners to accomplish, the present research investigated if both individual and

collaborative planning can facilitate students' mastery of this important skill. The study was also

interested in finding out if any particular component of writing (content, organization, vocabulary use,

language use, mechanics) was affected differently from other components. Using a quasi-experimental

design, two homogenized groups, each with 26 students all having the same first language,

underwent 8 treatment sessions. The results of the Paired-samples T-tests revealed that both

planning types were effective in improving the learners’ writing performance. Moreover, running a

Multivariate Analysis of Variance revealed that all four components of writings were affected with

content of the writings being affected more positively. Findings of the study highlight the significance

of planning before writing tasks. These findings could be beneficial for EFL teachers and learners

alike.

Keywords: writing skill, collaborative planning, individual planning, writing components

1. Introduction

Up to the end of 1960s, writing skill was considered as secondary to speech and reinforcement to

learning vocabulary and grammatical knowledge. Definitely, it was a “vehicle for language practice”

(Silva, 1990). Nevertheless, due to scientific improvements, writing gradually turned to be

synonymous with composing, and the process of composition began to gain importance. In order to

improve learners’ writing skill, models emerged to provide teachers with a theory about how to

teach this neglected skill. The presented models involved three basic systems: Formulation,






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 179

Execution and Monitoring. According to Kellog’s (1996) model each system has two processes.

Formulation involves planning and translation; execution involves programming and executing; and

monitoring involves reading and editing. As a result of such models, learners could be active and able

to generate thoughts and ideas.

By the emergence of new trends in language learning, writing skill witnessed a great shift from the

strictly product-focused concerns of correctness in grammar, usage, and mechanics to more process-

focused concerns. As a process, writing is a meaningful activity for thinking and problem-solving and

involves organizing and expressing one’s thoughts, generating ideas, brainstorming, revision, and

editing.

Bell and Burnaby (1984) point out that writing is an extremely complex cognitive activity in which

the writer is required to demonstrate the control of a number of variables simultaneously. At the

sentence level, these include control of content, format, sentence structure, vocabulary, punctuation,

and spelling. Beyond the sentence, the writer must be able to structure and integrate information

into cohesive and coherent paragraphs and texts. It seems that writing is so intricate and difficult

that even many native speakers of English never truly master it (Celce Murcia & McIntosh, 1979).

Consequently, the majority of learners consider writing as boring and are quite reluctant to produce

written texts. In Iran, this skill should receive more attention because it is a key element in giving

and receiving information in a foreign language and the written output measures learners’ ability in

an academic environment in which they should present their ideas through clear and well-organized

texts. So, as a main activity in language classes, planning time to design the content and outline of a

written text seems essential.

Ellis (2005) states that planning influences the linguistic form in speech. In order to attend to form

and meaning equally, Willis (1991) suggests the pre-, mid- and post-task activities within task-based

approaches to instruction. These kinds of tasks provide opportunities to achieve particular

instructional goals. Some task choices, in other words, may be more effective than others in terms of

targeted pedagogic outcomes.

Planning is one of the task choices that can affect the quality of written assignments. There are three

general types of planning: planning before or during writing, macro and micro planning, and

planning individually or collaboratively. The last type of planning is the focus of this article. Unlike

individual planning, collaborative planning supports group-based methods in instructional settings.

Based on the studies in the field, although positive effects have been found for individual planning,

collaborative planning consistently improves achievement and retention, creates more positive

relationships among students and promotes students psychological health and self-esteem (Johnson

& Johnson, 1992).

In all types of writing, it is useful for students to identify one main idea and some major points to

support that idea, to plan how to organize the writing, and to develop the text through using reasons,

examples, and details. Also they need to express information in an organized manner, to use effective






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 180

linking words to connect ideas, and help the reader to understand the flow of ideas by using a range

of grammatical elements and lexical items for effective expression. All the elements should be

integrated in order to create an acceptable written output.

The above paragraph states the tenets of the approach that views text features analytically and is the

basis of the scoring method suggested by Jacobs et al. (1981) called ESL Composition Profile. In this

scoring procedure, writing components are summarized as content, organization, discourse, syntax,

vocabulary, and punctuation. Analytic scoring measures learners’ performance on each component

and helps the writer to find his/her knowledge gap properly.

Two research questions were investigated in this paper:

1. Does planning have any effect on EFL learners' writing ability?

2. Which component of writing (content, organization, vocabulary, language use) is affected most

by planning time?

The two null hypothesis below were driven from the above research questions:

H01. Planning does not have any effect on EFL learners' writing ability.

H02. Planning time does not affect writing components (content, organization, vocabulary, language

use) differentially.

2. Literature Review

Pre-task planning enables learners to encounter the main outline of the task so that they can go

about the complete task. It provides learners with an opportunity to perform the task before the

main performance. Within a task, planning can be manipulated according to the time available to do

the task in which learners engage in rapid planning (Ochs, 1979). In the context of speaking, Yuan

and Ellis (2003) introduced two new types of planning in the literature: macro-planning that is

manageable and productive, and micro-planning that is detailed. These strategic planning times

provide learners with access to more information and increase the complexity in their speech.

Planning engages students in implicit acquisitional processes. It is believed that providing learners

with greater planning opportunities might have beneficial effects on their course of language

development, since a planned second language discourse could push learners to extend what they

are capable of doing with language (Foster & Skehan, 1999).

Recently there have been suggestions in the literature to include the concept of collaboration which

can be productive. It may lead to more effective consideration of form–meaning relationship as

different viewpoints cross-fertilize each other and planning time is used more effectively.

According to Foster and Skehan (1999), in collaborative planning with the group-based condition, it

is argued by the advocates of teacher-led planning that negotiation between group members and an

agreement as to how best to proceed may reduce the amount of time that is needed but lead to






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 181

generally lower performance and finally least efficiency. Teacher control might be an efficient

instrument for focusing on relevant items of the task.

Strategies which follow planning typically involve focused and unfocused instructions to students to

plan their performance during the task. Foster and Skehan (1996) explored the influence of planning

on different variables such as personal performance and narrative and decision-making tasks. They

reported that planning without guidance produced greater complexity and fluency of language. They

also reported that the guided planning condition produced greater complexity than the unguided

planning, and slightly greater fluency. They hypothesized that when planning is not guided, learners

use preparation time to rehearse language, in contrast, the guided planners intensify the complexity

of the task and sometimes the accuracy gets less attention (Foster & Skehan, 1996).

Considering the theoretical perspective behind collaborative learning, the theory dates back to the

social constructivist view of Vygotsky (1978) stating that children learn by interacting with adults or

more capable peers who scaffold or mediate learning so that they are able to complete tasks they

could not do alone. Webb and Farivar (1994) observed that some children are often more aware of

what other children do not understand, so by helping them to focus on the relevant features of the

problem, they often can explain it to them in a way that can be readily understood. Moreover, as

children interact with each other, they find opportunities to model thinking, reasoning and problem

solving skills of each other, receive feedback, and as a result, socially construct new understandings,

knowledge and skills (King, 1999, as cited in Gillies & Ashman, 2003). Similar results were found in

the study done by Foster and Ohta (2005) who demonstrated that language development is not

limited to the interactive processes but includes strategies such as negotiation of meaning, co-

construction, other-correction, and continuers. When learners work in groups or pairs, they are

more likely to use the L2 for a range of functions normally reserved for the teacher, such as making

suggestions, asking questions and providing feedback. Thus, group and pair work may provide

learners with an improved quantity and quality of L2 practice. Therefore, assigning learners to work

in groups provides more opportunity to practice L2 (Ohta, 2001).

Kowal and Swain (1994), who worked with both similar and mixed L2 proficiency pairs, suggested

that pairing students of different proficiency may result in the more proficient learner dominating

the interaction, particularly when the proficiency difference between members of the pair is large.

This suggests that mixed proficiency pairing may disadvantage the lower proficiency participant.

Along the same lines, Storch (2013) highlights the effect of collaborative work and suggests that

pairing students of mixed L2 proficiency may benefit both learners, but only if the learners work

collaboratively. In a previous study, Storch (2005) had investigated collaborative writing in a

classroom-based setting. Students were given a choice to write in pairs or individually. The study

compared texts produced by pairs with those produced by individual learners and investigated the

nature of the writing processes evident in the pair talk. The study also elicited the learners’

reflections on the experience of collaborative writing. The study found that pairs produced shorter






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 182

but better texts in terms of task fulfilment, grammatical accuracy, and complexity. According to the

interviews from this study, most students were positive about the experience.

In 1981, Johnson and colleagues examined the benefits of cooperative learning in comparison to

individual learning. They reviewed 122 studies to examine the effects of co-operative, competitive,

and individualistic learning on achievement. The results showed that co-operation promotes higher

achievement and productivity (i.e., encouragement to learn) than interpersonal competition or

working individually, and that these results were consistent across all subject areas (language, arts,

reading, mathematics, science, social studies, psychology, physical education), for all age groups

(elementary, secondary, college, adult), and for a variety of cognitively challenging tasks.

Many scholars including Madsen (1983) and McCafferty (1992) assert that there are many elements

to be considered in writing. These factors include form, content, vocabulary, grammatical accuracy,

penmanship, speed, mechanics, relevance, elaboration, originality, dictation, lay out, coherence,

cohesion, unity, organization, and logic. In this regard, Madsen (1983) enumerates a number of

different components and skills to be tested in writing. For Stern (1992), vocabulary, structure,

accuracy, and speed of script writing, spelling, punctuation, content, and organization of material are

all elements of writing. Meanwhile, McCafferty (1992) suggests grammar, coherence, relevance, and

structure of the argument as the attributes of a written task.

Jacobs et al. (1981), proposed five components for writing. In this regard based on ESL Composition

Profile (1981), writing is viewed as a communicative skill with five components namely content,

organization, vocabulary, grammar, and mechanics.

Preparing opportunity to focus on the main elements of written texts seems makes students pay

attention to grammatical and lexical structures and try to include the main components in any kind

of writing. Therefore, planning time to organize an essay first, as a distinctive step in the writing

process, is an important part. Planning provides an opportunity to review writing elements and take

the efficient linguistic knowledge. Directing students at the earlier stage helps them attend to specific

points at the later stage.

Scott (1995, p. 139) argues that "teaching foreign language writing is essential at all levels of

language study" if students are to succeed in managing the time and focusing on content,

organization, language use, vocabulary, and mechanics as the main components.

In general, there are four major methods of scoring in writing assessment. These methods as studied

by Bailey (1984) are:

1) Holistic scoring

2) Analytic method

3) Primary trait scoring

4) Frequency count method

Brown (2001) defined holistic scoring as “an approach in which the teachers use a single general

scale to give a single rating for each student’s language production” (p. 61). The holistic scoring of a

written text provides situations that students will not be aware of their knowledge gap. In contrast,






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 183

in analytic scoring each component of the writing is scored according to a descriptor designed for

that purpose. In primary trait scoring, each text is scored based on one trait that is considered to be

primary such as persuading. Frequency count is but based on determining word frequency. Taking

all these scales into account it seems that, the analysis of each feature in a text can help students to

be more aware of their lacks in writing. Therefore, the analytic rubric of Jacobs et al. (1981) was

used in the rating stage of the present study which examined the writing performance of Persian

speakers learning English language. According to this scale, each paper is rated on the writing

components including content, organization, grammar, vocabulary, and mechanics out of 100

(Content 30 points, Organization 20 points, Syntax 25 points, Vocabulary 20 points, Mechanics 5

points).

3. Methodology

3.1. Participants

The present study was conducted on 52 Iranian university students (26 males and 26 females) with

the same mother tongue and an age range of 20 to 25 years old. Prior to taking part in the study, all

participants had studied English for several years at different schools and had completed two or

more English conversation books in private language schools.

3.2. Instruments

A simplified version of a proficiency test—taken from Top Notch/Summit Placement Test A (Saslow

& Asher, 2006)—consisting of listening, reading, vocabulary, and grammar sections was prepared.

The listening section was the first section and contained two conversation passages with a few

multiple-choice and other comprehension check questions. The reading section included one reading

passage with eight true/false questions. The other two parts were intended to test the students’

general knowledge of vocabulary and grammar through items of mixed difficulty. The reliability of

the test had already been established by applying to a similar group of students and statistical

analysis of the results and the test was considered to be valid, because, in addition to its reliability,

the items were all directed at measuring students’ general English proficiency.

Other materials included some writing topics for pretest, posttest and the treatment sessions which

were taken from the book ‘How to Prepare for the TOEFL Essay’ Edited by Abbas Zahedi (2002).

3.3. Data Collection Procedure

Out of 190 randomly chosen students who took the placement test, 52 intermediate students were

included in the study. These students were randomly divided into two groups each with 26 members

of both genders. After dividing the participants into two mixed groups, the groups were further






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 184

subdivided into two male and female groups each. That is, there were four groups, two male groups

and two female groups each with 13 students. Then, the pretest for writing was administered. In the

pretest, the students were given two topics and asked to write a text of about 100 to 150 words

about one of them. In order to assure the homogeneity of the groups in terms of writing ability, the

statistical test of One-way ANOVA was conducted on the pretest scores. The result of the Levene’s

Equality of Error Variance test revealed that there was no significant difference across the four

groups (P=.071>.05, df=3, 48, F=2.490).

After these preliminary stages, eight treatment sessions were held in each group. In each gender

category, students in one group worked individually and in the other collaboratively, that is, they

were paired up. In the collaborative groups, the students chose their own partners and had the

opportunity of cooperative planning throughout the treatment sessions and during the posttest.

However, after planning, each learner wrote about the topic individually.

3.4. Treatment Sessions and Scoring Procedure

During the treatment sessions, a topic was given to the students and they were asked to plan (one

male and one female groups individually, and the other two groups in pairs) and produce a 100- to

150-word text about it. The treatments included comprehensive information about the components

of ESL composition including content, organization, vocabulary use, language use, and mechanics.

Then, the teacher provided the learners with analytic feedback about each of the components every

session. Each written text was assessed on each of these multiple dimensions by some qualitative

criteria from Excellent to Very Poor. In this way, the learners had the chance to know about their

strengths and weaknesses.

In addition to actual writing during the first four treatment sessions, learners were also taught about

the structure of topic sentence, supporting sentences, paragraph unity, different kinds of paragraphs

(description, cause & effect, argumentation, and comparison & contrast) and the required

expressions for each of these paragraph types.

During the two following sessions the students were taught on how to appropriately use mechanics

including indentation, capitalization, comma, semicolon, etc. Finally, in the last two sessions, the

learners were provided with some useful grammatical information, as well as word formation, and

appropriate formulaic expressions.

Since assessing written texts in terms of quantitative results needs precision, scoring the

participants’ written productions in this study was done on the basis of Jacobs et al.'s (1981) scoring

profile. According to this assessment profile, each text is scored out of 100. This analytic scoring

measures learners’ performance on each of the five components of writing including content,

organization, vocabulary use, language use, and mechanics. The maximum score assigned to each

component based on Jacobs et al.'s descriptor is as the following: Content 30 points, Organization 20

points, Language use 25 points, Vocabulary use 20 points, and finally Mechanics 5 points.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 185

4. Data Analysis

To investigate the effects of the treatments, some statistical analyses were performed. First of all, the

normality of scores in pretest, which is an important assumption of parametric tests, was checked by

running a 1-sample K-S test. The following table shows the results of this test for all four groups.

Table 1.

Tests of Normality of Scores' Distributions at Pretest

One-Sample Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test

male

individual

pretest

male

collaborative

pretest

female

individuals

pretest

female

collaborative

pretest

N 13 13 13 13

Test Statistic .135 .118 .133 .215

Asymp. Sig. (2-tailed) .200c,d .200c,d .200c,d .102c

a. Test distribution is Normal.

Then, a One-way ANOVA accompanied by a Levene’s homogeneity test was run. The purposes of

running these tests were to first ascertain that the mean scores of the groups were not substantially

different from each other and second to make sure that the participants were almost at the same level

of proficiency before the beginning of the study.

Table 2

ANOVA Test Run on Pretest Scores

pretest scores

Sum of

Squares df

Mean

Square F Sig.

Between

Groups

961.135

3

320.378

2.490

.07

1

Within Groups 6175.846 48 128.663

Total 7136.981 51






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 186

The ANOVA test conducted on the pretest scores showed no significant difference among the groups’

pretest scores at P=.07 >.05 level. The accompanying Levene’s test of equality of error variances or

the homogeneity test also revealed that the groups of this study were comparable with each other,

since the Sig value calculated, as represented in Table 3, was larger than .05.

Table 3

Levene’s Test of Equality of Variances

One of the main objectives of this study was to see if planning had any effect on the participating EFL

learners’ writing ability. To test the related hypothesis, the participants’ posttest scores were also

entered into the statistical program and Paired-samples T-tests were run. The purpose of these tests

was to compare groups' pretest and posttest means. The results of these tests are given in Table 4

below. The Sig. values in Table 4 clearly show significant differences between the pretest and

posttest scores of the all four groups at P<0.001 level. In other words, there had been statistically

significant increases in the participants' scores from the pretests to the posttests as a result of

treatment. To understand about the strength of the differences between the pretest and posttest

results, it was also necessary to calculate the effect sizes. The formula for the effect size calculation

for paired-samples T-tests is t2/t2 + (N-1). The calculated effect sizes for the groups in this study

using information from Table 4 are given below the same Table. As can be seen, the strength of the

differences in individual planning situations both for male and female students are slightly higher

than the strength of the differences in collaborative groups but in both conditions the differences are

very strong according to Cohen's (1988) criteria for interpreting effect sizes.

Table 4

Paired-samples T-tests Showing Groups Progress from Pretest to Posttest Paired Samples t-test

Paired Differences

t df

Sig. (2-

tailed) Mean

Std.

Deviation

95% Confidence

Interval of the

Difference

Lower Upper

Pair 1 male individual pretest -

male individual posttest

-

17.61538

6.62745 -21.62031 -13.61046 -9.583 12 .000

Levene’s Statistic df1 df2 Sig.

.554 3 48 .648






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 187

Pair 2 male collaborative pretest -

male collaborative posttest

-

19.15385

10.05689 -25.23116 -13.07653 -6.867 12 .000

Pair 3 female individuals pretest -

female individual posttest

-

19.30769

8.49887 -24.44351 -14.17188 -8.191 12 .000

Pair 4 female collaborative

pretest - female

collaborative posttest

-

15.15385

7.50385 -19.68837 -10.61932 -7.281 12 .000

Effect size for male individual planning group: 91.78/91.78 + (14) = .87

Effect size for male collaborative planning group: 47.61/47.61+ (14) = .77

Effect size for female individual planning group: 67.24/67.24 + (14) = .83

Effect size for female collaborative planning group: 53/53 + (14) = .79

Another purpose of this study was to see which component of writing was affected more by planning

time or whether they were affected differently at all. It should be noted that during the treatment

sessions some detailed data were collected from the participants in terms of their performance on

different components or aspects of writing. These aspects included content, organization,

vocabulary, and language use. Tables 5 and 6, that is, Multivariate Tests and Tests of Between-

Subjects Effects show the results of a One-way MANOVA which was used to investigate this

hypothesis. Needless to say that all assumptions of MANOVA were met even though they are not

reported here for space limitation.

Table 5

Difference between Groups on a Linear Combination of Dependent Variables

Multivariate Testsa

Effect Value F

Hypothesis

df Error df Sig.

Planning Type Pillai's Trace .254 4.008b

4.000 47.000 .007

Wilks' Lambda .746 4.008b

4.000 47.000 .007

Hotelling's Trace .341 4.008b

4.000 47.000 .007

Roy's Largest Root .341 4.008b

4.000 47.000 .007






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 188

Table 6

Tests of Between-Subjects Effects

According to the results in Table 5, there had indeed been an effect for planning. But, it is clear only

from Table 6 that content had been affected the most followed by language use, vocabulary, and

organization. These comparisons can be made by looking at F, Sig, and Partial Eta Squared values in

the relevant columns in Table 6. The results, therefore, force us to reject the second null hypothesis

of the study which had assumed no difference in the effect of planning time on writing components.

5. Discussions and Conclusion

The present study was performed in order to find out if planning has any effect on EFL learners'

writing ability, as well as to see which component of writing (content, organization, vocabulary,

language use) is affected most by planning time.

The results of the analysis showed a significant difference between pre and posttest scores which meant

planning had had positive effects on EFL learners’ writing performance. This suggests that planning

before a writing activity is effective in leading learners to produce linguistically more accurate and

appropriate texts. These results are in line with the previous studies (e.g., Foster and Skehan, 1996;

Mehnert, 1998; Storch, 2005; Ojima, 2006) which report benefits for planning. The findings of the

study but contradict some of the previous studies (e.g., Nixon, 2007; Wigglesworth & Storch, 2009;

Elola & Oskoz, 2010) which report more effect for collaborative planning in comparison with

individual planning. In general, the findings of the study revealed that through planning EFL learners

are able to create more organized texts with better content, grammatical accuracy, vocabulary, and

organization regardless of what type of planning they are involved in.

Source

Dependent

Variable

Type III

Sum of

Squares df

Mean

Square F Sig.

Partial Eta

Squared

Planning

Type

content 99.692 1 99.692 15.359 .000 .235

organizatio

n

6.942 1 6.942 6.958 .011 .122

vocabulary 3.769 1 3.769 9.280 .004 .157

language

use

23.558 1 23.558 9.311 .004 .157






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 189

Concerning second hypothesis of the study, it is said that when learners are allowed to plan, they

choose to focus on meaning and plan what they want to say rather than plan grammatical forms (e.g.,

Crookes, 1989; Gilabert, 2005; Ortega, 1999; Wigglesworth, 1997). Even though the grammatical

accuracy of the students in this study was improved, the most highly affected aspect of their writing

was content which is in a way in conformity with the findings of these studies. In brief, in the present

study all planners improved a lot in going through the writing tasks. More specifically, they tended to

focus on meaning and planed the content of their writings more than any other component. Because

of the lack of control groups no comparison was made between planners and non-planners.

However, from the very strong effect sizes, it can be speculated that planners would perform better

than non-planners. This, of course, needs empirical proof.

References

1.Ashman, A., & Gillies, R. (Eds.). (2003). Cooperative learning: The social and intellectual outcomes of

learning in groups. London: Routledge.

2.Bailey, E. P. (1984). Writing clearly: A contemporary approach. Ohio: Charles E. Merrill publishing.

Bell, J., & Burnaby, B. (1984). A handbook for ESL literacy. Toronto: OISE Press.

3.Celce-Murcia, M., & McIntosh, L. (1991). Teaching English as a second or foreign language. Boston,

MA: Heinle & Heinle.

4.Cohen, J. (1988). The effect size index: Statistical power analysis for the behavioral sciences. (2nd

ed.). New Jersey: Lawrence Erl-baum Associates.

5.Crookes, G. (1989). Planning and interlanguage variation. Studies in Second Language Acquisition,

11(04), 367–383.

6.Ellis, R. (2005). Planning and task performance in a second language. Amsterdam: Benjamins.

7.Ellis, N. C. (2008). The dynamics of second language emergence: Cycles of language use, language

change, and language acquisition. The Modern Language Journal, 92(2), 232–249.

8.Elola, I., & Oskoz, A. (2010). Collaborative writing: Fostering foreign language and writing

conventions development. Language Learning & Technology, 14(3), 51–71.

9.Foster, P., & Ohta, A. S. (2005). Negotiation for meaning and peer assistance in second language

classrooms. Applied linguistics, 26(3), 402–430.

10.Foster, P., & Skehan, P. (1996). The influence of planning and task type on second language

performance. Studies in Second language acquisition, 18(03), 299–323.

11.Foster, P., & Skehan, P. (1999). The influence of source of planning and focus of planning on task-

based performance. Language Teaching Research, 3(3), 215-247.

12.Jacobs, H. L. (1981). Testing ESL Composition: A Practical Approach. English Composition Program.

Newbury House Publishers, Inc., Rowley, MA 01969.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 190

13.Johnson, D. W., & Johnson, R. T. (1992). Approaches to implementing cooperative learning in the

social studies classroom. Cooperative Learning in Social Studies Classroom, an Introduction to Social

Study, 44–51.

14.Kellogg, R. T. (1996). A model of working memory in writing. The science of writing (pp. 57-71).

15.Kowal, M., & Swain, M. (1994). Using collaborative language production tasks to promote

students’ language awareness 1. Language Awareness, 3(2), 73–93.

16.Madsen, H. S. (1983). Techniques in Testing. Oxford University Press, 200 Madison Ave., New York,

NY 10016 (ISBN-0-19-434132-1)

17.McCafferty, S. G. (1992). The Use of Private Speech by Adult Second Language Learners: A

Cross‐Cultural Study. The Modern Language Journal, 76(2), 179–189.

18.Mehnert, U. (1998). The effects of different lengths of time for planning on second language

performance. Studies in Second Language Acquisition, 20(01), 83–108.

19.Nixon, R. M. (2007). Collaborative and independent writing among adult Thai EFL learners: Verbal

interactions, compositions, and attitudes. Toronto, Canada: ProQuest.

20.Ochs, E. (1979). Transcription as theory. Developmental Pragmatics, 10(1), 43–72.

21.Ohta, A. S. (2001). Second language acquisition processes in the classroom: Learning Japanese.

Retrieved from tesl-ej.org/ej19/r13.html.

22.Ojima, M. (2006). Concept mapping as pre-task planning: A case study of three Japanese ESL

writers. System, 34(4), 566–585.

23.Ortega, L. (1999). Planning and focus on form in L2 oral performance. Studies in Second Language

Acquisition, 21(01), 109–148.

24.Scott, J. B. (1995). Sophistic ethics in the technical writing classroom: Teaching, deliberation, and

action. Technical Communication Quarterly, 4(2), 187–199.

25.Silva, T. (1990). Second language composition instruction: Developments, issues, and directions

in ESL. Second Language Writing: Research Insights for the Classroom, 11–23.

26.Stern, H. H. (1992). Issues and options in language teaching. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

27.Storch, N. (2005). Collaborative writing: Product, process, and students’ reflections. Journal of

Second Language Writing, 14(3), 153–173.

28.Vygotsky, L. (1978). Interaction between learning and development. Readings on the

Development of Children, 23(3), 34–41.

29.Webb, N. M., & Farivar, S. (1994). Promoting helping behavior in cooperative small groups in

middle school mathematics. American Educational Research Journal, 31(2), 369–395.

30.Wigglesworth, G. (1997). An investigation of planning time and proficiency level on oral test

discourse. Language Testing, 14(1), 85–106.

31.Wigglesworth, G., & Storch, N. (2009). Pair versus individual writing: Effects on fluency,

complexity and accuracy. Language Testing, 26(3), 445–466.

32.Willis, D. (1991). The lexical syllabus: A new approach to language teaching. London:

Harper Collins Publishers.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 191

33.Yuan, F., & Ellis, R. (2003). The Effects of Pre‐Task Planning and On‐Line Planning on Fluency,

Complexity and Accuracy in L2 Monologic Oral Production. Applied Linguistics, 24(1), 1–27.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 192

Task Scheduling in Cloud Computing Using Particle Swarm

Optimization

Shahram Jamali Fatemeh Alizadeh

Soheila Sadeqi

Department of Engineering, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili , Iran Department of Engineering, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili , Iran Department of Engineering, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili , Iran

Abstract

Cloud computing is the growth of distributed computing, parallel computing, utility computing and

grid computing, or defined as the commercial implementation of these computer science theories.

One of the fundamental issues in cloud environment is the task scheduling which plays the key role

of efficiency of the whole cloud computing facilities. Scheduling maps the user’s tasks to resources

to be executed efficiently in order to benefit both the service providers and customers. Since the

cloud task scheduling is an NP-hard optimization problem, many meta-heuristic algorithms have

been proposed to solve it. In this paper a policy based on particle swarm optimization compared

with genetic algorithm and FCFS, has been introduced. PSO is a population-based search algorithm

based on the simulation of the social behaviour of birds within the flock. The main goal in this

research is minimizing the makespan and waiting time of a given tasks set. Proposed policy and two

other algorithms have been simulated using Cloudsim toolkit package. The results showed that PSO

performed better than genetic and FCFS algorithms.

Keywords: Cloud computing, task scheduling, particle swarm optimization, makespan.

1.Introduction Cloud computing is developed based on various recent progressions in virtualization, heterogeneous

distributed computing, grid computing, web computing, utility computing and autonomic computing.

Also by definition, a cloud computing environment has a large pool of easily usable and accessible






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 193

virtualized resources (such as hardware, development platforms and/or services). These resources

can be dynamically re-configured to adjust to a variable load (scale), allowing also for an optimum

resource utilization.

Millions of user send your request to cloud resource. Scheduling these jobs is a challenge to cloud

system. Different scheduling method are discussed in [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7] and [8]. Although cloud

computing systems these days provide a better way to perform the submitted jobs in terms of

responsiveness, scalability, and flexibility, most job scheduling problems on cloud environment are

still either NP-hard or NP-complete. The rule-based scheduling algorithm (e.g., exhaustive and

deterministic scheduling algorithm) are simple and easy to implement, therefore they are widely

used on nowadays cloud computing systems, but in large- scale scheduling problems the result of

these scheduling method are often far from optimal and are not appropriate. We want to use a meta-

heuristic algorithm for solving this problem, because the heuristic algorithm are working better in

large-scale scheduling.

Some of these meta-heuristic algorithms are nature-inspired, e.g., Simulated Annealing (SA) [9],

Genetic Algorithm (GA) [10], Ant Colony Optimization (ACO) [11], etc. There are also non-nature-

inspired metaheuristics, such as Tabu Search [12] and Threshold Accepting (TA) [13]. One of the

newest heuristic algorithms is PSO (particle swarm optimization). This algorithm that has developed

by Kennedy and Eberhart [14] is one of the evolutionary algorithms which simulates social

behaviour of flock of birds or groups of fishes toward their desired destination. In addition to

benefits of heuristic algorithms, such as flexibility and acceptable calculations, PSO has consistent

performance and easy implementation.

The rest of the paper is organized as follow: In section 2, we present our approach for scheduling

problem. In section 3 experimental results are represented, and in section 4 conclusions are

presented.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 194

2.Method

To generalize the discussion, the assumption is that there is a set of cloud customer tasks and each

task that is submitted by user is independent from other tasks. Each task is allowed to be processed

on any given available resource. A task is processed on one resource at a time and given resource are

available continuously. In this paper we suppose that number of tasks is more than number of

resources. The cloud computing discussion in this study highlighted the fact that cloud task

scheduling scenario is actual either NP-hard or NP-complete problems. The problem description can

be presented as follows.

Inputs: Set of tasks is defined as T = { +, where , - and is the number of

independent tasks. Set of resource is defined as { }, in which , - and

is the number of available resource.

Output: An efficient Gantt chart of scheduling, including the assignment of tasks on available

resource and makespan.

Constraints: The processing time of each task is resource-dependent. Each task must be completed

without interruption once started. Resource cannot perform more than one task at a time. The tasks

is executed on machines for sequential form. When task is assigned to machine , become 1

otherwise it become 0. In this part two fundamental conditions are considered:

∑ ( ) * + ( )

First limitation ensures that each task is assigned to only one processing resource.

Objectives: The aim is to mapping tasks to appropriate virtual machines in order to minimizing

makespan and waiting time. The makespan is the completion time of tasks and waiting time is sum of

wait time of all tasks in each machine for execution.

PSO is an algorithm proposed by Kennedy and Eberhart in 1995, which is a population-based search

algorithm inspired by bird flocking and fish schooling. Social behaviour of these organisms






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 195

motivated them to look into the effect of collaboration of species on to achieving their goals as a

group. A large number of birds or fishes flock synchronously, change direction suddenly, and scatter

and regroup together according to the particle and social experience. The discrete, binary version of

the algorithm was presented also by Kennedy and Eberhart to operate on discrete binary variables

[15]. The binary PSO was implemented by [16] to solve task scheduling problem and used by [17]

and [18] to job scheduling in grid computing. This algorithm works by having a population (swarm)

of candidate solutions (particles) that travels in the problem space searching for an optimum

solution.

Each solution is evaluated by the fitness function to be optimized. Position of each particle

represents a potential solution in the problem space. Each particle has D-dimensional velocities

which are calculated as probabilities that change during the time particles move in space. At each

iteration the velocity and position of each particle is stochastically updated by combining the

particle’s current solution, the particle’s personal best solution or pbest, and the global best solution

or gbest over all particles. In the following, the formulas that exists for updating position and

velocity:

(3)

(

) ( ) (4)

At first we should have an accurate mapping between particles of PSO and problem solutions. If we

suppose that there are 𝓃 tasks and we aim to distribute them on 𝓂 processing machines then

particles should be defined in form of 𝓂 𝓃 matrixes. All elements of position matrix are 0 or 1 and

in each Column there is only one 1 and other elements are zero.

Velocity matrix dimensions, Pbest and gbest are 𝓂 𝓃 matrixes with 0 and 1 elements exactly

similar to position. Pbest matrix represents the best position of particle from beginning of the

algorithm and gbest owns the best position between all particles. In each step of the algorithm

particles are evaluated by fitness function of the algorithm and update pbest, gbest and position and

velocity matrixes in terms of fitness value. Fitness function is defined based on our objective. We






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 196

want to minimize makespan and waiting time. This process is repeated until stop criterion of

algorithm is satisfied which in our algorithm it is equal to number of iterations. Flowchart of PSO

algorithm is as Fig. 1. The objective function of our approach are formulated as follows:

Minimize F(s) = α ( ) + β W(s) (5)

Where ( ) is the completion time of the last job (also called makespan); W(s) is sum of the

waiting time of each task which waits for execute.

, ∑ (6)

Suppose that execution time of task on computational node j is known, and it is equal to . The

load of each machine is .

W(s) ∑ ∑ (7)

Table 1

The parameter setup of VMs in datacentre

Parameter Value

CPU 2500, 2000, 1000, 500

MIPS

Ram 870, 1740, 1740, 613 MB

BW 100 M/S

The number of

PEs

1, 1 ,1, 1

Table 2

The parameter setup of Tasks in

datacentre

Parameter Value

Length [100, 6000]

File size 300

Output size 300

Fig. 1 Flowchart of PSO algorithm






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 197


The proposed scheduling policy has been implemented in Cloudsim toolkit. Our experiments

generated a data center with 50 host and 50 virtual machines. The parameter setup of hosts, VMs in

the data center and tasks is shown in Table1 and Table2, respectively. In order to examine the

performance of the proposed algorithm we have implemented Genetic algorithm and FCFS too and

then compared the three mentioned policy in terms of Markesan and waiting time minimization.

Our experiments depicts that even if both Genetic algorithm and PSO algorithm show acceptable

results, it can be said in large scale problem PSO algorithm shows better results than Genetic

algorithm and FCFS policy. This algorithm can be used in cloud computing environment for efficient

scheduling of tasks on existing resources, so that completion time of tasks and waiting time become

minimized. Final results for three algorithms are shown in Fig. 2, Fig. 3 and Fig. 4.

References

1.Mell. P., & Grance. T. (2011). The NIST Definition of Cloud Computing-Recommendations of the

National Institute of Standards and Technology. NIST. NIST Special Publication, 800-145, pp. 1–3.

2.Paul, M., & Sanyal, G. (2012). Survey and analysis of optimal scheduling strategies in cloud

environment. IEEE.

3.Jeyarani, R., & Ram, R., & Versants, Nagaveni, N. (2010). Design and Implementation of an Efficient

Two Level Scheduler for Cloud Computing Environment. IEEE.

4.Qi-yi, H., & Ting-lei, H. (2010). An optimistic job scheduling strategy based on QoS for Cloud

Computing. IEEE.

Fig 2. Comparing performance of different algorithms

based on fitness

Fig. 3. Comparing performance of different

algorithms based on Makespan

Fig 4. Comparing performance of different algorithms

based on waiting time






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 198

5.Lee, K., & Fu, M., & Kuo, Y. (2011). A hierarchical scheduling strategy for the composition services

architecture based on cloud computing. IEEE.

6.Leey, G., & Chunz, B., & Randy H. Heterogeneity-Aware Resource Allocation and Scheduling in the

Cloud. University of California.

7.Wang, Sh., & Yan, K., & Wang, Sh. (2011). Ching-Wei Chen, "A Three-Phases Scheduling in a

Hierarchical Cloud Computing Network. IEEE.

8.Peixoto, M.L.M., & Santana, M.J., & Estrella, J.C., & Tavares, T.C., & Kuehne, B.T., and Santana, R.H.C.

(2010). A Metascheduler architecture to provide QoS on the cloud computing. IEEE.

9.Kirkpatrick, S., & Gelatt Jr, C.D., and Vecchi, M.P. (1983. Optimization by Simulated Annealing.

Science, vol. 220, no. 4598, pp. 671-680.

10.Holland, J.H. (1975). Adaptation in Natural and Artificial Systems. Univ. of Michigan Press.

11.Bonabeau, E., & Dorigo, M., and Theraulaz, G. (2000). Inspiration for Optimization from Social

Insect Behavior. Nature, vol. 406, pp. 39-42.

12.Glover, F., & Laguna, M. (1997). Tabu Search. Kluwer Academic Publishers.

13.Dueck, G., & Scheuer, T. (1990). Threshold Accepting: A General Purpose Optimization Algorithm

Appearing Superior to Simulated Annealing. J. Computational Physics, vol. 90, pp. 161-175.

14.Kennedy, J., & Eberhart, R.C. (1995). Particle swarm optimization. Proc, IEEE Conf. Neural Netw.,

vol. IV, IEEE, Piscataway, NJ, pp. 1942-1948.

15.Kennedy, J., & Eberhart, R. Particle swarm optimization. Proceedings of ICNN’95 - International

Conference on Neural Networks, vol. 4, pp. 1942–1948.

16.Pierobom, J. L., & Delgado, M. R., and Kaestner C. A. (2011). Particle swarm optimization for task

assignment problem. 10th Brazilian Congress on Computational Intelligence (CBIC2011), vol. 10, pp.

1–8.

17.Zhang, L., & Chen, Y., and Sun, R. (2008). A task scheduling algorithm based on PSO for grid

computing. International Journal of Computational Intelligence Research. vol. 4, no. 1, pp. 37–43.

18. Izakian, H., & Ladani, B. T., & Zamanifar, K., and Abraham, A. (2009). A novel particle swarm

optimization approach for grid job scheduling. Information Systems, Technology and Management -

Communications in Computer and Information Science, vol. 31, pp. 100–109.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 199

Forecast Record-Distance Running and Speed of Both the

100m and 10,000m Record

Soheil Mosavi Marefat siahkohian

Hamed mosavi Akram ebdi

Physical education,Mohageg Ardebili, Iran Physical education,Mohageg Ardebili, Iran

Nurse , Medical Sciences ardebil(Salamat Meshgin shahr), Iran Physical education,Mohageg Ardebili, Iran

Abstract

One of the most stress-distance for runners, selected material is for training and matches. Because of

the privilege of being track and field and runners of matches and earn points for your team win is

necessary that runners select the Best Top Rated material and the material practice and race day.

Fox and Matthews in his book as well as energy systems for run Harrow said, according to the chart

below The aim of this study is to predict the outcome of both the 100m and 10,000 meters.

Methodology: from 24 runners amateur record was 100 meters and 10,000 meters. Then randomly

divided into four groups of six. 400m record from one group, record 800 meters from group Two,

record 1500 meters from three group and both groups of four record was 5,000 meters. Given by

the formula A × Arb + B × Anb × X with record results 400, 800, 1500, 3000 m, with spss software

and graphical model Bland - Altman analysis was. The results showed that one can use the formula A

× Arb + B × Anb × X record 200m(p=0.04), 400m (p=0.07), 800m(0.011), 1500m(p=0.001)

,300m(p=.0001) and 5000m(p=0.001).meters before predicted.

A= Aerobic percent share of the graph is taken.

Arb = Over 10,000 meters averaging 100 yards a person has.

B = Percent share of anaerobic shown in Fig.

Anb = 100 meters individual record.

X = 100 meter distance record that we want to predict.

Keywords: Forecast record,400m, 1500m, 800m, 3000m






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 200

1.Introduction

To predict two records in track and field there are many ways, most of which are based on the record

of the various sprints among them, the forecast record 150 to 600 meter sprints on the running of

150 to 600 meters, a person running a two run to predict the run could realize another record (17).

It also uses a potential athletes and sizes that can at the same speed and frequency with perfect

rhythm and total mileage to over 1500 meters and 800 meters record has been predicted the need to

go through a specific protocol is ,800 meters runners to predict their record should warm up for 10

minutes after for one minute sprints should know and record the distance the three-minute break

and again a minute to quickly run the total mileage put on its own formula the total mileage put on

its own formula(18).These provisions only on running out and no attention was given to energy

systems used in run. The important thing is that such predictions require protocol properties and

can only run one or predict the properties. According to override the system of energy used in the

runs and differences as well as a general formula for all runs that it can be for the entire two are

used, the purpose of the present study using two runs 100 and 10,000 meters for the record nose

runs, the system will power will help.

2.Method

Of 24 subjects randomly from the student's school of physical education were selected city Meshgin

shahr ,100m and 10,000m record at the sports stadium was their record was recorded and then

subjects were randomly divided into six groups of four. 200m from the band and record a record that

was recorded, of Group 1, 200m record and record it was recorded. Of Group 2, 400m record and

record it was recorded. Of Group 3, 800m record and record it was recorded. Of Group 4, 1500m

record and record it was recorded. Of Group 5, 3000m record and record it was recorded. Of Group

6, 5000m record and record it was recorded. Then all records with predictions that the formula A ×

Arb + B × Anb × X and graph energy system by spss software and graphical model Bland-Altman

analysis was and the degree of significance for each of records was 200m(p=0.04), 400m (p=0.07),

800m(0.011), 1500m(p=0.001) ,300m(p=.0001) and 5000m(p=0.001).

A= Aerobic percent share of the graph is taken.

Arb = Over 10,000 meters averaging 100 yards a person has.

B = Percent share of anaerobic shown in Fig.

Anb = 100 meters individual record.

X = 100 meter distance record that we want to predict.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 201


To predict two records in track and field there are many ways, most of which are based on the record

of the various sprints among them, the forecast record 150 to 600 meter sprints on the running of

150 to 600 meters, a person running a two run to predict the run could realize another record (17).

It also uses a potential athletes and sizes that can at the same speed and frequency with perfect

rhythm and total mileage to over 1500 meters and 800 meters record has been predicted the need to

go through a specific protocol is ,800 meters runners to predict their record should warm up for 10

minutes after for one minute sprints should know and record the distance the three-minute break

and again a minute to quickly run the total mileage put on its own formula the total mileage put on

its own formula(18).These provisions only on running out and no attention was given to energy

systems used in run. The important thing is that such predictions require protocol properties and

can only run one or predict the properties. According to override the system of energy used in the

runs and differences as well as a general formula for all runs that it can be for the entire two are

used, the purpose of the present study using two runs 100 and 10,000 meters for the record nose

runs, the system will power will help. Bland-Altman graphical model results showed that the above

formula can predict correctly the record.

References

1. NOAKES, T. D. (1988) Implications of exercise testing for prediction of athletic performance: a

contemporary perspective. Medicine and Science in Sports and Exercise, 20 (4), p. 319-330

2. HOPKINS, W. G. (2004) How to interpret changes in an athletic performance test. Sportscience, 8,

p. 1-7

3. HOFFMAN, J. R. et al. (1996) Relationship between athletic performance tests and playing time in

elite college basketball players. The Journal of Strength & Conditioning Research, 10 (2), p. 67-71

4. MACKENZIE, B. (2001) 400 metres Training [WWW] Available from:

http://www.brianmac.co.uk/sprints/tp400.htm [Accessed 5/5/2016]

5. MACKENZIE, B. (2001) Middle Distance Running [WWW] Available from:

http://www.brianmac.co.uk/middist/index.htm [Accessed 5/5/2016]

6. MACKENZIE, B. (2001) 5km Training Program [WWW] Available from:

http://www.brianmac.co.uk/longdist/tp5k.htm [Accessed 5/5/2016]

7. MACKENZIE, B. (2002) 3km Training [WWW] Available from:


8. MACKENZIE, B. (2001) Long Distance Running [WWW] Available from:

http://www.brianmac.co.uk/longdist/index.htm [Accessele5/5/2016]






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 202

9. MACKENZIE, B. (2001) 10km Training Program [WWW] Available from:


10. BEASHEL, P. & TAYLOR, J. (1996) Advanced Studies in Physical Education and Sport. UK: Thomas

Nelson & Sons Ltd.

11. BEASHEL, P. & TAYLOR, J. (1997) The World of Sport Examined. UK: Thomas Nelson & Sons Ltd.

12. BIZLEY, K. (1994) Examining Physical Education. Oxford; Heinemann Educational Publishers

13. DAVIS, B. et al. (2000) Physical Education and the Study of Sport. UK: Harcourt Publishers Ltd.

14. GALLIGAN, F. et al. (2000) Advanced PE for Edexcel. Oxford; Heinemann Educational Publishers

15. McARDLE, W. et al. (2000) Essentials of Exercise Physiology. 2nd ed. Philadelphia: Lippincott

Williams & Wilkins

16. CHU, D. (1996) Explosive Power and Strength. USA; Human Kinetics Publishers, Inc.

17. DICK, F. (1987) Sprints and Relays. 5th ed. London: BAAB. p. 22-23

18. MACKENZIE, B. (1997) Kosmin Test [WWW] Available from:

http://www.brianmac.co.uk/kosmin.htm [Accessed 3/6/2016]






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 203

The Effect of Submaximal Exercise Combined with Weight

Training and Muscle Hypertrophy Limits Blood Flow to the

Arm

Soheil Mosavi Marefat siahkohian

Hamed mosavi Akram ebdi

Physical education,Mohageg Ardebili, Iran Physical education,Mohageg Ardebili, Iran

Nurse , Medical Sciences ardebil(Salamat Meshgin shahr), Iran Physical education,Mohageg Ardebili, Iran

Abstract

Increase muscle size for most people is a goal for fitness that many people act in any way to increase

muscle size. American college and many researchers suggested exercises is caused hypertrophy But

submaximal exercises with restriction of blood flow can also cause muscle hypertrophy? Which

method is better performance? The aim of this study was to evaluate the effect of combined strength

and submaximal exercise congestion on the hypertrophy of the muscles of the arms reaction

students physical education city Meshgin Shahr. Methods: 24 students selected randomly and were

divided into four groups of six that one group students with 20%1RM with restriction of blood

flow(cut off blood flow to the arm with a tourniquet during move), two group with 20%1RM, three

group with 70%1RM , four group without doing any exercise (control group) were selected. sessions

of three weeks each with three sets of ten repetitions were. They were the pre-test and post-test and

data using spss software and repeated measure (P≤0.05) and ANCOVA analysis was performed to

remove the Type I error. Results showed that in one group (P = 0.145), two group (P = 0.811), three

group (P = 0.061) and four group (0.363) were that there was no significant impact. But increasing

muscle size were observed in groups of three and one that the people who worked with 70% of one

repetition maximum was evident.

Keywords: hypertrophy, submaximal exercise, limits blood flow, weight training






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 204

1.Introduction

Resistance Training activities are being incorporated in nearly all comprehensive exercise programs.

While most health and fitness professionals recognize the acute program variables utilized in

Resistance Training activities (sets, reps, intensity/load, volume, rest, exercise selection, exercise

order, etc.) One of the most important research and propose to increase muscle mass and strength

by America College (ACSM) is that the minimum weight and pressure to increase strength and

muscle mass 65 to 70% of one repetition maximum (1 RM) is. The new method used to increase

muscle size and strength exercises are very low intensity loads (20% 1RM) with limits blow follow.

A growing body of research has demonstrated the effectiveness of exercise (low-intensity

resistance training) combined with blood flow restriction for increased muscular strength

and hypertrophy.

Blood flow restriction as an accessory to a variety of different exercise modes(lowintensityresistance

exercise)has recently become a popular research topic.

Hypothetically speaking, the potential mechanisms for these adaptations may Include, hypoxia

induced additional or preferential recruitment of fast-

twitch muscle fibers, greater duration of metabolic acidosis via the trapping and accumulation of intr

amuscular protons (H+ ions) and stimulation of metaboreceptors, possibly eliciting an exaggerated a

cute systemic hormonal response. external pressure-

induced differences in contractile mechanics and sarcolemma deformation,

resulting in enhanced growth factor expression and intracellular signalling , metabolic adaptations

to the fast glycolytic system that stem from compromised oxygen delivery, production of reactive

oxygen species that promotes tissue growth, such gradient-induced reactive hyperemia after

removal of the external pressure, which induces intracellular swelling and stretches cytoskeletal

structures that may promote tissue growth, and activation of myogenic stem cells with subsequent

myonuclear fusion with mature muscle fibers and etc (3). Low-intensity (20 –50% of 1 RM)

resistance training, combined with restricted venous blood flow from the working muscle (Kaatsu

resistance training), may provide an alternative training method to the traditional high-intensity

resistance training programs currently being used(4). In recent years, a number of publications have

reported that Kaatsu resistance training can result in significant and rapid increases in muscle

hypertrophy (5,6,7). A previous study reported that increased leg circumference, an index of muscle

swelling, was more pronounced in blood flow restriction than in non- blood flow restriction

immediately after low- intensity knee extension exercise(8). Because blood flow restriction requires

the use of an elastic cuff that is placed at the proximal end of the limbs, the restricted blood flow is

only applicable to appendicular muscles. Consequently, previous blood flow restriction training






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 205

studies have focused on the physiological adaptations of appendicular muscles. However, the effect

of low-intensity blood flow restriction training on non-flow-restricted trunk musculature has not

been explored. Our previous study indicated that neuromuscular activity during low-intensity

blood flow restriction bench press exercise increases not only in the blood flow restricted arm

muscle (triceps brachii) but also in non-restricted chest muscle (pectoralis major) compared with

same exercise without blood flow restriction (12).

BMI Weight (kg) Height(cm) Age(year) Subjects

Features

23.91±3.85 75±10 172±9 16.5±0.5

20%1RM with

Restriction of

blood flow

22.86±5.82 7405±6.5 176±6 16.5±0.5 20% 1 RM

22.96±4.44 71±11 172.5±7.5 16.5±0.5 70% 1 RM

20.91±4.01 64.5±14.5 171.5±6.5 16.5±0.5 Without any

exercise






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 206

Method

A quasi-experimental methods that for this the effect of the independent variable (submaximal

exercise with blood flow restriction) in the experimental group on the dependent variable

(maximum strength and arm size) was measured with pre-test and post-test. The sample of the

study, 24 students were Meshgin shahr city school physical education that randomly selected and

randomly divided into 4 groups of 6 student where Group 1 Exercises 20% of one repetition

maximum per person with restricted blood flow, group 2 with 20% of one repetition maximum any

individual, group 3 with 70% of one repetition maximum for each student, group 4 without any

resistance training for 3 weeks and 5 days a week and each session 3 repeat 10, In the biceps with

dumbbells and only trained with the right arm. 48 hours ago maximal strength and size right arm,

height, weight, age as one repetition maximum test was measured as before.

Table 1 Separation of categories

After three weeks of training were taken again after the test . According to the normal distribution

(Kolmogorov-Smirnov test) were used for the analysis of parametric tests and to changes within the

group and between groups and between pre- and post-test by repeated measures was used for the

condition existed sphericity and a significant degree of pre and post-test groups, in one group (P =

0.145), two group (P = 0.811), three group (P = 0.061) and four group (0.363) were that there was

no significant impact. Statistically significant difference was set at p≤0.05.


One of the most important concerns of athletes increase muscle mass and non-athletes and those

looking for a suitable organ is the ACSM is very useful recommendations that the intensity of 65% to

70% of one repetition maximum pressure to increase muscle mass is at least as well as many studies

have shown that high intensity 65% of one repetition maximum increases muscle size. So can you

see by limiting blood and very low-intensity exercise the same results can be achieved than 70% of

maximal strength training achieved? Practice with 20% of one repetition maximum by limiting blood

flow to the muscles of the arm with a tourniquet When Hyprtrfy no significant effect on motor

performance. The findings show that the restriction of blood flow with submaximal exercise and high

intensity workouts and ACSM recommend that a minimum intensity to increase to 65 to 70% of one

repetition maximum in three weeks would not be. But training with the nearest group to 20% of one

repetition maximum was at 70% of one repetition maximum. Perhaps if we continue the exercises






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 207

for a longer time than the significance level is significant. Although the training was not significantly

limit blood flow levels (p = 0.145) but this method can be used in the course of the training is to

increase muscle mass.

References

1. Blood flow restriction during lowintensity resistance exercise increases S6K1

phosphorylation and muscle protein synthesis. J Appl Physiol 103: 903–910, 2007. First published

June 14, 2007; doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.00195.2007 2. Intramuscular metabolism during low-intensity resistance exercise with blood flow

restriction. J Appl Physiol 106: 1119–1124, 2009. First published February 12, 2009;

doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.90368.2008.

3. Nielsen, JL, Aagaard, P, Bech, RD, Nygaard, T, Hyid, LG, Wernborn, M, Suetta, C, and Frandsen,

U. Proliferation of myogenic stem cells in human skeletal muscle in response to lowload resistance tr

aining with blood flow restriction. J Physiol 590: 4351–4361, 2012.

4. Muscle size and strength are increased following walk training with restricted venous blood

flow from the leg muscle, Kaatsu-walk training. J Appl Physiol 100: 1460–1466, 2006. First published

December 8, 2005 doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.01267.2005.

5. Takarada Y, Takazawa H, Sato Y, Takenoshita S, Tanaka Y, and Ishii N. Effects of resistance

exercise combined with moderate vascular occlusion on muscular function in humans. J Appl Physiol

88: 2097–2106, 2000.

6. Takarada Y, Sato Y, and Ishii N. Effects of resistance exercise combined with vascular

occlusion on muscle function in athletes. Eur J Appl Physiol 86: 308–314, 2002.

7. Abe T, Yasuda Midorikawa T T, Sato Y, Kearns CF, Inoue K, Koizumi K, and Ishii N. Skeletal

muscle size and circulating IGF-1 are increased after two weeks of twice daily Kaatsu resistance

training. Int J KAATSU Training Res 1: 6–12, 2005.

8. Fry CS, Glynn EL, Drummond MJ, Timmerman KL, Fujita S, et al. (2010) Blood flow

restriction exercise stimulates mTORC1 signaling and muscle protein synthesis in older men. J Appl

Physiol 108: 1199–209.


flow from the leg muscle, Kaatsu-walk training. J Appl Physiol 100: 1460–1466, 2006. First published

December 8, 2005; doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.01267.2005 10. Todd A. Maugans, Chad Farley, Mekibib Altaye, James Leach and Kim M. Cecil Pediatric

Sports-Related Concussion Produces Cerebral Blood Flow Alterations DOI: 10.1542/peds.2011-

2083; originally published online November 30, 2011; 2012;129;28 11. Pope, ZK, Willardson, JM, and Schoenfeld, BJ. Exercise and blood flow restriction. J Strength C

ond Res 27(10): 2914–2926, 2013






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 208

12. Yasuda T, Brechue WF, Fujita T, Sato Y, Abe T. Muscle activation during low-intensity muscle

contractions with restricted blood flow. J Sports Sci (2009); 27: 479–489.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 209

The Effect of Combination of Strength Arm Muscles

Following Exercise Maximum Congestion Backlash

Soheil Mosavi

Marefat Siahkohian Lotfali bolboli

Hamed Mosavi

Physical education,Mohageg Ardebili, Iran Physical education,Mohageg Ardebili, Iran Physical education,Mohageg Ardebili, Iran

Nurse , Medical Sciences ardebil, Salamat Meshgin shahr, Iran

Abstract

Strength muscle, increased volume muscle and keep it is one of the most important factors in

athletes and sports. Thus, as a result of injury, aging, disease and intolerance more pressure to

increase strength, use the following exercises to increase muscle size and strength recommended

maximum. The aim of this study was to evaluate the effect of combined strength and sub maximal

exercise congestion arm strength muscle in response to students' physical education city Meshgin

Shahr. Methods: 24 students selected randomly and were divided into four groups of six that one

group students with 20%1RM with restriction of blood flow(cut off blood flow to the arm with a

tourniquet during move), two group with 20%1RM, three group with 70%1RM , four group without

doing any exercise (control group) were selected. Sessions of three weeks each with three sets of ten

repetitions were. They were the pre-test and post-test and data using spss software and repeated

measure (P≤0.05) and ANCOVA analysis was performed to remove the Type I error. Results showed

that in the one group (P = 0.001) and three group (P = 0.003) were significant impact, but in two

group (P = 0.102) and four group (P = 0.060) showed no significant effect. The findings suggest that

sub maximal exercise with blood limits can also be like 70% of one repetition maximum increases

muscle strength.

Keywords: hypertrophy, submaximal exercise, limits blood flow, weight training






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 210

1.Introduction

Resistance Training activities are being incorporated in nearly all comprehensive exercise programs.

While most health and fitness professionals recognize the acute program variables utilized in

Resistance Training activities (sets, reps, intensity/load, volume, rest, exercise selection, exercise

order, etc.) One of the most important research and propose to increase muscle mass and strength

by America College (ACSM) is that the minimum weight and pressure to increase strength and

muscle mass 65 to 70% of one repetition maximum (1 RM) is. The new method used to increase

muscle size and strength exercises are very low intensity loads (20% 1RM) with limits blow follow.

A growing body of research has demonstrated the effectiveness of exercise (low-intensity

resistance training) combined with blood flow restriction for increased muscular strength and

hypertrophy. Blood flow restriction as an accessory to a variety of different exercise modes (low-

intensity resistance exercise) has recently become a popular research topic.

Hypothetically speaking, the potential mechanisms for these adaptations may Include, hypoxia-

induced additional or preferential recruitment of fast-twitch muscle fibers, greater duration of

metabolic acidosis via the trapping and accumulation of intramuscular protons (H+ ions) and stimula

tion of metaboreceptors, possibly eliciting an exaggerated acute systemic hormonal response.

external pressure-induced differences in contractile mechanics and sarcolemma deformation,

resulting in enhanced growth factor expression and intracellular signalling , metabolic adaptations

to the fast glycolytic system that stem from compromised oxygen delivery, production of reactive

oxygen species that promotes tissue growth, such gradient-induced reactive hyperemia after

removal of the external pressure, which induces intracellular swelling and stretches cytoskeletal

structures that may promote tissue growth, and activation of myogenic stem cells with subsequent

myonuclear fusion with mature muscle fibers and etc (3).

Low-intensity (20 –50% of 1 RM) resistance training, combined with restricted venous blood flow

from the working muscle (Kaatsu resistance training), may provide an alternative training method to

the traditional high-intensity resistance training programs currently being used(4). In recent years,

a number of publications have reported that Kaatsu resistance training can result in significant and

rapid increases in muscle hypertrophy (5,6,7). A previous study reported that increased leg

circumference, an index of muscle swelling, was more pronounced in blood flow restriction than in

non- blood flow restriction immediately after low- intensity knee extension exercise(8). Because

blood flow restriction requires the use of an elastic cuff that is placed at the proximal end of the

limbs, the restricted blood flow is only applicable to appendicular muscles. Consequently, previous

blood flow restriction training studies have focused on the physiological adaptations of

appendicular muscles. However, the effect of low-intensity blood flow restriction training on non-

flow-restricted trunk musculature has not been explored. Our previous study indicated that

neuromuscular activity during low-intensity blood flow restriction bench press exercise increases






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 211

not only in the blood flow restricted arm muscle (triceps brachii) but also in non-restricted chest

muscle (pectoralis major) compared with same exercise without blood flow restriction (12).

2.Method

A quasi-experimental methods that for this the effect of the independent variable (submaximal

exercise with blood flow restriction) in the experimental group on the dependent variable

(maximum strength) was measured with pre-test and post-test. The sample of the study, 24 students

were Meshgin shahr city school physical education that randomly selected and randomly divided

into 4 groups of 6 student where Group 1 Exercises 20% of one repetition maximum per person with

restricted blood flow, group 2 with 20% of one repetition maximum any individual, group 3 with

70% of one repetition maximum for each student, group 4 without any resistance training for 3

weeks and 5 days a week and each session 3 repeat 10, In the biceps with dumbbells and only

trained with the right arm. 48 hours ago maximal strength right arm, height, weight, age as one

repetition maximum test was measured as before.

Table 1 Separation of categories

BMI Weight (kg) Height(cm) Age(year) Subjects Features

23.91±3.85 75±10 172±9 16.5±0.5

20%1RM with

Restriction of

blood flow

22.86±5.82 7405±6.5 176±6 16.5±0.5 20% 1 RM

22.96±4.44 71±11 172.5±7.5 16.5±0.5 70% 1 RM

20.91±4.01 64.5±14.5 171.5±6.5 16.5±0.5 Without any

exercise






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 212

After three weeks of training were taken again after the test . According to the normal distribution

(Kolmogorov-Smirnov test) were used for the analysis of parametric tests and to changes within the

group and between groups and between pre- and post-test by repeated measures was used for the

condition existed sphericity and a significant degree of pre and post-test groups, group 1 (p = 0.001)

and group 3 (p = 0.003) were significant effects of exercise. But the group 2(p = 0.102) and group 4(p

= 0.060) were not significant training effect. Statistically significant difference was set at p≤0.05.


Increase muscle strength when old age, disease and injury, one of the most important concerns of

athletes and non-athletes and those who are looking for a better life. The ACSM is very useful

recommendations that the intensity of at least 65 al 70% of one repetition maximum pressure is to

increase muscle strength. As well as many studies have shown that high intensity 65% of one

repetition maximum increases muscle size and strength to be increased. It can restrict blood and

very low-intensity exercise to the same conclusions that 70 percent of maximal strength training will

result achieved. Practice with 20% of one repetition maximum by limiting blood flow to the

hemostatic when running increases the maximum power that can be replaced by other strength

training.

The findings show that the restriction of blood flow with submaximal exercise increases muscle

strength as well as high intensity workouts and ACSM recommend that a minimum intensity to

increase to 65 to 70% of one repetition maximum was announced that the cause. For people such as

sports injuries, the elderly and those who can not tolerate high-intensity this method it is proposed

to increase the maximum power. 70% of one repetition maximum-intensity exercises also increases

muscle strength, but those exercises practiced with intensity 20 percent experienced a significant

increase in muscle strength arm as well as those who did not exercise any power in these three

weeks had not done any significant increase in power did not (control group). This method of

strength training to increase muscle strength, body parts can be cut off or restrict the flow of blood

to be used. It should be noted that when implementing the restrictions only apply bloodstream.

References

13. Blood flow restriction during lowintensity resistance exercise increases S6K1

phosphorylation and muscle protein synthesis. J Appl Physiol 103: 903–910, 2007. First published

June 14, 2007; doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.00195.2007






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 213

14. Intramuscular metabolism during low-intensity resistance exercise with blood flow

restriction. J Appl Physiol 106: 1119–1124, 2009. First published February 12, 2009;

doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.90368.2008.

15. Nielsen, JL, Aagaard, P, Bech, RD, Nygaard, T, Hyid, LG, Wernborn, M, Suetta, C, and Frandsen,

U. Proliferation of myogenic stem cells in human skeletal muscle in response to lowload resistance

training with blood flow restriction. J Physiol 590: 4351–4361, 2012.


flow from the leg muscle, Kaatsu-walk training. J Appl Physiol 100: 1460–1466, 2006. First

published December 8, 2005 doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.01267.2005.

17. Takarada Y, Takazawa H, Sato Y, Takenoshita S, Tanaka Y, and Ishii N. Effects of resistance

exercise combined with moderate vascular occlusion on muscular function in humans. J Appl

Physiol 88: 2097–2106, 2000.

18. Takarada Y, Sato Y, and Ishii N. Effects of resistance exercise combined with vascular

occlusion on muscle function in athletes. Eur J Appl Physiol 86: 308–314, 2002.

19. Abe T, Yasuda Midorikawa T T, Sato Y, Kearns CF, Inoue K, Koizumi K, and Ishii N. Skeletal

muscle size and circulating IGF-1 are increased after two weeks of twice daily Kaatsu resistance

training. Int J KAATSU Training Res 1: 6–12, 2005.

20. Fry CS, Glynn EL, Drummond MJ, Timmerman KL, Fujita S, et al. (2010) Blood flow

restriction exercise stimulates mTORC1 signaling and muscle protein synthesis in older men. J Appl

Physiol 108: 1199–209.


flow from the leg muscle, Kaatsu-walk training. J Appl Physiol 100: 1460–1466, 2006. First

published December 8, 2005; doi:10.1152/japplphysiol.01267.2005 22. Todd A. Maugans, Chad Farley, Mekibib Altaye, James Leach and Kim M. Cecil Pediatric

Sports-Related Concussion Produces Cerebral Blood Flow Alterations DOI: 10.1542/peds.2011-

2083; originally published online November 30, 2011; 2012;129;28 23. Pope, ZK, Willardson, JM, and Schoenfeld, BJ. Exercise and blood flow restriction. J Strength C

ond Res 27(10): 2914–2926, 2013

24. Yasuda T, Brechue WF, Fujita T, Sato Y, Abe T. Muscle activation during low-intensity muscle

contractions with restricted blood flow. J Sports Sci (2009); 27: 479–489.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 214

A study of domestication and foreignization strategies in

the Persian translation of "IL GROTTESCO QUOTIDIANO"

Tohid Siami

Laleh Mousavi

Academic staff member, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran

MA student of TPSOL,University of Mohaghegh Ardabili, Iran

Abstract

The purpose of the present study was to investigate the use of Venuti’s domestication and

foreignization strategies in the translation of the book "il grottesco quotidiano" from Italian into

Persian. All cases of domestication and foreignization were identified and organized as single lexical

items, expressions and idiomatic expressions. The data then were analyzed according to the criteria

introduced by Venuti. In this study, Newmark's methods are also used for translating culture-specific

concepts. The results of the data analysis revealed domestication to be the dominant strategy in

rendering culture-bound lexical items or expressions.

Keywords: domestication, foreignization, culture-bound lexical items or expressions,

Venuti,Newmark, il grottesco quotidiano

1.Introduction

The terms foreignization and domestication were introduced into translation studies (TS) by

Lawrence Venuti (1995). Generally speaking, domestication designates the type of translation in

which a transparent, fluent style is adopted to minimize the strangeness of the foreign text for target

language readers, while foreignization means a target text is produced which deliberately breaks

target conventions by retaining something of the foreignness of the original (Shuttleworth & Cowie

1997:59).






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 215

The conflict between domestication and foreignization as opposite translation strategies can be

regarded as the cultural and political rather than linguistic extension of the time-worn controversy

over free translation and literal translation (Wang Dongfeng 2002：24). That is to say, only when

there are differences in both linguistic presentation and cultural connotation, domestication and

foreignization exist. The present paper seeks an objective way to test the plausibility and practical

applicability of the domestication/foreignization in the translation of culture specific lexical items

and idiomatic expression in the Persian Translation of "IL GROTTESCO QUOTIDIANO."

3. Theoretical Foundations

Domestication is a translation strategy of using “a transparent, fluent, ‘invisible’ style in order to

minimize the foreignness of the target text (TT)” (Munday 2008: 144). By contrast, foreignization is

not transparent and it eschews fluency for a more heterogeneous mix of discourses in order to

signify the difference of the foreign text (Venuti 1995).

The domestication vs. foreignization dichotomy is comparable to another age-old dichotomy, namely

that between free and literal translation. However, those two dichotomies are not synonymous. The

free vs. literal dichotomy refers to linguistic form, while the domestication vs. foreignization

dichotomy concerns the two cultures involved, i.e. whether an ST is adapted to the target culture, or

the foreign cultural elements are preserved.

In the German culture of the Classical and Romantic periods, Friedrich Schleiermacher proposed two

paths that ‘der eigentliche Uebersetzer’ can take: “Either the translator leaves the author in peace, as

much as possible, and moves the reader towards him; or he leaves the reader in peace, as much as

possible, and moves the author towards him.” (1813: 241–242). The first path is similar to Venuti's

foreignizing translation, whereas the second path is similar to Venuti's domesticating translation.

Schleiermacher sees foreignization and domestication as binary opposites, and he explicitly claims

they must not be mixed; the translator has to opt for one or the other method and then be consistent

in its use. Combining the two methods would lead to unreliable results; the author and the reader

could completely miss each other (Schleiermacher 1813: 47). By contrast, Venuti states that

domestication and foreignization are ‘heuristic concepts designed to promote thinking and research’

rather than binary opposites (Munday: 145–146).

Both Schleiermacher and Venuti advocate foreignizing translation, but for different reasons.

Schleiermacher advocates foreignizing method because it puts the language in motion (1813: 69).






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 216

Schleiermacher is explicitly against the domesticating method because he thinks that the thought

and its expression cannot be separated. There is no way to make a foreign author speak the domestic

language as if it were his own.

The reason Venuti is opposed to domestication is not because it is impossible, but because it is

unfair. According to Venuti (1995: 20), domestication involves ‘an ethnocentric reduction of the

foreign text to target-language cultural values.’ Another negative consequence of domestication,

according to Venuti, is that it makes the translator invisible because the translation reads like an

original. Venuti therefore prefers foreignization as a form of resistance to the ‘violent, ethnocentric’

(Anglo-American) cultural values.

In the contemporary international translation field, it was Eugene Nida who first advocated

domestication (Yang 2010: 78). Nida differentiated between ‘formal’ and ‘dynamic’ (functional)

equivalence. While ‘formal equivalence’ strives to preserve form as well as content, ‘dynamic

equivalence’ aims at producing in translation an equivalent effect on the target readers that the

original text had on the original readers. Nida preferred ‘dynamic equivalence,’ mostly because he

was dealing with Bible translation, where the most important thing is to successfully carry the

message through, disregarding the form of the message.

Both domestication and foreignization implicate manipulation of the text. Whether one or the

other strategy will be applied depends on variables such as the purpose of the translation (Skopos),

the status of the receiving literary system (polysystem theory), i.e. the power relations between the

source and the target literary systems, and other variables of the historical, social and cultural

setting in which the translation takes place. In order to see why a certain strategy is used in a certain

context, we have to turn to the analysis of real translations in the following sections of the paper.

3. Methods of translation

Newmark (1988b) mentions the difference between translation methods and translation

procedures. He writes that, "while translation methods relate to whole texts, translation procedures

are used for sentences and the smaller units of language". He goes on to refer to the following

methods of translation:

Word-for-word translation: in which the SL word order is preserved and the words

translated singly by their most common meanings, out of context.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 217

Literal translation: in which the SL grammatical constructions are converted to their nearest

TL equivalents, but the lexical words are again translated singly, out of context.

Faithful translation: it attempts to produce the precise contextual meaning of the original

within the constraints of the TL grammatical structures.

Semantic translation: which differs from 'faithful translation' only in as far as it must take

more account of the aesthetic value of the SL text.

Adaptation: which is the freest form of translation, and is used mainly for plays (comedies)

and poetry; the themes, characters, plots are usually preserved, the SL culture is converted to the TL

culture and the text is rewritten.

Free translation: it produces the TL text without the style, form, or content of the original.

Idiomatic translation: it reproduces the 'message' of the original but tends to distort nuances

of meaning by preferring colloquialisms and idioms where these do not exist in the original.

Communicative translation: it attempts to render the exact contextual meaning of the

original in such a way that both content and language are readily acceptable and comprehensible to

the readership (1988b: 45-47).

4. Methodology

Different scholars have analyzed the strategies and procedures involved in the translation of CSIs ,

suggesting various classifications of such strategies. For the purpose of this paper, we draw upon one

of the pioneers in this field, Newmark (1988). He suggests a number of procedures for translating

CSIs, namely transference, naturalization, cultural equivalence, functional equivalence, descriptive

equivalence, synonymy, through-translation, shift or transposition, modulation, recognized

translation, translation label, compensation, componential analysis, reduction and expansion,

paraphrase, couplet, and notes. The Cultural specific concepts were culled from the ST and TT and

were classified based on The following categories: Toponyms, Anthroponyms, Means of

transportation, Date, Food and Drink, Idioms, Measuring system, Scholastic reference.

5. Data Analysis

The collected data were analysed according to the following criteria.

Transference: According to Newmark, "Transference is the process of transferring a SL word to a TL

text as a translation procedure"1. When the translators face the following cases, they should use the

1







Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 218

method of transference: name of all living or dead people, geographical names, name of the periodical

and newspapers, plays, films, etc.

Method of

translation

CSCs1

Target

language

Source

language

Word –for

word

Anthropon

ym

Floro فلورو داو نتسا

d'Avanza

Word –for

word

Toponym سن مرتینو

دی کاسترتسا

San

martino di

Costrozza

Naturalization: "This procedure succeeds transference and adapts the SL word first to the

normal pronunciation, then to the normal morphology of the TL".

Method of

translation


Word –for word Anthroponym ترزا Teresa

Word –for word Object کارت پستال La Carta

Word –for word Drink لیووناد گرم La Limonata calda

Cultural Equivalent: This strategy is "an approximate translation where a SL cultural word

is translated by a TL cultural word"1.

1

Cultural specific concepts






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 219

Method of

translation

CSCs Target

language

Source

language

Communica

tive translation

Food برنج سفیذ In bianco

Communica

tive translation

Drink هشروبات

الکلی

Il vino

Functional equivalent: According to Newmark, functional equivalent "applied to cultural

words, requires the use of a culture-free word, sometimes with a new specific term"2.

Method of

translation

CSCs Target

language

Source

language

Literal

translation

Drink یک بطری

نوشیذنی عالی

Una buona

bottiglia

Descriptive equivalent: In this strategy the translator uses some descriptions to clarify the

meaning for his audience. Using this strategy enable us to have a correct perception of CSIs

by using other words and phrases.

Method of

translation

CSCs Target

language

Source

language

Literal

translation

Religious

celebration

Il luogo هکاى هقذس

rinomato

Componential analysis: Componential analysis is defined as "comparing an SL word with a TL word

which has a similar meaning but is not an obvious one-to-one equivalent, by demonstrating first

1

Newmark (1988, p.83) 2







Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 220

their common and then their differing sense components. Normally the SL word has more specific

meaning than the TL word"1


Communica

tive translation

Means of

transportation

اتوبوس

Pullman

Synonymy: According to Newmark, synonymy is defined as a "near TL equivalent to a SL

word"2.


Word-for

word

Food تخن هرغ L'uovo

Modulation: In this strategy the translators try to create the message of the SL in the TL in

conformity with the current norms of the TL.3

Method of

translation


Literal translation concept چهره شوم Un aspetto sinistro

Paraphrase: "This is an amplification or explanation of the meaning of a segment of the

text”4.

1

Newmark (1988, p.114) 2

Newmark (1988, p.84) 3

Newmark (1988, p.88) 4







Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 221

Method of

translation

CSCs Target

language

Source

language

Idiomatic translation Idiom ورق را به نفع

خود برگردانذ

Convogliare verso sè

quel fiume di miele

Through-translation: It concerns mostly the literal translation of common collocations,

names of organizations and some popular phrases.

Method of

translation


Literal translation Concept جارو جنجال Una scenata

Literal translation Concept نفس نفس

زناى

L'ansante

References

English

1.Baker, Mona. 1998. Routledge Encyclopedia of Translation Studies. London and New York:

Routledge. pp.240-242.

2.Lefevere, André, ed. (1992). Translation/History/Culture: A Sourcebook. Edition 2003, Taylor &

Francis e-Library. London – New York: Routledge.

3.Munday, Jeremy (2008). Introducing Translation Studies: Theories and Applications. 2nd Edition.

London – New York: Routledge.

4.Newmark, Peter (1988). Approaches to Translation. New York – London: Prentice Hall

International.

5.Nida, Eugene. 2001. Language and Culture-Contexts in Translation. Shanghai: Shanghai Foreign

Language Education Press.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 222

6.Schleiermacher, Friedrich (1813). Ueber die verschiedenen Methoden des Uebersezens.

7.Reproduced in Das Problem des Übersetzens 1963, ed. Hans Joachim Störig. Stuttgart: Henry

Goverts Verlag, 38–69.

8.Shuttleworth, M. & M. Cowie. 1997. Dictionary of Translation Studies. Manchester, UK: St Jerome

Publishing.

9.Venuti, Lawrence (1995). The Translator’s Invisibility: A History of Translation. London - New York:

Routledge.

10.Venuti, Lawrence (1998a). The Scandals of Translation: Towards an Ethics of Difference. London -

New York: Routledge.

11.Venuti, Lawrence (1998b). Strategies of translation. Baker, Mona, ed. Routledge Encyclopedia of

Translation Studies. Edition 2003, Taylor & Francis e-Library. London – New York: Routledge, 240–

244.

فارسی

نظریه ترجمه، دیروز و امروز )دانشگبه فردوسی مشهد( "خساعی فر، علی، -12

اجتمبعی به بررسی مسئله برابری در ترجمه ادبیبت داستبنی از انگلیسی به -رویکردی نشبنه شنبختی"، 1386صیبمی، توحید، -13

،رسبله دوره دکترای زببنشنبسی همگبنی."فبرسی

، 22, شمبره 6، مطبلعبت ترجمه، دوره "برخورد بب هم آیی هب در ترجمه هبی انگلیسی به فبرسی"، 1387گیتی، تببستبن کریم خبنلویی، -14

9 -22از صفحه

55-63، صص32، مترجم، سبل نهم، شمبره "تعبدل در ترجمه"، 1379کوشب، منصور، -15

12-15، صص 74)مترجم(، سبل چهبردهم، شمبره ، خساعی فر، علی"استراتژیهبی ترجمه"، 1374ونوتی، الرنس، -16

.نبمه کبرشنبسی ارشد ، پبیبن"در ایران 80بومی سبزی و بیگبنه سبزی در ترجمه ادبیبت کودک در دهه " 1391یسدی، سلمب زینب، -17






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 223

Physical pr1operties and mechanical behavior under compressive loading of Green Walnut

Zahra Basati Salman Habibi

Vali Rasooli-Sharabian

PhD. Student in Mechanical Biosystem Engineering, Department of Biosystem Engineering, Faculty of Agricultural Sciences and Natural Resources, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili. Iran.

MSc student of Agricultural Machinery Engineering, Agricultural Machinery Engineering Dept., Faculty of Agricultural Engineering and Technology, University of Tehran, Karaj,Iran

Assistant Prof. in Department of Biosystem Engineering, Faculty of Agricultural Sciences and Natural Resources, University of

Mohaghegh Ardabili. Iran

Abstract In this paper some physical and mechanical properties of walnut were determined in order to design processing

equipment and facilities. Physical properties investigated include, size, sphericity index, fruit density, mass,

volume, geometric mean diameter and surface area. Mechanical properties studied were the coefficient of

friction, the rupture force and the rupture energy. The average green walnut‘s length, width, thickness,

sphericity, fruit density, mean mass, volume, geometric mean diameter and surface area were 48.15 mm, 42.92

mm, 39.73 mm, 90.32%, 0.91 g/cm3, 40.75 g, 45 cm3, 43.45 mm and 59.4 cm2 respectively at 66.15% moisture

content (w.b.); while the corresponding values of Walnut (without green shell) at 47.14% moisture content

(w.b.) were 34.61mm, 33.46 mm, 30.99 mm, 95.54%, 0.76 g/cm3, 13.73 g, 18.22 cm3, 32.94 mm and 34.21 cm2,

respectively. On three different surfaces, the static coefficient of friction varies from 0.48 to 0.69 for green

walnut and from 0.29 to 0.47 for walnut. The compression speeds were carried out at 50, 100, and 200

mm/min. The rupture strength of green walnut and walnut decreased with increasing of moisture content while

rupture strength increased with an increase of compression speeds. These data are useful in the design and

development of handling and processing machines, which are not available currently in literature

Keywords: Walnut, Physical and Mechanical Properties, Compression speeds, Rupture strength






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 224

1.Introduction

Iran with the production of 170,000 tones of walnut (Juglans regia L.) was ranking as fourth

producers in the world (FAO, 2008). Persian walnut, Juglans regia, is one of the most important

nutritive nut crops. Iran is considered as one of the walnut centers of diversity and cultivation in

middle-eastern part of the world. The main benefits of walnut kernels include lowering cholesterol,

increasing the ratio of high-density lipoprotein cholesterol to total cholesterol, reducing

inflammation, and improving arterial function (Patel, 2005). Walnuts contribute nutrients that are

essential to a healthful lifestyle. Eating walnuts is one of the easiest things a person can do to

improve his or her health. Best of all, their taste are great and are ideally suited for inclusion in any

diet as part of meals or snacks. The most important processing step after walnut harvesting is

separation of kernel from the shell. This process is still carried out manually in Iran, which results in

increased cost and processing time for kernel extraction (Borghei et al., 2000). Therefore, a walnut

cracker should be developed and designed on the basis of physical characteristics and mechanical

properties of walnuts. The physical and mechanical properties of walnut are important to design and

development of the equipment for processing, transportation, sorting, separation, storing and

cracking machine. Designing such equipment without consideration of these properties may yield

poor results. Therefore the determination and consideration of these properties have an important

role (Taheri-Garavand et al., 2009). Among these physical properties, length, width, thickness, mass,

volume and surface areas are the most important ones in sizing systems (Mohsenin, 1986). Koyuncu

et al. (2004) determined the effects of the compression position, geometric mean diameter and shell

thickness of the walnut on the force, specific deformation and energy required to achieve rupture nut

shell and optimum kernel extraction quality. They found that the cracking nuts at the length position

required less force and yielded the best kernel extraction quality. Many studies have been reported

on the physical properties of fruits, grains and seeds, such as Juniperus drupacea fruits (Akinci et al.,

2004) and bambara groundnuts ( Baryeh, 2001). The regression analysis used by Chuma et al.

(1982) to develop equations for predicting volume and surface area. They used logarithmic

transformation to develop equations for wheat kernels at 15.7% moisture content. They suggested

that the volume (V) was related to the surface area (S) by a linear regression relationship: V = 1.10S

+ 17.2. Frequently, the surface areas of fruit are determined on the basis of its diameter or weight.

Knowing the diameter or weight of a fruit, its surface area may be calculated using empirical

equations, or read from an appropriate plot (Sitkei, 1986; Frechette and Zahradnik, 1968). In

another study, Tabatabaeefar and Rajabipour (2005) recommended 11 models for predicting mass

of apples based on geometrical attributes. Several models for predicting mass of kiwi based on

physical attributes were determined and reported by Lorestani and Tabatabaeefar (2006). Also,

Khoshnam et al. (2007) used this method for predicting the mass of pomegranate fruits. They

suggested that there is a very good relationship between mass and measured volume for all varieties

of kiwi. Ebrahimi et al. (2009) studied morphological and physical characteristics of Iranian walnuts






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 225

and mass modeling of walnut. Moreover, they reported that among grading system based on

dimensions in walnut (first classification), minor diameter model with nonlinear relation was the

best and could be considered as a good model for economical and horticultural designing systems.

This information is used to design and develop the sizing systems. The objective of this study was to

investigate some physical properties of the walnut namely linear dimensions, unit mass and volume,

sphericity, fruit densities, surface area, rupture energy and coefficient of static friction against three

structural surfaces.

2.Method

From the samples, about 150 fruits were randomly obtained from a local market in the Karaj city (an

important city in date production located in the north of Iran). The fruits were transported to the

Physical Laboratory of Biosystems Faculty in the University of Tehran. All experiments were carried

out at a temperature range of 25–30 °C for three days. The moisture content of fruits was

determined in accordance with standard procedures (AOAC, 1984). In order to obtain the moisture

content, samples were kept in an oven (Iran Khodsaz) for 24 hours at 105 °C.The experiments were

conducted at moisture levels of 66.15 (walnut with shell) and 47.14% (walnut without shell) w.b.

The following methods were used in the determination of some physical and mechanical properties

of walnut. An electronic micrometer with an accuracy of 0.01 mm was used to measure the axial

dimensions of the fruits, such as; length (L), width (W) and thickness (T). From the axial dimensions,

Geometric mean diameter (Dg), arithmetic mean diameter, Da, sphericity (Sp) and surface areas (S)

were calculated by using the following equations:

b. (1)

c. (2)

d. (3)

e. (4)

where L is the length, W is the width and T is the thickness (Fig. 1.). As reported by Mohsenin (1986).






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 226

Fig. 1: schematic drawing of the 3 axes for the walnut dimension

Sample mass was measured by using a digital balance with a sensitivity of 0.01 g. The fruit density

(g/cm3) was determined using the water displacement method and were calculated by using the

following equation (Mohsenin, 1986):

(5)

where ρf and ρw are fruit and water densities (kg/m3); Ma and Mw are mass of walnut in air and

water, respectively.

The coefficient of friction, μ, was calculated as:

(6)

where α is the angle of tilt in degree (Olajide et al., 2000). Five replications were made for the

measurement of the static coefficient of friction on various surfaces, galvanized iron, plywood and

glass, in 47.14% and 66.15% moisture levels.

In this study the effects of walnut dimension, moisture content and loading rate, 50 mm/min,

100mm/min and 200 mm/min were studied on cracking force, absorbed energy and toughness.

Walnut fruit were weighed prior to an analysis of shell cracking strength using a proprietary

tension/compression testing machine (Instron Universal Testing Machine /SMT-5, SANTAM

Company, Tehran, Iran).

Energy absorbed (Ea) by the sample at rupture was determined by calculating the area under the

force– deformation curve from the following equation (Braga et al., 1999; Gupta & Das, 2000;

Mohsenin, 1978).






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 227

(7)

where Fr is the rupture force and Dr is the deformation at rupture point.

Toughness (P) is expressed as the energy absorbed by the walnut up to rupture point per unit

volume of the pit. This was calculated using the following formula (Gupta & Das, 2000; Olaniyan &

Oje, 2002).

(8)

where Ea is the energy absorbed by the fruit and V is the volume of the walnut.

Spreadsheet software, Microsoft EXCEL 2007and SPSS15 was used to analyze the data and

determine regression models between the parameters of either linear or polynomial form. In order

to estimate an apple‘s mass from measured dimensions (length, width, thickness and volume), the

following three categories of models were suggested.

1. Regression models of mass with all three dimensions (length, width, thickness).

2. Regression models of volume with all three dimensions (length, width, thickness).

3. Regression models of volume with walnut mass.


Physical properties:

The number of samples, mean, maximum and minimum values for the physical properties of

walnut are presented in Table 1. The physical properties of date fruit were described in

order to better design of a specific machine for post-harvesting operations.

Table 1: Physical properties of Iranian export walnut

Physical properties Average Max Min

L (mm) A 48.15 53.50 38.65

B 34.61 42.04 30.64






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 228

W (mm) A 42.92 49.33 38.12

B 33.46 37.91 27.46

T (mm) A 39.73 47.28 36.11

B 31.00 38.28 25.53

Dg (mm) A 43.45 47.82 37.94

B 32.94 38.91 28.13

Da (mm) A 43.57 47.84 37.95

B 33.02 38.97 28.25

M (g) A 40.75 57.44 23.85

B 13.73 22.31 5.98

V (cm3)

A 45.00 58.51 29.50

B 18.22 29.75 10.92

ρf (g/m3) A 0.91 0.98 0.70

B 0.76 0.98 0.62

S (cm2) A 59.40 71.82 45.10

B 34.21 47.54 24.85






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 229

A is walnut with shell in 66.15% moisture content and B is walnut without shell in 47.14% moisture

content.

The average length (48.15 and 34.61 mm), width (42.92 and 33.46 mm), thickness (39.73 and 31

mm), and geometric mean diameter (43.45 and 32.94 mm) of the walnut with green shell and

without green shell were recorded in this experiment, respectively. Akca and Sen (1995) showed nut

length as 39.97 mm, nut diameter as 33.59 mm and nut thickness as 34.75 of the promising walnut

genotype. This notion is in agreement with our results. The mean values of sphericity for walnut

were 90.32% for walnut with shell and 95.54% for walnut without shell. The static coefficients of

friction for walnut fruit determined with respect to galvanized iron, plywood and glass surfaces are

shown in Table 2.

Table 2: Coefficients of static friction of walnuts at different moisture contents

Moisture

contents

galvanized

iron

plywood glass

66.15 % (w.b.) 0.69 0.48 0.50

47.14 % (w.b.) 0.47 0.29 0.35

At two moisture contents, the static coefficients of friction were greatest for walnut fruits on

galvanized iron sheet.

Other researchers found that as the moisture content increased, the static coefficient of friction

increased also (Baryeh, 2002; Çalýþýr et al., 2005). The energy required to initiate nut rupture in

samples with varying walnut along the three different compression axes is presented in Fig. 2. The

rupture energy and toughness increase with an increase in compression speed for walnut with shell

and without shell.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 230

(a) (b)

(c) (d)

Fig 1: Effect of walnut dimension and loading rate on energy absorbed (a and b) and toughness (c

and d).

The energy of cracking values for walnut fruits tested in the X-axis (length) were higher than walnuts

tested in the Y and Z axes. The energy required for walnut rupture loaded along the Y-axis

(Thickness) decreased for both samples. The rupture energy observed when testing walnuts for both

samples was greater at the higher compression speeds at 200 mm/min than that of the other speeds

tested. Sharifian and Derafshi (2008) reported that the rupture energy to fracture walnut shell

increased as the compression speed raised up to 200 mm/min.

The overall mass and volume model based on three diameters and volume model based on mass, in

two types of fruits was given as follows:

A (walnut with green shell):






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 231

B (walnut without green shell):

11 models for predicting mass of apples based on geometrical attributes were recommended by

Tabatabaeefar and Rajabipour (2005). They recommended an equation calculating apple mass on

the basis of minor diameter as M= 0.08c2 – 4.74c + 5.14, R2 = 0.89. In another study, Lorestani and

Tabatabaeefar (2006) determined models for predicting mass of kiwi fruit based on physical

attributes. They recommended an equation to calculate kiwi fruit mass based on intermediate

diameter as M = 2.93b – 64.15, R2= 0.78.

4.Conclusion

1- The average mass and volume were found to be 13.73g and 18.22cm3 in 47.14% moisture content

and 40.75g and 45 cm3 in 66.15% moisture content respectively.

2- The fruit density was measured as 0.76 and 0.91 g/cm3 in 47.14% and 66.15% moisture content

respectively.

3- Linear dimensions ranged from 38.65 to 53.5 mm and 30.64 to 42.04 mm in length, 38.12 to 49.33

mm and 27.46 to 37.91 mm in width, and 36.11 to 47.28 mm and 25.53 to 38.28 in thickness for

66.15% and 47.14% moisture content respectively.

4- The geometric mean diameter, sphericity and surface area were calculated as 32.94 and 43.45

mm,

95.54% and 90.32% and 34.21 and 59.40 mm2 in 47.14% and 66.15% moisture content

respectively.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 232

7- On three different surfaces, the static coefficient of friction varies from 0.48 to 0.69 for green

walnut and from 0.29 to 0.47 for walnut without shell.

References

1. Ak-ca Y. (2001). Ceviz Yeti-ctirici sgi [Cultivation of Walnut]. Arı Ofset Matbaası, Tokat, Turkey

2. Akca, Y. and S.M. Sen, 1995. Relationship between and yield-nut characteristic in Juglans regia.

Acta Hort., 442: 81-82.

3. Akinci, I., Ozdemir, F., Topuz, A., Kabas, O., & Canakci, M. (2004). Some physical and nutritional

properties of Juniperus drupacea fruits. Journal of Food Engineering, 65, 325–331.

4. AOAC. 1984. Official methods of analysis. 14th edition. Association of Official Analytical

Chemists, Washington D.C.

5. Baryeh E.A., 2002. Physical properties of millet. J. Food Eng., 51, 39-46.

6. Baryeh, E. A. (2001). Physical properties of bambara groundnuts. Journal of Food Engineering,

47(4), 321–326

7. Borghei. A. M , J. Khazaei and T. Tavakoli. Design, Construction and Testing of Walnut Cracker.

AgEng2000 Conference. Paper No: 00-PH-029.

8. Braga G C; Couto S M; Hara T; Neto C T P A (1999). Mechanical behaviour of macadamia nut

under compression loading. Journal of Agricultural Engineering Research, 72, 239–245

9. Çalýþýr S., Marakoðlu T., Öðüt H., and Özturk O., 2005. Physical properties of rapeseed (Brassica

napus oleifera L.). Journal of Food Engineering., 69, 61-66.

10. Chuma, Y., Uchida, S., Shemsanga, H.H., 1982. Simultaneous measurement of size, surface area,

and volume of grains and soybean. Trans. ASAE 25, 1752–1756.

11. Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations

2008.http://www.fao.org/corp/statistics.

12. Frechette, R., Zahradnik, J., 1968. Thermal properties of Mc Intosh apple. Trans. ASAE 11, 21–24.

13. Gupta, R. K., & Das, S. K. (2000). Fracture resistance of sunflower seed and kernel to compressive

loading. Journal of Food Engineering, 46, 1–8.

14. Khoshnam, F., Tabatabaeefar A., GhasemiVarnamkhasti M and Borghei A.M., 2007. Mass

modeling of pomegranate (Punica granatum L) fruit with some physical characteristics. Sci.

Hortic., 114, pp 21–26.

15. Koyuncu, M.A., K. Ekinci and E. Savran, 2004. Cracking characteristics of walnut. Biosyst. Eng.,

87(3): 305-311.

16. Lorestani, A.N and Tabatabaeefar A., 2006. Modeling the mass of Kiwi fruit by geometrical

attributes. Int. Agrophysics, 20, pp 135–139.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 233

17. Mohsenin N.N., 1986. Physical Properties of Plant and Animal Materials. Gordon and Breach

Science Publishers, pp 20–89.

18. Mohsenin, N. N. (1978). Physical properties of plant and animal materials. New York: Gordon

and Breach Science Publishers.

19. Olajide, J. O., Ade-Omowaye, B. I. O., & Otunola, E. T. (2000). Some physical properties of shea

kernel. Journal of Agricultural Engineering Research, 76, 419–421.

20. Olaniyan, A. M., & Oje, K. (2002). Some aspects of the mechanical properties of shea nut.

Biosystems Engineering, 81, 413–420.

21. Patel, G., 2005. Essential fats in walnuts are good for the heart and diabetes. J. Am. Diet. Assoc.

105, 1096–1097.

22. Sharifian, F., & Derafshi, M. H. (2008). Mechanical behavior of walnut under cracking conditions.

Journal of Applied Sciences, 8, 886–890.

23. Sitkei, G., 1986. Mechanics of Agricultural Materials. Elsevier Publisher, p. 25.

24. Tabatabaeefar A and Rajabipour A. 2005. Modeling the mass of apples by geometrical attributes.

Sci. Hortic., 105, pp 373–382.

25. Taheri-Garavand A., Ahmadi H and Gharibzahedi S.M.T., Investigation of moisturedependent

physical and chemical properties of red lentil cultivated in Iran. International Agricultural

Engineering Conference (IAEC). Bangkok, Thailand.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 234

Some Physical and Mechanical Properties of Hawthorn

Fruit

Zahra Basati Salman Habibi

Vali Rasooli-Sharabian

PhD. Student in Mechanical Biosystem Engineering, ,Department of Biosystem Engineering, Faculty of Agricultural Sciences and Natural Resources, University of Mohaghegh Ardabili. Iran.

MSc student of Agricultural Machinery Engineering, Agricultural Machinery Engineering,Dept., Faculty of Agricultural Engineering and Technology, University of Tehran, Karaj,Iran

Assistant Prof. in Department of Biosystem Engineering, Faculty of Agricultural Sciences and Natural Resources, University of

Mohaghegh Ardabili. Iran

Abstract The knowledge of physical properties of hawthorn (Crataegus spp.) fruit is necessary to design post harvesting equipment such as cleaning, sorting, grading, kernel removing, storage, packing and processing of fresh fruits. Also, the information supplied on the physical properties of the hawthorn fruit can be used in human nutrition. This study was done to analyze the physical and mechanical properties of the Iranian hawthorn fruit like (dimensions, geometric mean diameter, sphericity, fruit density, volume, surface area, friction coefficient and Hardness) at the moisture content of 71.23 percent. Other results showed that linear dimensions varied from 18.22 to 29.10 mm in length, 17.92 to 27.79 mm in width, and 13.82 to 21.40 mm in thickness. Mean mass and fruit volume was measured as 4.273g and 4657.8mm3, respectively. The geometric mean diameter, sphericity, fruit density and surface area were measured as 20.40mm, 87.74%, 1.04 (g/cm3) and 1316.42(mm2), respectively. The friction coefficient over the surface of wood, glass and galvanize sheet were 0.39, 0.54 and 0.45, respectively. The highest rupture force, deformation and toughness in this moisture content were obtained for hawthorn loaded along the X-axis. The mean values of cracking force and energy were measured 15.17 N and 579.35 MJ, respectively. Increasing in size of hawthom was found to increase on cracking force and energy.

Keywords: Hawthorn, Physical and Mechanical Properties, Friction Coefficient






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 235

1.Introduction

Hawthorn species often have trees or shrub that has leaves that are cut and significant lobe.

Hawthorn fruit like apples is very small. Some Crataegus constituents are predicted to be good

antioxidants. The flower and fruit constituents responsible for free radical scavenging activity are

epicatechin,hyperoside and chlorogenic acid. They are also among the best antilipoperoxidants

(Bahorun & Greiser, 1996; Bahorun & Trotin, 1994; Rakotoarison & Greissier, 1997). However, only

a few are used for medicinal purposes. Traditionally, the fruits or the berries are used for their

astringent properties in heavy menstrual bleeding and in diarrhoea. Both the flowers and berries act

as diuretic and can be used to treat kidney problems and dropsy.Apart from their delicious flavour,

hawthorn fruits have been shown to have a tonic effect on the heart. Fruits of our native species are

often used in the treatment of weak heart conditions, especially if this is accompanied by high blood

pressure (Baytop, 1984; Grieve, 1982; Schussler & Holzl, 1995; Wichtl, 1996). Studies have

confirmed the potential of hawthorn fruits as a good source of antioxidants constituents (Bahorun &

Greiser,1996; Bahorun & Trotin, 1994; Kery & Verzarne, 1977; Rakotoarison & Greissier, 1997).

Borghei et. al, 2000, studied the effect of direction of applied loading and walnut dimension on the

cracking force and deformation of walnut using an Instron test machine. All the tests were carried

out on dried walnuts in which the moisture content of the shell was 6%, w.b. The ranges of variation

for cracking force and relative deformation1 were 110-800 N and 0.01-0.045 respectively. With

increase in walnut dimension, the cracking force and deformation were increased. Several models

for predicting mass of kiwi based on physical attributes were determined and reported by Lorestani

and Tabatabaeefar (2006). The objective of this study was to investigate some physical properties of

the Iranian hawthorn fruit namely linear dimensions, unit mass and volume, sphericity, fruit

densities, surface area, rupture energy and coefficient of static friction against three structural

surfaces.

2.Method

The ripe fruits were used for all the experiments in this study. After buying the Iranian hawthorn

fruits from the market in Tehran city they were brought to the laboratory at Tehran University and






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 236

the test started between healthy fruits. Then, were isolated 100 randomly samples. Before the

experiment, The fruits were cleaned to remove all foreign matters such as dust, branches, leaves,

immature and damaged fruits. To obtain the moisture level of products, three samples of healthy

fruit were put into three containers and after measuring the mass of the fruit and container

separately, we put them within 48 hours and temperature of 78 º C in the Oven. Weight loss on

drying to a final constant weight was recorded as moisture content by (AOAC 1984) recommended

method and using the following equation (1):

(1)

(2)

where MC is moisture content (w.b.), Mo is initial mass and Md is the final mass of date fruit (g). The

100 unit mass was determined using precision electronic balance to an accuracy of 0.01 g. for

measurement of length (L), width (W) and thickness (T) using a micrometer screw gauge with a

reading of 0.01 mm. Fruit volumes were measured by water displacement method. Fruits were

weighed in air and allowed to float in water. Fruits were lowered with a needle into a graduated

beaker containing water and the mass of water displaced by the individual fruit was recorded.

Finally, fruit densities (g/cm3) were determined from mass and volume of 100 grains by using the

following equation (2) (Mohsenin, 1986):

(2)

where ρf and ρw are fruit and water densities (g/m3); Ma and Mw are mass of hawthorn in air and

water, respectively.

The geometric average diameter of hawthorn was calculated according Galedar et al. (2008) and

Mohsenin (1986).






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 237

(3)

The sphericity Sp (%) was calculated with use the relationship described by Koocheki et al. (2007)

and Milani (2007).

(4)

The surface area (S) of hawthorn fruit was found by analogy with a sphere of the same geometric

mean diameter using the expression cited by Sacilik et al. (2003).

(5)

The coefficients of static friction were obtained with respect to three different surfaces namely

galvanized steel, plywood and glass surfaces by using an inclined plane apparatus as described by

Dutta et al. (1988). The inclined plane was gently raised and the angle of inclination at which the

sample started sliding was read off the protractor with sensitivity of one degree. The tangent of the

angle was reported as the coefficient of friction (Dutta et al., 1988):

(6)

where, μ is the coefficient of friction and φ is the tilt angle of the friction device. All the friction

experiments were conducted in three replications for each surface.

Determination of fruits hardness

Hardness values of hawthorn were measured by applying forces using a Test Instrument of

Biological Materials and the procedure described by Aydın and O¨ gˇu¨ t (1991) (Fig. 1). The device






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 238

has three main components, which are a stationary and moving platform, a drive unit (AC electric

motor and electronic variator) and a data acquisition (Dynamometer, amplifier and XY recorder)

system. Hardness force was measured by the data acquisition system. The fruit was placed on the

moving lower platform and was pressed against the stationary platform. The probe used in the

experiment had a 5mm diameter and was connected to the dynamometer. Each experiment was

conducted at a loading velocity at 1mm/min.

In this study the effects of cracking force, absorbed energy were studied on fruit. All the tests were

conducted using an Instron test machine. Fiftye replications were used for each treatment. From the

compression speed and time, the hawthorn deformation was computed and force deformation curve

was plotted. Rupture force and deformation were measured directly from the plotted force–

deformation curve. Energy absorbed (Ea) by the sample at rupture was determined by calculating

the area under the force– deformation curve from the following equation (Braga et al., 1999; Gupta &

Das, 2000; Mohsenin, 1978).

(7)

Where Fr is the rupture force and Dr is the deformation at rupture point.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 239


Some physical and mechanical properties of the hawthorn in this research were studied, such as

length (L), width (W) , thickness (T),mass, Geometric mean diameter, Sphericity, surface area, Fruit

density, Volume and Hardness were measured as 23.01± 2.72 (mm), 21.90 ± 2.47(mm), 16.87±1.90

(mm), 4.27±1.20 (g),20.40± 2.27 (mm), 87.74± 2.91, 1316.42 ± 302.53 (mm2), 1.04± 0.19

(g/m3),4657.8± 1425 (mm3) and 1.6 ± 0.23 (N) respectively. The importance of dimensions is in

determining the aperture size of machines, particularly in separation of materials as discussed by

Mohsenin (1986). These dimensions can be used in designing machine components and parameters.

For example, it may be useful in estimating the number of fruits to be engaged at a time. The major

axis has been found to be useful by indicating the natural rest position of the fruit. The following

general expression can be used to describe the relationship between the average dimensions of fruits

at 71.23% (w.b.) moisture content. Physical properties such as weight, length and diameter of fruit,

mass, volume of fruit, geometric mean diameter, sphericity, fruit density, projected area, terminal

velocity, hardness and static coefficient of friction were established at the 71.23% moisture content

level. The moisture content is very important when determining the physical properties such as bulk

density, fruit density, porosity, pulp mass, static and dynamic coefficient of friction of hawthorn fruit

(Ajisegiri, 1987; Baryeh, 2001; Demir, Dog˘an, O¨ zcan, & Hacıseferog˘ulları, 2002; Demir & O¨ zcan,

2001; Hacıseferog˘ulları, Gezer, Bahtiyarca, & Menges_, 2003). Similar investigations were conducted

to determine the projected area, volume, bulk density, fruit density and terminal velocity by Demir

and O¨ zcan (2001) for rose fruits. Eighty-eight percent of fruit were between 3 and 6 g at a moisture

content of 71.23% in weight, 93% were between 17 and 23mm in Geometric mean diameter, 90%

were between 19 and 25mm in length. The dimensions obtained from the equation are close to

actual value. Grading fruit based on weight reduces packing and handling costs and also provides

suitable packing patterns (Khoshnam et al., 2007). Also mean coefficient of static friction, on

galvanized steel, plywood and glass surfaces, were obtained as 0.45, 0.39and 0.54, respectively.

Result of analysis showed that the surface materials had a significant difference on the static

coefficient of friction. The static coefficient of friction on galvanized steel was higher than that on

plywood and lower than that of glass surface. This is due to the frictional properties between the






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 240

fruits and surface materials. These properties may be useful in the separation process and the

transportation of the fruits.

The average cracking force required to break the hawthorn N, respectively. The highest rupture

force and energy in this moisture content were obtained for hawthorn loaded along the X-axis. The

mean values of cracking force and energy were measured 15.17 N and 579.35 MJ, respectively.

Increasing in size of hawthom was found to increase on cracking force and energy. Sharifian and

Derafshi (2008) reported that the rupture energy to fracture walnut shell increased as the

compression speed raised up to 200 mm/min.

4.Conclusion:

1- The average mass and volume for Hawthorn were found to be 4.273g and 4657.8mm3,

respectively.

2- The fruit density was measured as 1.04± 0.19(g/m3)

3- Linear dimensions ranged from 18.22 to 29.10 mm in length, 17.92 to 27.79 mm in width, and

13.82 to 21.40 mm in thickness.

4- The geometric mean diameter, sphericity and surface area were calculated as 20.40mm, 87.74%

and 1316.42(mm2), respectively.

5- The mean coefficients of static friction, on galvanized steel, plywood and glass surfaces, were

obtained as 0.45, 0.39 and 0.54, respectively.

References

1.Ajisegiri, E. S. (1987). Sorption phenomena and storage stability of some tropical agricultural

grains. Unpublished PhD thesis, Faculty of Technology, University of Ibadan, Nigeria.

2.AOAC. 1984. Official methods of analysis. 14th edition. Association of Official Analytical Chemists,

Washington D.C.

3.Aydın, C., & O¨ g˘u¨ t, H. (1991). Determination of some biological properties of Amasya apple and

hazelnuts. Selcuk University The Journal of Agricultural Faculty, 1(1), 45–54, in Turkish.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 241

4.Bahorun, T., & Greiser, B. (1996). Oxygen species scavenging activity of phenolic extracts from

hawthorn fresh plant organs and pharmaceutical preparations. Arzneimittel-Forschung/Drug

Research, 46, 1086–1089.

5.Bahorun, T., & Trotin, F. (1994). Antioxidant activities of Crataegus monogyna extracts. Planta

Medica, 60, 323–326.

6.Baryeh, E. A. (2001). Physical properties of bambara groundnuts. Journal of Food Engineering, 47,

321–326.

7.Baytop, T. (1984). Treatment with plants in Turkey. _Istanbul University Publication No. 3255,

_Istanbul (in Turkish).

8.Borghei. A. M , J. Khazaei and T. Tavakoli. Design, Construction and Testing of Walnut Cracker.

AgEng2000 Conference. Paper No: 00-PH-029.

9.Braga, G. C., Couto, S. M., Hara, T., & Neto, J. T. P. A. (1999). Mechanical behaviour of macadamia nut

under compression loading. Journal of Agricultural Engineering Research, 72, 239–245.

10.Demir, F., & O¨ zcan, M. (2001). Chemical and technological properties of rose (Rosa canina L) fruits

grown wild in Turkey. Journal of Food Engineering, 47, 333–336.

11.Demir, F., Dog˘an, H., O¨ zcan, M., & Hacıseferog˘ulları, H. (2002). Nutritional and physical

properties of hackberry (Celtis australis L.). Journal of Food Engineering, 54, 241–247.

12.Dutta, S.K., V.K. Nema and R.K. Bhardwaj. 1988. Physical properties of grain. Journal of Agricultural

Engineering Research 39: 259-268.

13.Galedar M.N., Jafari A., and Tabatabaeefar A., 2008. Some physical properties of wild pistachio nut

and kernel as a function of moisture content. J. Physics Environ. Agric. Sci., 22, 117-124

14.Grieve, M. A. (1982). Modern herbal. Dover Publications Inc. Hacıseferog˘ulları, H., Gezer, _I.,

Bahtiyarca, Y., & Menges_, H. O. (2003). Determination of some chemical and physical properties of

Sakız faba bean (Vicia faba L. var. Major). Journal of Food Engineering, 60, 475–479.

15.Gupta, R. K., & Das, S. K. (2000). Fracture resistance of sunflower seed and kernel to compressive

loading. Journal of Food Engineering, 46, 1–8.

16.Hacıseferog˘ulları, H., Gezer, _I., Bahtiyarca, Y., & Menges_, H. O. (2003). Determination of some

chemical and physical properties of Sakız faba bean (Vicia faba L. var. Major). Journal of Food

Engineering, 60, 475–479.

17.Kery, A., & Verzarne, P. G. (1977). Comparative study of flavonoids from Crataegus oxyacanha and

Crataegus monogyna. Acta Pharm. Hung., 47, 11–23.

18.Khoshnam, F., A. Tabatabaeefar, M. Ghasemi Varnamkhasti and A. Borghei. 2007. Mass modeling of

pomegranate (Punica granatum L.) fruit with some physical characteristics. Scientia Horticulturae

114: 1, 21-26.

19.Koocheki A., Razavi S.M.A., Milani E., Moghadan T.M., Abedini M., Alamatiyan S., and Izadikhah S.,

2007.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 242

20.Lorestani, A.N and Tabatabaeefar A., 2006. Modeling the mass of Kiwi fruit by geometrical

attributes. Int. Agrophysics, 20, pp 135–139.

21.Milani E., Razavi S.M.A., Koocheki A., Nikzadeh V., Vahedi N., MoeinFord M., and GholamhosseinPour

A., 2007. Moisture dependent physical properties of cucurbit seeds. Int. Agrophysics, 21, 157-168.

22.Mohsenin, N. N. (1978). Physical properties of plant and animal materials. New York: Gordon and

Breach Science Publishers.

23.Mohsenin, N.N. 1986. Physical properties of Plant and Animal Materials. 2nd edition (revised). 2nd

Ed.; Gordon & Breach Science Publishers, New York.

24.Physical properties of watermelon seed as a function of moisture content and variety. Int.

Agrophysics, 21, 349-359.

25.Rakotoarison, D. A., & Greissier, B. (1997). Antioxidant activities of phenolic extracts from flowers,

in vitro callus and cell suspension cultures of Crataegus monogyna. Pharmazie, 52, 60–64.

26.Sacilik K., Ozturkurk R., and Keskin R., 2003. Some physical properties of hempseed. Biosys. Eng.,

86(2), 191 198.

27.Schussler, M., & Holzl, J. (1995). Myocardial effects of flavonoids from Crataegus species.

Arzneimittel-Forschung, 45, 842–845.

28.Sharifian, F., & Derafshi, M. H. (2008). Mechanical behavior of walnut under cracking conditions.

Journal of Applied Sciences, 8, 886–890.

29.Wichtl, M. (1996). Herbal drugs and phytopharmaceuticals. In N. Bisset (Ed.), A handbook for

practice on a scientific basis (pp. 161–166). CRC: Medpharm Scientific Publishers.






Students Symposium


June 5-6, 2016

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 243

Documents

The Book of Extended Abstracts - University of …...تلايصحت ىای جش اد یللولاييب م یز پوس ييه س زاقفق ۀیداحتا ضع یا اگش اد یليوکت